ffte  ENGLISH  of  MILITARY 
COMMUNICATIONS 


GANOE 


1  ^ 

•St 

WAR 

)f? 

SERyiCE 

?»«• 

nmeKSSH 

4iS^ 

■w. 

BOOKS  ARE 

'feTl^  S3 

I 

PROVIDED-BY 

kH^^ 

1 

THE-PEOPLE 
OF-THE 

Hr  r^Kk -^ 

^^ 

UNITED-STATES 

t"- 

THROUGHTHE 
AMERICAN 
LIBRARY 

1 

ASSOCIATION 

FOR 

THE-USE-OF 

THE-SOLDIERS 

AND 'SAILORS 

LIBRARY 

UNIVERSITY  OF 

CALIFORNIA 

IRVINE 


i 


V 


.1 


'  A' 


yy-  /  ^//g' 


The  ENGLISH  0/ MILITARY 
COMMUNICATIONS 


5y       y 

WILLIAM  A.  GANOE 

Major  of  Infantry,  United  States  Army 

Assistant  Professor  of  English 
United  States  Military  Academy 


GEORGE  BANTA  PUBLISHING  COMPANY 
Mekasha,  Wisconsin 


Copyright,  1918 

by 

George  Banta  Publishing  Company 


PRINTED  AND  BOUND  SV 

OEORQE  BANTA  PUBUSHINQ  CO. 

MANUFACTURING  PUBLISHERS 

MENASHA,  WISCONSIN 


CONTENTS 

PAOB 

Foreword v 

Preface    vn 

Chapter  I — Our  Approach  to  a  Critical  Matter   1 

Chapter  II — Military  Communications  20 

Chapter  III — Problems  in  the  Composition  of  the  Field  Message  83 
Chapter  IV — More  Problems  on  the  Composition  of  the  Field 

Message   41 

Chapter  V — Verbal  Field  Message  49 

Chapter  VI— The  Field  Order,  The  Estimate,  The  Decision,  The 

Expression    68 

Chapter  VII — Problems  in  the  Field  Order  73 

Chapter  VIII — More  Problems  of  the  Composition  of  the  Field 

Order    93 

Chapter  IX— The  Verbal  Field  Order 110 

Chapter  X — The  Operation  Order,  Orders,  Letters  of  Instruction  124 

Chapter  XI — The  War  Diary — The  Report — Routine  Orders 147 

Chapter  XII — Official  Correspondence — Explanations — Lectures  164 

Appendices    186 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2007  witii  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


lnttp://www.arcliive.org/details/englisliofmilitarOOganoiala 


FOREWORD 

It  is  important  in  military  matters  that  a  writer  shall 
express  definitely  the  ideas  he  intends  to  convey  and  in 
such  phraseology  that  there  can  be  no  misunderstanding 
of  the  language  used.  Carelessly  or  improperly  phrased 
instructions  have  caused  many  miscarriages  of  military 
plans.  The  attainment  of  perfection  in  the  use  of  lan- 
guage is  a  matter  of  painstaking  study  and  the  gradual 
refinement  of  practice.  Merely  dreaming  of  what  one  will 
do  when  responsibility  is  thrust  upon  him  is  not  the  way 
to  prepare  for  successful  achievement.  It  is  the  duty  of 
every  self  respecting  officer  to  be  ready  to  do  not  only  his 
best  but  to  do  what  is  right. 

When  one  has  qualified  himself  to  write  or  dictate  orders 
and  instructions  properly  he  has  already  learned  to  inter- 
pret those  he  may  receive  from  others.  Accuracy  of  lan- 
guage demands  discipline  of  mind.  Under  our  system  of 
raising  war  armies  much  has  had  to  be  entrusted  to  men 
without  either  discipline  of  mind  or  of  character.  This 
makes  it  necessary  for  officers  not  only  to  be  qualified 
themselves  to  prepare  and  to  interpret  orders,  but  to  teach 
the  art  to  others. 

Carelessly  written  instructions  are  like  contoured  maps 
with  the  base  data  omitted,  leaving  one  in  doubt  as  to 
whether  he  is  observing  a  hill  or  a  depression.  A  recent 
instance  of  such  carelessness,  coming  under  my  observa- 
tion, may  serve  to  illustrate  this:  orders  were  received  at 
my  headquarters  to  call  out  certain  reservists  for  actual 
service  and  direct  them  to  report  at  Fort  Wayne,  Indiana. 
In  the  execution  of  the  order  individual  telegrams  were 
dispatched  during  the  night.  As  orders  had  been  received 
previously  to  turn  over  for  the  training  of  such  reservists 
sevsral  permanent  posts,  including  Fort  Wayne,  near  De- 


troit,  Michigan,  telegraphic  inquiry  was  made  to  find  out 
if  a  mistake  had  been  made.  The  reply  established  that 
the  Post  of  Fort  Wayne,  Michigan,  and  not  the  City  of 
Fort  Wayne,  Indiana,  was  intended. 

Modern  warfare  of  nations-in-arms  is  vastly  different 
from  the  campaigns  and  open  field  fighting  of  the  smaller 
armies  of  past  wars.  Nations  no  longer  entrust  the  prepa- 
ration and  solution  of  their  military  problems  to  old  type 
of  practical  soldiers.  Military  Academies,  War  Colleges, 
and  General  Staff  Colleges  have  become  necessary  to  in- 
sure that  only  trained  men  shall  be  entrusted  with  the 
preparation  of  instructions  for  the  employment  of  the 
forces. 

To  combine  the  study  of  tactical  problems,  the  prepara- 
tion of  orders  and  the  correct  use  of  language,  as  con- 
templated by  Major  Ganoe,  will  afford  a  great  advantage 
to  the  student  of  today,  and  should  make  the  diaries, 
journals,  arid  war  histories  of  the  future  finished  writings 
without  necessity  for  editing.  These  are  the  true  sources 
of  military  history,  a  knowledge  of  which  is  essential  to 
the  ambitious  officer  desirous  of  perfecting  himself  in  his 
profession. 

(signed)      William  Harding  Carteh, 
Major  General,  United  States  Army. 


PREFACE 

This  course  of  lessons  has  for  its  sole  object  a  demon- 
stration to  the  military  man  that  rhetoric  is  a  big  part  of 
his  profession.  If  he  sees  this  advantage  early  it  is  hoped 
that  he  will  not  slight  his  rich  language  as  so  many  of  us 
have  done  to  our  later  regret.  Vocational  training  in 
English !  That  is  practically  what  this  book  is.  It  is 
recognizing  rhetoric  for  the  first  time  as  a  separate  study 
in  the  field  service  regulations.  Just  as  we  take  up  topog- 
raphy, engineering,  sanitation,  and  supply  as  sciences  by 
themselves  in  order  to  fit  our  efficiency  into  the  team  work 
of  battle  later,  so  here  we  apply  ourselves  to  that  part  of 
field  work  which  helps  us  state  our  ideas  in  a  proper  mili- 
tary manner. 

The  course  is  in  no  way  tactics,  but  it  forms  an  excel- 
lent primer  to  tactics.  It  leads  up  to  and  aids  in  the  solu- 
tion of  tactical  problems  by  passing  over  military  ground. 
Because  it  is  a  combination  of  analysis  and  synthesis, 
rhetoric,  as  we  know,  is,  unlike  the  exact  sciences,  purely 
a  secondary  subject.  Its  material,  whether  of  poetry, 
essay,  or  fiction,  is  indiscriminate  in  its  selection  of  mat- 
ter so  long  as  the  matter  is  good.  The  idea  in  this  book  is 
to  make  both  the  material  and  the  treatment  count — to 
place  the  emphasis  upon  the  manner  of  expressing  one- 
self and  to  let  the  student  see  incidentally  the  interesting 
military  features  as  he  is  passing  along.  He  will  be 
learning  what  he  has  never  before  had  the  opportunity  of 
taking  up  separately,  and  what  will  lead  him  more  easily 
into  intricate  tactical  paths  afterwards. 

Some  will  criticise  the  book  in  that  the  author  is  not 
conforming  to  the  principles  which  he  is  enunciating.  They 
will  say,  "He  tells  us  to  boil  our  communications  to  the 
clearest  minimum  while  he  himself  deals  in  reiteration  and 


illumination."  Although  this  objection  appears  just,  it 
is  nevertheless  cursory.  A  closer  view  will  reveal  the  fact 
that  the  "purpose  and  readers  of  communications  are  quite 
different  from  the  purpose  and  readers  of  a  text  book. 
One  of  the  first  principles  we  learn  in  rhetoric  is  to  suit 
our  treatment  and  diction  to  our  purpose  and  readers. 
Commanders  await  with  interest  and  expectancy  the  words 
of  a  field  message  or  order.  Students  await  with  skepti- 
cism or  inertia  the  chapters  of  their  lessons.  Although 
we  rightly  can  prescribe  the  severest  clearness  for  some- 
thing which  is  bound  to  be  absorbed,  we  cannot  be  satis- 
fied with  one  precise,  colorless  statement  of  that  which 
is  likely  to  be  ignored.  The  student  must  be  cudgeled  and 
enticed.  As  a  proof  of  the  correctness  of  this  position, 
this  course  has  been  tried  with  unexpected  success  upon 
the  Cadets  of  the  United  States  Military  Academy.  The 
very  items  which  have  been  repeated  and  highly  colored 
have  proven  themselves  to  the  instructors  to  be  the  very 
ones  which  have  more  easily  driven  the  points  home. 

Grateful  acknowledgment  is  made  by  the  author  to 
Lieut.  Colonel  L.  H,  Holt,  Professor  of  English  and  His- 
tory, who  made  the  book  possible;  to  Captain  G.  Hoising- 
ton.  Infantry,  for  drawing  a  plate;  to  Captains  J.  R. 
N.  Weaver,  Infantry,  R.  H.  Lee,  Coast  Artillery  Corps, 
L.  E.  Moreton,  Coast  Artillery  Corps,  C.  C.  Benson, 
Cavalry,  and  J,  H.  Grant,  24th  Infantry,  for  their  valu- 
able criticism;  and  to  Major  A.  W.  Chilton,  Infantry,  for 
the  revision  of  the  book  in  order  to  make  it  conform  to  the 
practical  work  passed  over — by  his  disinterested  correc- 
tion the  whole  becomes  more  valuable  as  a  text. 

W.  A.  G. 


CHAPTER  I 

OUR   APPROACH   TO   A   CRITICAL 
MATTER 

All  militar}'  language  should  be  of  the  utmost  brevity 
and  clarity.  Death  and  disaster  are  the  direct  results 
of  ambiguity.  Throughout  all  history  mistaken  directions 
and  informati  )n  have  been  the  ruin  of  whole  campaigns. 
Careless  wordiig,  like  careless  shooting,  is  not  only  ineffec- 
tive but  often  suicidal. 

The  object  of  these  few  lessons  is  to  give  practice  in 
putting  the  language  of  military  communication  into  form. 
It  is  hoped  that  by  means  of  certain  technical  and  rhetori- 
cal principles  the  student  may  gain  proficiency  in  express- 
ing his  thoughts  as  he  intends  them  and  as  military  effi- 
ciency demands  them. 

Our  Field  Service  Regulations  state  that  "clear  and 
decisive  orders  are  the  logical  result  of  definite  and  sure 
decisions."  But  this  statement  does  not  imply  that  if  a 
person  arrives  at  a  definite  and  sure  decision,  he  gains 
clear  and  decisive  phraseology  without  effort  on  his  part. 
General  Wagner,  a  pioneer  among  American  military 
authorities,  divides  into  completely  separate  operations  the 
act  of  deciding  upon  a  definite  plan  of  action  and  that  of 
drafting  or  framing  orders  which  will  carry  that  decision 
into  effect.  One  is  purely  military  and  has  to  do  with  dis- 
positions of  forces ;  the  other  is  mainly  rhetorical  and  has 
to  do  with  manipulations  of  language.  Many  a  military 
man  has  decided  certainly  in  his  own  mind  what  he  is  going 
to  do  in  order  to  carry  out  his  mission,  only  to  be  faced 
immediately  with  a  harder  task.    He  must  set  that  definite 


2  English  of  Military  Communications 

idea  in  the  mind  of  some  one  else.  "How,"  he  sighs,  "shall 
I  put  this  so  as  to  let  my  Captains,  Smith  and  Jones, 
know  exactly  what  I  want?"  He  seats  himself  on  a  warm 
rock  under  the  blazing  sun  and  chews  his  pencil.  What 
he  at  first  writes  down,  he  finds,  is  full  of  loop-holes  and  is 
not  expressive  of  what  he  means.  He  tries  again,  crosses 
out  words  here  and  there,  adds  others,  and  changes  his 
sentences  until  the  whole  is  undecipherable.  In  disgust  he 
tears  up  the  paper  and  tries  again.  After  fifteen  minutes 
of  such  effort  he  holds  in  his  hand  a  few  paragraphs  of 
which  he  is  not  proud,  but  which  will  have  to  do.  There 
has  been  no  want,  perhaps,  of  clear  tactical  reasoning  on 
his  part,  but  rather  a  distinct  lack  of  ability  to  drive 
common  English  home.  His  case,  we  find,  is  not  excep- 
tional. One  has  only  to  listen  to  the  discussions  of  mili- 
tary beginners  (or  of  some,  alas,  who  are  not  military 
beginners)  to  hear  this  statement  confirmed.  How  often 
after  having  given  careful  or  even  brilliant  estimates  of 
a  situation  will  a  man  burst  out  with,  "I  know  what  I 
mean  right  here,  but  don't  quite  know  how  to  say  it !" 
All  the  way  along  there  has  been  a  decided  blank  space 
between  decision  in  the  mind  and  embodiment  in  language. 
Whether  slang,  profanity,  or  colloquialisms  have  cut 
into  our  ordinary  speech  to  such  an  extent  as  to  keep  us  at 
a  loss  for  the  apt  word,  or  whether  we  have  grown  careless 
or  slovenly  in  our  habits  of  expression,  is  a  matter  with 
which  we  are  not  concerned  here.  We  do  know  that  we 
are  continually  hampered  by  our  inability  to  state  abso- 
lutely our  meaning.  This  lack  of  skill  in  composition  which 
besets  us,  we  must  overcome  in  our  profession,  for  the  sake 
of  the  lives  dependent  upon  our  words.  Napoleon  sitting 
at  his  desk  scribbling  off  orders  and  messages  as  fast  as 
his  nimble  fingers  can  travel,  his  secretaries  standing  about 
him  grasping  each  finished  piece  from  under  his  pen  and 


English  of  Military  Communications  $ 

sending  it  off  immediately  by  courier  without  revision 
or  correction,  is  a  dazzling  picture  for  the  military  leader 
to  contemplate.  In  his  writing,  a  commander  capable  of 
carrying  out  single-handed  all  the  phases  and  minor  items 
of  the  mightiest  of  campaigns  could,  no  doubt,  be  precise 
and  accurate  habitually.  He  was  a  genius.  Yet  Napoleon 
had  had  long  years  of  practice  in  putting  his  will  into 
words ;  for,  we  are  told,  he  began  to  compose  orders  and  to 
think  tactically  and  strategically  at  a  time  of  life  when 
most  of  us  have  not  even  chosen  our  careers.  If,  then, 
we  can  try  our  hand  at  transcribing  our  ideas  in  as  forma- 
tive a  period  as  possible  in  our  military  careers,  we,  too, 
may  attain  a  proficiency  that  will  become  a  second  nature 
with  us.  At  least,  we  may  put  behind  us  a  great  part  of 
this  uninteresting  but  indispensable  work  of  learning  to 
control  our  language,  before  we  confront  the  more  serious 
task  of  straightening  out  tactical  and  strategical  difficul- 
ties in  the  presence  of  the  enemy. 

Incidentally,  while  we  are  on  our  way  in  our  progress  in 
expression,  we  may  pick  up  much  valuable  military  infor- 
mation. In  our  practice  with  tactical  language  we  must 
make  use  of  certain  facts  which  have  been  found  by  ex- 
perience appropriate  to  certain  happenings  connected 
with  officers'  and  soldiers'  duties.  We  shall  be  in  constant 
touch  with  the  workings  of  patrols,  advance  guards,  out- 
posts, and  forces  in  battle.  Like  so  many  reporters  we 
shall  be  present  at  maneuvers  putting  our  notes  into 
graphic  and  specific  form. 

Now,  however,  we  are  going  to  rivet  our  attention  to 
the  main  issue — the  mastery  of  clear  and  brief  military 
communication.  It  has  been  mentioned  that  such  ready 
skill  often  prevents  loss  of  battles  and  human  life.  It 
prevents  another  loss  which  we  have  not  taken  up  sepa- 
rately— the  loss  of  time.     The  officer  who  sat  chewing  his 


4  English  of  Militarif  Communicatioju 

pencil  on  the  warm  rock  threw  away  from  ten  to  twelve 
minutes  which  might  have  been  used  profitably  upon  the 
accomplishment  of  his  mission — an  amount  of  time  which 
might  have  given  the  very  advantage  needed  to  gain  a  com- 
plete victory  over  the  enemy.  If  he  had  had  a  skilful  work- 
ing knowledge  of  his  own  Mother  Tongue,  the  delay  would 
not  have  occurred.  His  effectiveness  was  lost  for  want  of 
power  of  expression.  To  illustrate  further,  consider  for 
a  moment  an  army  post  going  about  its  routine  duties 
of  drill,  guard,  and  police.  Into  the  Adjutant's  office 
walks  an  individual  who  announces  himself  to  be  Major 
Smart  of  the  Inspector  General's  Department.  On  being 
introduced  to  the  Colonel,  he  identifies  himself,  and  gives 
immediate  orders  that  the  Colonel  shall  have  his  regiment 
on  the  parade  ground  ready  for  field  service  in  fifteen 
minutes.  When  the  troops  are  formed,  the  Inspector  rides 
up  to  the  Colonel,  hands  him  a  type-written  tactical  prob- 
lem, and  asks  for  a  solution  of  it  as  soon  as  possible.  The 
Inspector  then  takes  out  his  watch  and  observes.  If  the 
Colonel  consumes  more  than  a  reasonable  number  of 
minutes  in  writing  his  orders,  or  if  he  shows  a  hesitancy  in 
so  doing,  or  if  he  must  seek  aid  from  his  Adjutant,  it  is 
surprising  to  note  how  soon  after  Major  Smart's  depar- 
ture from  the  post,  the  Colonel  receives  a  letter  from 
Washington  apprising  him  of  his  shortcomings,  and  rec- 
ommending, for  his  own  good,  a  speedy  remedy.  Because 
of  the  inroads  upon  eflficiency,  the  War  Department,  like 
any  good  business  firm,  cannot  brook  vacillation  or  unwar- 
ranted loss  of  time. 

We  must,  then,  adopt  some  method  or  procedure  by 
which  we  will  effectually  beat  down  the  causes  of  this  loss 
of  time,  battles,  and  life.  After  analysing  past  profi- 
ciencies and  deficiencies  in  military  communication,  we  spy 
out  from  all  the  roads  to  the  goal  open  to  us,  two  whick 


English  of  Military  CommunicMiiont  6 

appear  to  be  shorter  than  the  rest.  If  we  guide  ourselves 
along  these  we  shall  come  upon  our  object  in  the  quickest 
way.  Since  the  first  leads  into  the  second,  they  are  given 
here  in  order.  We  should  strive:  (1)  To  learn  to  find 
quickly  expressions  which  will  cover  information  and  de- 
cisions that  are  trying  to  struggle  into  language;  and  (2) 
To  plant  that  information  and  decision  into  the  recipient's 
understanding  exactly  as  it  was  rooted  in  our  minds. 

The  first  process  is  that  of  defining  thoughts  exactly 
and  briefly. 

The  second  process  is  that  of  making  those  thoughts  so 
unmistakable  that  the  most  stupid  cannot  misunderstand 
and  the  most  captious  cannot  misinterpret. 

After  we  have  done  the  first,  we  should  look  over  our 
work  and  be  certain  that  we  have  done  the  second. 

The  first  has  to  do  with  the  kind  of  situation  that  faced 
the  man  who  knew  what  he  "wanted  to  say  but  couldn't 
express  himself."  Some  authorities  argue  that  there  is  no 
difference  between  clear  thinking  and  clear  expression. 
They  give  no  place  to  the  "mute  inglorious  Milton."  They 
would  not  concede  that  the  man  groping  for  language 
had  formed  a  definite  plan  in  his  mind,  because  that 
plan  was  not  definite  enough  to  be  expressed.  "If  he  has 
not  thought  in  language,"  they  say,  "he  has  not  really 
thought."  Their  opponents  claim  that  a  man  thinks  in 
pictures,  and  that  he  conceives  his  ideas  as  a  painter  imag- 
ines objects.  In  his  mind  are  the  outlines  and  colors  of 
what  he  considers.  There  is  truth  in  both  views  of  the 
matter.  But  it  is  likely  from  what  we  know  of  the  training 
of  the  military  man  that  his  mind  works  more  by  visualiz- 
ing the  troops  and  by  conjuring  up  the  scene  than  by  gain- 
ing his  conceptions  through  words.  His  forces  are  moving 
along  roads,  occupying  trenches,  or  surging  into  conflict. 
His  map  is  not  a  plane  surface  with  names  upon  it,  but  a 


6  English  of  Military  Communicationt 

vision  of  highways,  waving  corps,  and  rolling  hills.  He  is 
looking  at  these  things  without  mentally  describing  them. 
For  the  purpose  of  this  course,  we  shall  take  the  view  that 
there  are  occasions  where  we  deduce  certain  results,  but  are 
unable,  because  of  unfamiliarity  with  framing  good  sen- 
tences or  because  of  a  small  vocabulary,  to  communicate 
those  results  or  deductions  in  accordance  with  common 
usage. 

The  second  road  can  be  illustrated  by  comparison  with 
the  first.  There  is  a  wide  difference,  although  at  first  there 
does  not  appear  to  be,  between  merely  stating  a  thing 
clearly  and  making  it  unmistakable.  The  first  is  but  a 
negative  approach  to  complete  certainty  of  expression, 
but  the  second  must  be  a  positive  one.  The  distinction 
is  one  more  or  less  of  attitude  of  mind,  and  although  here- 
tofore it  has  been  overlooked  as  an  entity  in  English  text 
books  and  military  regulations,  it  assuredly  illustrates  it- 
self in  two  types  of  men  who  actually  exist.  The  man  who 
is  content  with  merely  making  himself  clear  takes  the  atti- 
tude of,  "O,  well,  they  will  get  what  I  meant  because  any 
other  interpretation  is  absurd  or  incorrect."  The  man 
who  is  not  content  unless  he  makes  himself  unmistakable 
says,  "I  won't  let  any  of  them  have  the  slightest  excuse 
for  any  other  interpretation;  when  I  get  through  there 
will  be  but  one  interpretation  and  that  will  be  mine."  The 
first  one  in  sending  a  message  to  his  commanding  officer 
locates  himself  by  putting  in  his  heading,  "Irrigation 
ditch  500  yards  east  of  southeast  corner  of  Catholic 
Church."  He  notices  another  irrigation  ditch  fifty  yards 
further  to  the  east,  but  says  to  himself,  "If  my  command- 
ing officer  measures  the  distance  on  the  map  he  will  know 
which  one  I  mean."  The  second  man,  upon  looking  about 
him  and  discovering  the  other  ditch,  does  not  accept  the 


English  of  Military  Communications  7 

chance  of  letting  his  commanding  officer  confuse  the  two 
ditches  by  a  possible  dift'erence  of  maps  or  measuring  in- 
struments. He  investigates  further.  By  moving  a  few 
yards  to  the  top  of  a  hillock  he  notices  that  the  farther 
ditch  is  entirely  a  dirt  construction  whereas  the  one  he 
occupies  is  a  concrete  one.  He  confirms  this  intelligence 
by  looking  at  his  map  which  shows  the  ditches  to  be  as  he 
has  made  them  out.  He,  therefore,  heads  his  message, 
"Concrete  irrigation  ditch  500  yards  east  of  southeast 
corner  of  Catholic  Church."  This  is  a  case  where  an 
added  word  has  made  the  meaning  more  proof  against 
error.  There  are  similar  cases  where  a  word  taken  away, 
or  the  change  of  a  phrase,  clause,  or  sentence,  will  make 
the  recipient  of  the  communication  more  sure  of  the  true 
state  of  affairs. 

To  sum  up  as  far  as  we  have  gone,  we  see  that  our 
object  is  to  put  military  communication  into  proper  form; 
that  the  failure  to  make  our  expression  of  the  utmost 
brevity  and  clarity  causes  loss  of  efficiency,  battles,  and 
life;  that  a  condition  of  inability  to  express  ourselves 
exists  widely;  that  by  starting  as  early  as  we  can  to 
practice  clear  and  brief  form  within  the  bounds  of  rhetori- 
cal and  military  rules  (which,  after  all,  are  nothing  more 
than  those  of  common  sense),  we  shall  overcome  this  defi- 
ciency ;  and  that  for  ourselves  we  are  going  to  direct  our 
course  along  two  highways,  viz. : 

(1)  To  learn  to  find  quickly  expressions  which  will 
cover  information  and  decisions  that  are  trying  to  strug- 
gle into  language;  and 

(2)  To  plant  that  information  or  decision  in  the  re- 
cipient's understanding  exactly  as  it  was  rooted  in  our 
minds. 

We  have,  so  far,  rehearsed  the  general  attitude  we  must 
adopt  toward  conquering  indefinite  and  lengthy  expres- 


fl  English  of  Military  Communications 

sion.  Because  this  weakness  is  so  natural  to  us,  we  can- 
not afford  to  trifle  witii  it  if  we  wish  to  become  a  factor 
in  battle.  Positive  decisions  and  information  must  be  given 
in  a  positive  way.  Since  no  other  kind  of  decision  or  in- 
formation is  countenanced  in  the  military  service,  we  must 
search  for  specific  means  of  having  our  language  stand 
sturdily  by  itself. 

It  must  not  choke  our  idea  or  our  will,  however  little. 
Our  decisiveness  must  reach  our  farthest  superior  or  sub- 
ordinate; and  words,  phrases,  clauses,  sentences,  and 
paragraphs  are  going  to  be  our  only  representatives.  Tliey 
alone  will  stand  for  us.  Every  pencil  mark  on  that  paper 
will  be  a  part  of  the  photograph  of  our  intelligence.  Our 
phraseology  will  be  ourselves.  We  shall  be  judged  by  it, 
and  rightly  so,  at  a  time  when  we  shall  have  no  chance 
to  offer  an  amendment,  an  excuse,  or  an  I -didn't -me  an^ 
quite-that. 

Guide-posts  must  mark  our  highways,  if  we  are  in 
earnest  about  our  destination  of  brevity  and  clarity.  In 
the  specific  hints  which  follow  as  to  what  to  do  and  what 
not  to  do,  there  will  be  no  attempt  to  point  the  way  to 
literary  effects  which  have  entertainment  for  their  sole 
object.  Our  effort  must  be  to  find  a  practical  and  speedy 
outlet  for  military  information  and  decision  through  the 
most  unmistakable  channels.  But  since  we  must  be  terse 
and  clear  even  to  entertain,  most  of  the  rules  of  English 
will  apply  here.  So  we  must  not  betray  surprise  or  an- 
guish when  we  are  beset  on  our  way  by  some  old  enemies 
with  whom  we  have  wrestled  in  rhetorics.  In  meeting 
them  again  we  shall  become  the  stronger  because  of  the 
exercise  on  new  and  professional  ground.  The  effort  to 
put  facts  into  forceful  and  compact  form  now,  will  create 
for  us  such  a  habit  of  brevity  and  clarity  that  later  on 
we  shall  have  room  in  our  natural  language  for  only  such 
ideas  and  decisions  as  are  brief  and  clear. 


English  of  Military  CommunicaiioM  0 

WHAT  WE  MUST  NOT  DO 

As  TO  Words. 

1.  Never  use  a  terra  which  depends  upon  the  point  of 
view  of  the  observer,  such  as  right,  left,  in  front  of,  behind, 
on  this  side,  beyond,  and  the  like.  Any  of  these  directions 
may  be  turned  askew  in  nine  cases  out  of  ten  for  the  hearer 
or  reader.  Use  instead  north,  east,  etc. — the  points  of 
the  compass — designations  which  do  not  change.  To  give 
an  exact  position  of  a  place,  state  the  number  of  yards  it 
lies  south,  west,  etc.,  of  a  certain  point  on  the  map  or  of 
a  well-known  object  called  a  reference  point. 

Exceptions. — Right  and  left  may  be  used  in  regard  to 
individuals,  banks  of  a  stream,  and  flanks  of  troops,  be- 
cause their  rights  and  lefts  do  not  change.  The  right  of 
a  man  is  the  side  on  which  his  right  arm  is  no  matter  which 
way  he  faces;  the  right  bank  of  a  stream  is  the  right  as 
the  observer  faces  down  stream ;  the  right  flank  of  a  body 
of  troops  is  the  right  as  the  troops  face  the  enemy. 
(Troops  in  retreat  are  supposed  to  be  facing  the  enemy. 
The  rearguard  in  reality  is  doing  so.) 

2.  Do  not  use  qualifying  words  such  as,  sort  of,  kind 
of,  very,  almost,  quite,  exceedingly,  tremendously,  some- 
what, rather,  nearly,  and  the  like; 

For, 

(a).  They  lessen  force,  because  they  render  uncertain 
ideas  which  should  be  definite ;  and 

(b).  They  mean  different  things  to  different  people. 
Smith's  almost  may  achieve;  Jones'  almost  may  scarcely 
start. 

3.  Do  not  use  slang.  There  is  usually  a  word  which 
will  express  the  meaning  more  truthfully.  "Putting  it 
over"  may  mean  complete  victory  or  a  sniper's  accurate 
shot.    The  phrase  is  not  truthful. 


10  English  of  Military  Communications 

4.  Use  no  abbreviations  except  A.  M.,  and  P.  M.,  and 
those  given  in  Appendix  9  of  our  Field  Service  Regula- 
tions.*    Noon  and  midnight  should  be  written  out  fully. 

5.  Never  use  he,  it,  this,  him,  her,  their,  them,  that, 

those,  which,  whose,  or  the  like,  without  looking  at  them 

from  every  angle  to  make  sure  that  they  refer  to  a  single 

word.     If  they  refer  to  a  whole  statement  or  to  two  or 

more  possible  \^ords,  they  are  used  wrongly.    The  addition 

of  a  noun  will  usually  fix  the  meaning.     Suppose  you  were 

to  receive  a  message  with  this  sentence  in  it: 

The  platoon  leader  assigned  to  one  squad  the  wrong  objective, 
and  it  delayed  the  firing. 

Grammatically,  the  objective  delayed  the  firing.  Logi- 
cally, either  the  act  of  the  platoon  leader  or  the  squad 
delayed  the  firing.  You  make  out  by  re-reading  the  whole 
message  that  it  must  have  been  the  mistake  of  the  platoon 
leader  which  delayed  the  firing.  But  in  the  meantime  you 
have  lost  three  minutes,  and  the  government  has  lost  that 
much  efficiency. 

And  this  or  which  in  place  of  "and  it"  in  the  message 
would  have  made  the  sense  no  clearer.  But  and  this  error, 
or  which  error,  makes  the  meaning  unmistakable. 

6.  Never  use  a  participle  without  inspecting  it  to  see 

that  it  does  not  dangle — that  it  refers  to  the  subject  of 

the  sentence  rightly.    Example: 

"Looking  over  the  crater,  the  periscope  of  the  enemy  was  seen 
to  turn." 

What  this  sentence  really  says  is  that  the  periscope  was 
looking  over  the  crater — a  very  possible  happening.  But 
all  circumstances  connected  with  the  idea,  after  a  series  of 
mental  deductions  on  the  part  of  the  reader,  reveal  that 
the  writer  had  been  looking  over  the  crater  at  the  peri- 
scope.       The  commander  who  received  this  information 

*  See  Appendix. 


English  of  Military  Communications  11 

might  have  been  led  to  believe  that  the  periscope  was  situ- 
ated in  the  crater.    At  least  he  was  delayed,  if  not  misled. 

7.  Do  not  use  and  except  where  necessary.  Usually, 
when  we  connect  clauses  with  it,  we  do  not  mean  and,  but 
some  more  expressive  word  such  as  because,  whereas,  when, 
etc. 

8.  Do  not  use  any  word  which  might  not  mean  the 
same  thing  to  any  probable  recipients,  or  might  not  com- 
monly be  understood.  For  instance,  to  a  southerner 
evening  means  something  different  from  its  significance  to 
a  northerner,  and  to  an  Englishman  clever  has  not  the 
American  meaning.  Watch  the  words  which  have  local 
standards. 

As  TO  Phrases  and  Clauses. 

1.  Do  not  allow  a  phrase  or  a  clause  to  string  out 

your  expression  when  one  word  might  answer.     Boil  your 

communication  to  the  clearest  minimum. 

(a).  We  went  back  to  headquarters  with  all  possible  speed.  We 
hurried  to  headquarters. 

Here  the  specific  verb  hurried  does  away  with  your 
phrase  with  all  possible  speed. 

(b).  When  we  were  present  in  the  cantonment,  the  soldiers 
looked  as  though  they  were  quite  hungry. 

Our  inspection  of  the  cantonment  revealed  the  soldiers  to  be 
himgry. 

Here  our  inspection  does  away  with  the  clause  when 
we  were  present;  and  to  be  hungry  docs  away  with  as 
though  they  were  quite  hungry. 

This  error  of  spreading  words  is  common  to  ordi- 
nary writers  and  is  most  tiring  and  time-wasting  to 
readers. 

2.  Do  not  omit  words  from  your  phrases  and  clauses 

where  there  is  a  chance  for  misunderstanding.    Examples : 
The   detachment  commander  will  be  with   the   main  body  until 
7  a.  m.  and  thereafter  the  advance  guard. 


14  English  of  Militarif  Communicationt 

What  is  really  stated  is  that  the  advance  guard  will 
be  with  the  main  body  after  7  a.  m. — an  unintended  state- 
ment. Make  your  grammar  accord  absolutely  with  your 
meaning.    Add  the  with  which  belongs  before  the  advance, 

and  notice  how  the  sense  is  brought  out.     Again, 

They  order  us  to  go  to  Brownsville  and  do  impossible  things. 

In  this  sentence  do  they  order  us  to  do  impossible  things, 
or  do  they  themselves  do  impossible  things.? 

Add  the  sign  of  the  infinitive  where  it  belongs  before  do. 
And  to  do  impossible  things  reads  unmistakably. 

3.  Do  not  use  a  participial  phrase  without  first  in- 
specting it  to  see  that  it  holds  but  one  idea. 

Having  changed  our  position,  the  enemy  was  confused. 

What  this  sentence  really  says  is  that  the  enemy,  when 
he  had  changed  our  position,  was  confused.  This  meaning 
is  evidently  not  intended  from  the  very  nature  of  the  state- 
ment. 

It  is  clearer  and  more  accurate  to  use  a  finite  form  of 
the  verb  instead  of  the  participle ;  as, — 

Because  we  changed  our  position  we  confused  the  enemy. 

Or  if  you  can  condense  with  accuracy, 

The  change  in  our  position  confused  the  enemy. 

As  TO  Sentences. 

1.  Avoid  long  involved  sentences.  Even  if  they  are 
grammatically  well  constructed,  they  are  liable  to  rhetori- 
cal error.  The  following  sentence  because  of  its  length 
violates  unity: 

"The  organization  of  the  German  army  is  today  well  known  to 
American  Army  officers,  and  experience  has  shown  that  German 
problems  and  solutions  of  a  complex  character  changed  in  transla- 
tion to  conform  to  American  units  are  often  more  troublesome  for 
the  student  to  understand  than  the  original  would  be,  as,  on  account 
of  the  difference  in  the  size  of  the  units,  it  is  often  necessary  in 
reading  such  a  translation  to  go  back  to  the  German  organization 
in  order  to  explain  a  distribution  of  troops,  which,  though  simple 


English  of  Military  Communication$  1$ 

for  a  German  division,  would  be  an  awkward  one  for  a  divlsioa 
organized  after  our  own  Field  Service  Regulations." 

The  first  thought  given  to  the  reader  is  that  "the  or- 
ganization of  the  German  army  is  today  well  known  to 
American  Army  officers."  The  last  thought  of  the  sen- 
tence is  that  the  "explanation  of  a  distribution  of  troops 
would  be  an  awkward  one  for  a  division  organized  after  our 
own  Field  Service  Regulations."  The  path  from  the  first 
thought  to  the  second  is  long  and  winding.  In  fact  the 
two  do  not  belong  in  the  same  sentence  as  the  sense  stands. 

With  a  simple  change  we  can  make  the  whole  easier  to 
read: 

The  organization  of  the  German  army  is  today  well  known  to 
American  Armv  officers.  Their  experience  has  shown  that  German 
problems  and  solutions  of  a  complex  character  chanped  in  translation 
to  conform  to  American  units  are  often  more  troublesome  for  the 
student  to  understand  than  the  oriprinal  would  be.  On  account  of  the 
difference  in  the  size  of  the  units,  it  is  often  necessary  in  reading 
such  a  translation  to  go  back  to  the  German  organization  in  order  to 
explain  a  distribution  of  troops,  which,  though  simple  for  a  German 
division,  would  be  an  awkward  one  for  a  division  organized  after  our 
own  Field  Service  Regulations. 

The  reader  has  been  allowed  to  take  in  a  thought  at  a 
time  instead  of  three  thoughts  at  once. 

In  spite  of  the  injunction  in  our  Field  Service  Regula- 
tions that  "short  sentences  are  easily  understood,"  such 
long  and  involved  expressions  as  the  above  have  abounded 
among  military  writers.  In  war,  this  continuous  motion  in 
a  single  sentence  has  marred  undertakings ;  in  peace,  it  has 
robbed  efficiency.  It  has  been  an  incubus  upon  general 
orders,  and  even  communications  in  the  field. 

CAUTION. — By  short  sentences  we  do  not  mean 
choppy  sentences — sentences  unnecessarily  short  as, — 

The  battalion  hnlted  for  the  night.  It  ate  supper.  Then  the  bat- 
talion relieved  the  outpost. 

Here  the  reader  has  been  stopped  when  he  should  have 

been  kept  going,  for  there  is  in  reality  but  one  thought  in 


14  English  of  Military  Communications 

the  three  separate  sentences.     They  should  be  combined 
into  some  such  form  as  this, — 

After  the  battalion  had  halted  for  the  night  and  had  eaten  supper, 
it  relieved  the  outpost. 

The  proper  relation  of  ideas  is  here  expressed  for  the 
reader.  He  knows  that  the  relief  of  the  outpost  is  the 
main  consideration,  depending  in  point  of  time  upon  the 
halt  and  supper.  And  the  whole  thought  is  not  too  big 
for  him  to  take  in  as  he  reads. 

The  first  error,  illustrated  by  the  sentence  concerning 
German  organization,  is  a  fault  common  to  older  writers. 
They  have  allowed  themselves  to  grow  into  the  habit  of 
adding  qualifying  phrases  and  clauses  to  sentences  already 
completed  until  their  additions  come  to  swamp  the  origi- 
nals. The  second  error,  illustrated  by  the  sentence  con- 
cerning the  battalion  relieving  the  outpost,  is  a  fault 
common  to  young  writers.  They  have  not  yet  formed  the 
habit  of  relating  in  their  own  minds  the  separate  ideas 
of  a  complete  thought. 

The  happy  mean  between  these  two  indefinite  extremes 
is  the  one  we  wish  to  find — the  sentence  that  gives  speedy 
and  accurate  intelligence. 

2.  Do  not  use  compound  sentences  containing  and, 
save  where  they  cannot  be  avoided.  Here  is  a  common 
piece  of  slovenliness  found  in  such  a  construction. — 

The  wagon  trains  pulled  out  and  the  troops  ate  breakfast. 

Any  one  of  the  following  is  more  definite. 

After  the  wagon  trains  pulled  out  the  troops  ate  breakfast. 

The  wagon  trains  pulled  out  before  the  troops  ate  breakfast. 

As  the  wagon  trains  pulled  out  the  troops  ate  breakfast. 

The  writer  in  the  first  instance  was  too  lazy  or  stupid 
to  think  out  the  specific  meaning  of  and  for  the  reader. 

Remember,  also,  that  the  use  of  and  to  connect  clauses 
leads  us  into  the  treacherous  "run-on  sentences" — the  sen- 
tence that  flits  from  subject  to  subject  like  an  old  gossip. 


English  of  Military  Communications  15 

"They  fell  into  the  trap  and  so  the  commanding  officer's  orders 
were  lost  and  they  remained  there  twenty  days  and  were  finally 
removed  to  a  prison  camp  and  there  winter  soon  came  on  and  finally 
they  were  released  and  went  home  in  the  spring." 

The  sentence,  in  addition  to  having  too  many  ideas  in  it, 

has  them  unrelated. 


WHAT  WE  MUST  DO 
As  TO  Words. 

1.  Every  geographical  name  must  be  printed  in  capi- 
tals, thus, — 

WEST  POINT,  MARNE  RIVER,  PARIS. 

This  rule  does  not  mean  that  the  names  must  be  printed, 
merely,  but  that  every  letter  must  be  capitalized  legibly. 

If  the  place  be  not  pronounced  as  it  is  spelled,  it  should 
appear  thus,— XJENIA  (Ze'-ni-a),  POUGHKEEPSIE 
(P6-kip'-si),  CHIHUAHUA  (Che-wa'-wa). 

A  road  must  be  designated  by  enough  points  to  make 
it  unmistakable  along  the  entire  course  considered ;  thus : — 

BIGLERVILLE— 582— CENTER  MILLS.  (See  map, 
A-8  and  7.)  The  582  inserted  in  this  case  keeps  the  course 
from  being  confused  with  the  tum-ofF  toward  GUERN- 
SEY. If  the  course  were  intended  to  lie  through  GUERN- 
SEY, the  road  would  appear  thus, — 

BIGLERVILLE— GUERNSEY— CENTER   MILLS. 

2.  Use  the  words  of  one  syllable  preferably.  You  will 
find  that  the  longer  words  come  to  you  more  readily  but 
are  usually  more  hazy  in  meaning.  You  will  gain  vigor 
and  clearness  by  the  cultivation  of  Anglo-Saxon. 

3.  Do  not  connect  two  sentences  by  a  comma;  for  ex- 
ample : — 

The  phrase  does  not  imply  motion,  thus  it  would  mean  nothing  to 
say  that  the  battery  is  advancing  on  the  line  Twins-Concrete  Ford. 


l6  English  of  Militarj/  Communications 

The  error  here  is  not  so  much  one  of  punctuation  as  of 
sentence  idea.  Somehow,  the  thought  does  not  run 
smoothly.  We  find  that  two  separate  thoughts  without 
much  relationship  have  been  compressed  into  a  single  sen- 
tence— into  something  which  should  be  a  complete  whole, 
and  go  from  capital  to  period  without  break.  Oftentimes, 
by  showing  this  relationship,  we  may  bring  the  idea  within 
bounds  of  a  single  sentence ;  for  example : — 

Since  the  phrase  does  not  imply  motion,  it  would  mean  nothing 
to  say  that  the  battery  is  advancing  on  the  line,  etc. 

4.  Watch  the  position  of  your  adverbs.  When  you 
mean, — 

We  ca];tured  almost  all  the  ammunition. 

Do  not  say, — 

We  almost  captured  all  the  ammunition. 

The  first  means  that  we  captured  at  least  a  part  of  the 
ammunition ;  the  second  means  that  we  were  close  to  suc- 
cess, but  failed  to  capture  ammunition. 

6.  Use  the  words  head  and  tail  when  speaking  of  a 
column  of  troops.  The  head  is  the  leading  element  and  the 
tail  is  the  other  end,  no  matter  in  which  direction  the 
column  happens  to  be  facing. 

6.  In  the  newspaper  or  book  that  you  are  reading, 
every  time  you  meet  a  new  word  make  it  yours.  Look  up 
the  meaning  in  the  dictionary  until  you  are  sure  that  you 
know  how  to  use  the  word. 

At  the  first  opportunity,  employ  it  in  your  conversa- 
tion or  writing.  Sooner  or  later  "dope"  and  the  eternal 
"damn"  will  have  ceased  to  fill  in  endless  crevices  in  your 
talk  and  their  places  will  have  been  taken  by  incisive  words. 
You  will  awake  to  find  that  you  are  expressing  yourself 
more  easily  and  plainly.  On  the  other  hand,  every  word 
you  pass  over  or  for  which  you  merely  consult  the  dic- 
tionary, is  a  tool  cast  aside  in  your  building  of  an  ofl5cer. 


English  of  Military  Communications  17 

Every  bit  of  slang  or  profanity  which  now  crowds  out  the 
appropriate  word  will  later  rise  up  and  clog  your  thought 
at  a  time  when  you  are  making  your  utmost  endeavor  to 
put  into  clear,  forceful  English  your  plan  of  action  or 
your  order. 

As  TO  Phrases  axd  Clauses. 

Remember   to   place   phrases   and   clauses   nearest   the 

words  they  modify. 

Captain  Georpe  will  divide  the  tools  equally  among  the  battalions 
which  are  fit  for  felling  timber. 

The  change  of  the  italicized  clause  to  its  proper  position 
next  the  word  tools,  gives  the  intended  meaning. 

As  TO  Sentences. 

1.  Use  the  short  complex  sentence;  such  as: — 

An  attack  is  expected  tomorrow  from  stronpr  hostile  forces 
whose  advanced  troops  are  near  FORT  MONTGOMERY. 

The  enemy's  infantry  disappeared  to  the  south  as  soon  as  our 
advance  cavalry  came  over  the  hill. 

The  use  of  when,  since,  because,  where,  whenever,  al- 
though, after,  till,  until,  as,  so  long  as,  now  that,  whence, 
whither,  inasmuch  as,  that,  in  order  that,  so  that,  and  lest, 
with  the  finite  form  of  the  verb  is  a  good  construction  to 
practice. 

Notice  how  compact  and  explicit  is  the  following: — 
Lest  the  enemy  should  turn  your  flank,  keep  veering  to  the  east 

Try  to  put  this  same  thought  into  twelve  words  by 
means  of  a  different  construction. 

2.  When  you  start  with  one  kind  of  construction,  keep 
it  up  unless  there  be  some  good  reason  to  change  it.  If 
you  begin  with  the  past  tense  and  third  person,  have  the 
past  tense  and  third  person  continue  throughout  the  sen- 
tence or  sentences. 

It  is  reported  that  extensive  preparations  are  belnp  made  In  the 
vicinity  of  CAMBRAI  and  the  enemy  has  stored  railroad  material 
there. 


18  English  of  Military  Communications 

It  is  reported  that  the  enemy  has  made  extensive  preparations 
at  Cambrai  and  has  stored  railroad  material  there. 

Which  sentence  reads  along  with  less  break? 

Again, 

It  is  advisable  to  advance  part  of  the  ammunition  columns  and 
that  the  division  should  follow  at  200  yards. 

Better, 

It  is  advisable  to  advance  part  of  the  ammunition  columns  and 
to  have  the  division  follow  at  200  yards. 

Now  that  specific  guides  have  been  posted  near  the  gram- 
matical turns  of  the  road,  let  us  look  at  two  general  rules 
covering  everything  we  do. 

1.  Write  legibly. — Rain,  wear  in  the  pocket,  dim  and 
fading  lights,  and  crumpled  paper  are  going  to  make 
havoc  of  your  orders  and  messages  in  war  time.  Your 
commanding  officer  must  be  able  to  make  out  your  script 
as  well  as  your  meaning.  Now  is  the  moment  to  make  your 
handwriting  a  size  or  two  larger  and  noticeably  plainer. 

2.  Inspect  the  form.  After  you  have  written  your 
ideas  legibly,  look  at  them  searchingly  to  see  that  they 
mean  only  what  you  intend. 

You  cannot  be  too  cold-blooded  about  this  act  for  two 
reasons. 

In  the  first  place,  there  is  a  habit  which  is  strong  upon 
us.  We  have  all  been  too  prone  to  state  a  thing  hap- 
hazardly, and  then  to  exclaim,  "You  know  what  I  mean !" 
The  person  addressed,  of  course,  is  not  going  to  acknowl- 
edge that  he  has  not  the  brains  to  understand;  so  the 
jumble  is  never  smoothed  out.  Thus  in  nine-tenths  of  our 
off-hand  moments  we  have  been  accustomed  to  say  what 
we  do  not  mean.  The  habit  is  so  strong  that  when  we  find 
ourselves  dealing  with  matters  of  life  and  death,  we  are 
still  liable  to  whisper  to  ourselves,  "0,  well,  he'll  get  it." 
The  result  is  that  the  part  of  the  order,  message,  or  report, 


English  of  Military  Communications  19 

which  struck  us  as  having  our  usual  clearness,  is  a  puzzle 
to  the  recipient. 

In  the  second  place,  the  impression  has  grown  up  in  the 
minds  of  many  that  substance,  no  matter  how  it  is  mixed, 
is  all  that  is  necessary.  There  has  come  about  a  certain 
proud  disregard  of  the  manner  in  which  a  thing  is  ex- 
pressed. Too  many  technical  books  have  failed  of  their 
purpose  because  the  writer,  although  he  was  an  expert 
in  his  line,  did  not  know  how  to  present  his  subject  in  an 
attractive  form.  In  the  same  way  explanations  have 
failed  upon  the  drill  ground,  and  lectures  have  made  ex- 
cellent tacticians  appear  like  school-boys.  The  very  man- 
ner of  communication  has  not  only  spoiled  the  taste  for 
the  subject-matter  but  has  hindered  its  absorption.  His 
audience  has  not  understood  his  explanation. 

In  inspecting  your  work,  take  the  attitude  that  the 
recipient  is  skeptical  of  everything  you  have  said. 


It  is  assumed  that  you  wish  to  fasten  in  your  mind 
everything  in  this  chapter.  The  following  method  is  sug- 
gested as  the  best  short-cut : 

1.  Make  an  outline  of  the  whole  chapter,  expressing 
the  main  idea  of  each  paragraph  and  sub-paragraph  in 
two  or  three  words. 

2.  Close  your  books. 

8.  With  the  aid  of  your  outline  see  whether  you  can 
call  to  your  mind  everything  the  paragraph  or  sub-para- 
graph means. 


CHAPTER  II 


MILITARY  COMMUNICATIONS 

The  following  are  the  various  types  of  military  com- 
munication : 

Field  messages  convey  verbal  or  written  information 
by  messenger  or  wire. 

Reports  are  written  accounts  of  some  enterprise,  under- 
taking, or  event,  such  as  a  reconnaissance,  march,  or 
battle. 

War  diaries  are  daily  records  of  events  kept  during 
campaign  by  each  battalion  and  higher  organization. 
From  the  entries  in  these  diaries  the  facts  of  our  military 
history  are  obtained. 

Letters  of  instruction,  issued  by  higher  commanders, 
regulate  in  a  general  way  movements  covering  much  time 
and  space.  Army  and  Corps  commanders  may,  by  visits 
and  conferences,  often  communicate  verbally  the  substance 
of  letters  of  instruction. 

Field  orders,  issued  verbally  or  in  writing  by  com- 
manders of  tactical  units,  regulate  the  tactical  actions  of 
troops,  and  such  strategical  actions  as  are  not  covered 
by  letters  of  instruction. 

General  orders  are  written  directions  having  to  do 
with  the  general  administration  of  a  command.  They  con- 
tain the  necessary  details  for  carrying  out  injunctions 
from  higher  authority,  for  keeping  up  standing  instruc- 
tions, and  for  publishing  results  of  special  and  general 
courts-martial. 

Orders  (when  not  used  as  a  general  term)  refer  to  the 
instructions  communicated  to  troops  by  commanders  of 


English  of  Military  Communicationt  91 

divisions  and  of  separate  brigades  in  regard  to  combat, 
field,  ammunition,  supply,  sanitary,  and  engineer  trains. 

Special  oedebs  cover  such  matters  in  regard  to  indi- 
viduals as  are  not  necessary  to  be  communicated  to  the  en- 
tire command. 

Operation  orders,  as  we  now  use  the  term  in  reference 
to  trench  warfare,  are  the  orders  governing  a  certain 
enterprise  along  a  given  sector  of  the  front.  Although 
they  are  even  more  precise  than  field  orders,  they  contain 
more  details  on  account  of  the  wide  difference  between 
trench  and  open  warfare. 

Circulars  are  printed  from  time  to  time  by  various 
bureaus  and  departments  of  the  War  Department,  and 
by  purchasing  officers,  for  the  publication  of  data  pertain- 
ing to  the  business  of  a  bureau  or  department. 

Bulletins  publish,  usually  in  pamphlet  form,  informa- 
tion for  the  military  service. 

Both  circulars  and  bulletins  have  the  force  of  orders. 

Memoranda  are  published  from  time  to  time  by  com- 
manding officers  to  embody  directions  not  vital  or  sweep- 
ing enough  for  general  or  special  orders.  Memoranda 
have  the  force  of  orders. 

Official  correspondence  consists  of  official  letters, 
returns,  rolls,  estimates,  requisitions,  and  certain  routine 
reports. 

These  types  of  communication  have  been  defined  in  order 
to  give  a  general  survey  of  the  many  kinds  of  written  and 
oral  expression  of  which  military  men  should  become 
masters.  Although  the  task  appears  huge,  proficiency 
can  be  gained  by  attention  to  the  hints  suggested  in 
Chapter  I. 

In  order  to  apply  those  suggestions  in  a  practical  way, 
we  must  now  sort  out  from  all  of  the  above  types  those 
which  should  press  themselves  most  upon  our  attention. 


22  English  of  Military  Communications 

Certainly  all  these  types  cannot  be  equally  necessary  for 
our  immediate  study.  Possibly  if  we  classify  them  from 
the  point  of  view  of  the  occasion  for  their  use,  we  may  see 
more  clearly  how  to  treat  them. 


CLASSIFICATION  ACCORDING  TO  STRESS 

Message  ]    Communicated  usually  in  the  pres- 

FiELD  ORDERS  \-       eucc  of  the  enemy  under  stress. 

Operation  orders      J 
Orders — ^Written  often  in  the  presence  of  the  enemy  under 

stress. 
Letters  of  instruction — ^Written  under  stress,  but  with 

more  or  less  leisure. 
War  diaries — Written  under  stress,  but   at   any  time, 

during  twenty-four  hours. 
Reports — Written  during  campaign  or  peace  at  compara- 
tive leisure. 
General  orders 
Special  orders 
Circulars 
Bulletins 
Memoranda 
Correspondence 
Explanations 
Lectures 

It  is  evident  that  we  are  going  to  have  to  write  messages, 
field  orders,  and  operation  orders  when  the  enemy  is  upon 
us,  and  when  every  second  is  vital.  If  we  must  stop  in 
that  crisis  and  putter  over  the  forms  and  methods  of  draft- 
ing our  thoughts,  how  useless  we  shall  be!  When  that 
time  comes,  one  thing  alone  should  occupy  our  conscious 


Written  during  campaign  or  peace 
concerning  subjects  of  a  routine 
nature. 


English  of  Military  Communications  23 

thought — our  military  idea.  That  will  be  sufficient  to  keep 
busy  the  most  brilliant  intellect. 

In  order  that  we  shall  have,  then,  perfect  freedom  to 
grapple  with  tactical,  strategical,  or  logistical  difficulties 
on  the  field  of  battle,  let  us  learn  the  forms  and  methods  of 
messages,  field  orders,  and  operation  orders  as  soon  as 
possible. 

In  so  doing  we  shall  discover  two  things, — 

(1)  That  messages,  field  orders,  and  operation  orders 
have  a  bearing  upon  each  other  in  the  sequence  given,  and 

(2)  That  the  work  of  framing  them  will  give  us  the 
greatest  possible  practice  in  writing  all  other  types  of 
communication. 

The  message. — The  general  term  message  may  refer 
to  (1)  any  informal  or  short  communication,  (2)  any 
directions  or  orders  too  abbreviated  to  be  known  as  field 
orders,  or  (3)  any  piece  of  information  transmitted  in 
the  presence  of  the  enemy. 

Number  1  is  too  broad  for  treatment  here.  Moreover, 
the  ready  skill  in  composing  anything  of  its  nature  should 
follow  easily  from  what  we  are  about  to  practice. 

Number  2  is  to  be  considered  in  connection  with  field 
orders. 

Number  3,  then,  is  the  important  one  for  us  to  take  up 
now.    From  its  definition  it  is  already  familiar  to  us  as 

THE  FIELD  MESSAGE 

Since  it  deals  entirely  with  the  communication  of  infor- 
mation, it  might  be  well  to  inquire  from  what  sources  this 
information  is  to  be  derived,  in  order  that  we  may  know 
something  about  the  kind  of  material  with  which  we  are 
going  to  deal.  Just  as  a  stenographer  acquaints  herself 
with  some  of  the  workings  of  her  employer's  business  in 


24  English  of  Military  Communicationt 

order  to  attain  the  greatest  amount  of  usefulness,  so  we 
should  now  look  over  the  vast  amount  of  territory  which 
the  contents  of  field  messages  cover  in  order  to  gain  the 
maximum  efficiency  in  composing  these  communications. 
Accordingly,  we  find  that  higher  commanders,  adjoining 
troops,  mhabitants  of  the  country,  newspapers,  letters, 
telegraph  tiles,  prisoners,  deserters,  spies,  maps,  and  recon- 
naissances, are  all  sources  of  valuable  military  information. 
It  is  from  these  that  we  shall  obtain  our  data. 

Most  of  all,  however,  will  the  fighting  man  obtain  bis 
from  reconnaissance — the  work  of  gathering  information 
in  the  field.  From  the  moment  of  entering  the  theatre 
of  operations  to  that  of  abandoning  it,  there  is  necessary 
a  constant  quest  of  knowledge  of  the  enemy's  composition, 
morale,  material,  disposition,  and  activities.  No  leader 
can  act  intelligently  without  this  information,  and,  since 
he  can  not  hope  to  get  it  in  person,  he  must  depend 
for  its  acquisition  upon  certain  reconnaissance  units,  chief 
of  which  is  the  patrol. 

Our  concern  with  these  reconnaissance  units  lies  in  the 
fact  that  the  information  which  they  gather  must  be  sent 
to  the  commander  by  messages.  If  no  one  in  the  patrol  is 
capable  of  sending  back  accurate  and  timely  written  in- 
formation, the  reconnaissance  has  failed,  and  the  patrol 
might  as  well  have  remained  in  camp.  The  good  field  mes- 
sage is  the  strong  link  between  the  reconnoitering  party 
and  the  main  body.  The  poor  field  message  is  a  gap  which 
no  amount  of  courageous  effort  in  ferreting  out  facts  from 
a  wary  enemy  will  bridge.  The  ideal  reconnaissance,  then, 
is  one  which  keeps  a  constant  stream  of  accurate  and  reli- 
able messages  flowing  back  to  the  proper  recipient. 

The  main  factors  which  go  to  make  up  accuracy  and 
reliability  of  field  messages  are  keen  observation  and  faith- 
ful expression.    Both  of  these  faculties  can  be  cultivated, 


English  of  Military  Communications  25 

and  indeed  are  so  closely  allied  that  they  ought  to  be  con- 
sidered together.  It  is  quite  difficult  at  times  to  tell  where 
one  leaves  off  and  the  other  begins.  If  a  man  puts  in  his 
message,  "The  enemy  was  seen  over  the  hill,"  and  another, 
witnessing  the  same  occurrence,  states  that  "seven  hostile 
infantry  men  lay  down  on  the  military  crest  of  hill  807 
at  4-17  p.  m.,"  which  one  has  keenly  observed?  Which 
one  has  faithfully  expressed  himself?  Is  it  possible  that 
the  first  man  did  not  see  any  of  the  details  of  the  second 
message?  Or  did  he  fail  to  put  them  down  faithfully? 
In  whatever  way  we  answer  these  questions,  we  are  brought 
to  the  realization  that  the  second  man  applied  both  facul- 
ties to  an  equal  extent.  And,  therefore,  we  are  led  to  the 
conclusion  that  from  the  standpoint  of  complete  expres- 
sion we  must  take  things  quickly,  precisely,  and  accur- 
ately, and  put  tiiem  out  certainly,  specifically,  concretely, 
unmistakably,  and  faithfully. 

The  field  message  is  not  used  by  the  reconnaissance  unit 
exclusively.  An  exchange  of  communications  might  be 
necessary  between  commanders  to  tell  of  changing  condi- 
tions. The  enemy  has  developed  an  unexpected  attack, 
reinforcements  are  urgently  needed,  etc.  This  message  will 
differ  slightly  in  form  from  the  ordinary  field  message 
which  will  be  analysed  below,  but  it  will  be  of  the  same 
essential  type,  and  will  make  the  same  demands  upon 
brevity  and  clearness. 

FORMS  FOR  FIELD  MESSAGES 

The  Infantry  Drill  Regulations  state  that  "the  authorized 
message  book  should  be  used  and  the  form  therein  adhered 
to."  This  book,  issued  by  the  Signal  Corps,  contains  fifty 
message  blanks  with  fifty  duplicating  sheets,  so  that  fifty 
messages  may  be  sent  and  a  copy  of  each  retained.  The 
front  of  the  blank  appears  as  on  next  page. 


26 


English  of  Military  Communications 


The  back  of  the  blank  is  divided  into  squares.  By  means 
of  a  ratio  between  the  size  of  these  squares  and  certain 
scales  for  maps,  a  fairly  accurate  sketch  is  possible. 

Caution. 

Remember  that  a  message  may  not  always  go  direct 
from  sender  to  receiver,  but  may  be  relayed  by  several 
methods  of  communications — buzzer,  helio,  or  flag.  Think 
how  errors  may  creep  in  at  each  change  of  method,  and 
guard  against  them  by  making  your  message  one  of  tele- 
graphic brevity  and  unmistakable  clearness. 

By  means  of  this  sketch,  the  message  may  often  be 
shortened,  for  the  sender  can  refer  by  letter  or  number 


U.  S.  ARMY  FIELD 
MESSAGE. 


No.    I  Sent  by  I   Time    I  Rec'd  by  I  Time  I  Check 
(These  spaces  for  Signal  Operators  only.) 


Communicated  by 
Buzzer,  Phone,  Tele- 
graph.  Wireless,  Lantern, 
Helio,  Flag,  Cyclist,  Foot 
Messenger,  Mounted 
Messenger,  Motor  Car, 
Flying  Machine. 
Underscore  means  used. 


(Name  of  sending  detachment.) 


From. 


(Location  of  sending  detachment) 


At .. 
Dale. 


Hour. 


No.... 


To. 


Received. 


to  various  points  on  the  sketch,  whereas  he  would  other- 
wise be  compelled  to  describe  positions  or  to  go  into  de- 
tail at  length.  When  he  does  draw  a  sketch,  he  should 
refer  to  it  somewhere  on  the  bottom  of  the  face  of  the  mes- 
sage thus:  (See  sketch  over)  or  (See  sketch  reverse  side). 
The  sketch  is  not  usually  duplicated. 


English  of  Military  Communieatvotis  iS 

The  reverse  side  of  the  message  blank  appears  thus: 
Scale  of  Sketch   i'ns.  =  I  mllo. 


«  ■ 

~1 

I 

»  ■ 

\  - 

•5    ' 

\^ 

«  - 

? 

II     ■ 

u 

•0    - 

^    - 

i   . 

J^*** 

jj    \ 

\    - 

!i5  - 

^  '. 

§w 

1  '■ 

■4  - 

.»=  - 

1  ■ 

^- 

<0 
42     - 

r 

1  - 

1           1-         1    ?•    |y|4-(5-|6l7T8l 

iO^ 

M 

'he 

n  i 

?//■ 

*  = 

In 

nilt 

\^ 

1. 

•IC 

m 

w 

h& 

i3 

ins. 

=■/ 

mi 

«>l\ 

</. 

-i 

Vf 

t 

The  form  of  address  of  the  regulation  envelope  for  this 
message  appears  below.  It  is  probably  best  explained  by 
an  extract  from  paragraph  36,  Field  Service  Regulations, 
which  reads  as  follows:  "Messages  carried  by  a  messenger 
are  usually  enclosed  in  envelopes  properly  addressed.    The 


28  English  of  Military  Communications 

envelope  when  not  marked  'confidential'  is  left  unsealed, 
so  that  commanders  along  the  line  of  march  may  read  the 
contents.  Upon  the  envelope  is  written  the  name  of  the 
messenger,  his  time  of  departure,  and  rate  of  speed.  The 
last  is  indicated  as  follows :  Ordinary,  rapid,  or  urgent. 
Ordinary  means  five  miles  an  hour  for  a  mounted  man; 
rapid,  about  7  or  8  miles  an  hour ;  and  urgent,  the  highest 
speed  consistent  with  certainty  of  arrival  at  destination. 
The  recipient  notes  the  time  of  receipt  upon  the  envelope 
and  returns  the  latter  to  bearer." 

UNITED  STATES  ARMY  FIELD  MESSAGE 

To No 

(For  sigrnal  operator  only.) 

When    sent No 

Rate    of   speed 

Name  of  Messenger  

When  and  by  whom  rec'd  

This  EoTelope  Will  Be  Retonied  to  Bearer 

We  should  certainly  be  armed  with  a  Field  Message 
Book  when  the  crucial  moment  for  writing  a  message  ar- 
rives. But  it  so  happens,  especially  in  open  warfare,  that 
that  article  of  equipment  may  have  been  left  in  the  saddle- 
bags, or  have  been  borrowed  by  a  friend.  At  any  rate 
it  is  not  present  for  duty  when  we  want  it.  However,  we 
are  always  able  to  produce  a  piece  of  paper  or  clothing — 
something  upon  which  to  write — from  someone  of  the 
party  present.  It  behooves  us,  then,  to  learn  to  compose 
a  message  without  the  aid  of  a  blank.  Indeed,  this  idea  is 
contained  in  the  latter  part  of  the  quotation  from  the 
Infantry  Drill  Regulations — "and  the  form  therein  ad- 
hered to." 


English  of  Military  Communications  29 

We  are  not  compelled  to  memorize  the  form  of  the  Field 
Message  Blank.  We  can,  however,  analyse  it  so  that  it 
will  fix  itself  in  our  memory  and  will  be  a  part  of  what  we 
must  know  in  regard  to  the  field  order.  And  we  can  gain 
a  knowledge  of  this  form  rather  by  adhering  to  the  field 
message  blank  than  by  departing  from  it.  Yet  we  need 
not  know  its  entire  form  but  simply  what  contents  are 
necessary  and  what  order  they  must  have. 

In  the  first  place  the  field  message  may  be  divided  into 
three  parts : 

The  Heading, 
The  Body, 
The  Ending. 
The  Heading  should  contain : 

The  Name  of  Sending  Detachment, 
The  Location  of  Sending  Detachment  (Place), 
The  Date, 
The  Hour  of  Issue, 
The  Number  of  the  Message. 
For  example,  the  whole  heading  would  appear  something 
like  this: 

Combat  Patrol,  318th  Infantry, 
Cross  Roads  500  yds.  south  of  CLINTON  SCHOOL 
HOUSE. 

No.  3.  9  Jan.  18.  9-45  p.  m. 

Location  of  sending  detachment  means  the  exact  spot 
upon  which  sender  is  located  at  time  of  writing. 

The  date  should  be  given  always  as  above  in  the 
sequence,  day,  month,  year.  This  combination  prevents 
the  numerals  from  being  confused.  In  naming  a  night 
both  days  should  be  mentioned  thus:  Night  4/5  Feb.  18. 
The  time  should  always  have  the  dash  between  the  hour 
and  minutes. 


M  English  of  Military  Communications 

Messages  sent  on  the  same  day  from  the  same  sending 
detachment  are  numbered  consecutively.  Each  day  or 
each  mission  starts  a  new  series. 

If  a  map  referred  to  is  not  the  one  on  the  reverse  side 
of  the  message,  the  sender  should  designate  the  name  or 
number  of  the  map  used,  immediately  below  the  number  of 
the  message. 

The  Body  of  the  message  contains  the  following: 
To  Whom  Sent, 
The  Body  Propee. 

The  Body  Propeb  has  the  following  sequence  for  its 
information : 

1.  Enemy. 

2.  Your  Own  Troops. 

3.  Terrain. 

4.  Your  Plan. 

The  body  then  would  appear  something  like  this : 
"To  Commanding  Officer,  Advance  Guard,  71st  Brigade: 

Squadron  of  enemy's  cavalry  encamped  in  meadow  600 
yards  southeast  of  here.  Our  officer's  patrol,  which  we 
met  at  ZION  CHURCH  at  8-10  a.  m.,  reported  two  regi- 
ments enemy's  infantry  intrenched  at  railroad  one  mile 
south  of  here.  Tail  of  our  second  battalion  at  PARKS- 
BURG  steel  bride-e  7-20  a.  m.  Battalion  was  marching 
south.  MARTIN'S  CREEK  unfordable  at  any  point  be- 
tween SMITH'S  CORNERS  and  GREENSBURG.  Will 
move  southeast  from  here  along  creek  bed  in  order  to  com- 
plete mission." 

On  account  of  lack  of  space,  paraEfraphinsr  is  impos- 
sible: but  if  this  sequence  is  followed  the  thought  is  easily 
gained.  If  some  one  of  our  own  troops  tells  us  concern- 
ing the  enemy,  this  information  should  come  between  1 
and  2,  and  should  be  definitely  shown  to  be  hearsay  and  not 
GUT  Dim  observation. 


English  of  Military  Communications  SI 

Of  course,  all  of  the  parts,  1,  2,  3,  and  4,  do  not  always 
occur.    The  order  is  nevertheless  followed. 
The  Ending  consists  of 

The  Signature 

which,  in  turn,  consists  of  the  sender's  surname  and  his 
rank,  thus, 

FLETCHER, 

SGT. 
The  outline  of  the  whole  message  construction,  then, 
would  be  as  follows : — 

f  1.  Name  of  sending  detachment. 

I    2.  Location    of    sending    detachment 

TheHeamno     j   3    The  nlr^' 

(    4.  The  Hour  of  Issue. 
[  5.  The  Number  of  the  Message, 
f  1 .  Enemy. 
_,       P  (   1.  To  whom  sent.       1 2.  Your  own  troops. 

]   2,  The  body  proper.  ^  3.  Terrain. 

1 4.  Your  plan. 

The  Ending — The  Signature     -v   «    1.     , 

/    2.  Rank. 

The  messaere  we  have  composed,  when  assembled,  would 
appear  as  follows: 

Combat  Patrol,  318fh  Tnfantrv. 

Cross  Roads  600  yds.  south  of  CLINTON  SCHOOL 
HOUSE. 

No.  3.  9  Jan.  18.  9-45  a.  m. 

To  Commanding  Officer  Advance  Guard,  71st  Briorade: 

Sqnadron  of  enemv's  Cavalry  encamped  in  mendow 

600  yards  southeast  of  here.     Otir  officer's  patrol,  which 

we  met  at  ZION  CHURCH  at  8-10  a.  m.,  reported  two 


32  English  of  Military  Communications 

regiments  enemy's  infantry  intrenched  at  railroad  one  mile 
south  of  here.  Tail  of  our  second  battalion  at  PARKS- 
BURG  steel  bridge  7-20  a.  m.  Battalion  was  marching 
south.  MARTIN'S  CREEK  unfordable  at  any  point  be- 
tween SMITH'S  CORNERS  and  GREENSBURG.  Will 
move  southeast  from  here  along  creek  bed  in  order  to  com- 
plete mission. 

FLETCHER, 

SGT. 
(See  sketch  reverse  side.) 

Caution. — Remember  that  "your  own  troops"  means 
friendly  supporting  troops  and  not  the  troops  of  which 
you  are  in  immediate  command. 


CHAPTER  III 

PROBLEMS  IN  THE  COMPOSITION  OF 
THE  FIELD  MESSAGE 

"An  intrinsically  good  tactical  exercise,"  says  Griepen- 
kerl,*  "loses  by  faulty  composition  and  careless  or  illegible 

handwriting A  rambling  mode  of  expression,  a 

long-winded,  elaborate  style,  is  unmilitary.  Therefore, 
test  your  order  to  see  whether  you  cannot  cross  out  some 
superfluous  word,  or  whether  you  cannot  think  of  some 
shorter  and  more  suitable  mode  of  expression;  grudge 
every  word." 

But  he  goes  on  to  say  in  another  place  that  clearness 
takes  precedence  over  brevity;  "therefore,  rather  use  a 
long  expression  where  a  shorter  one  might  be  misunder- 
stood.    Brevity  must  never  lead  to  superficiality." 

Griepenkerl  was  speaking  of  orders.  Yet  our  Field  Ser- 
vice Regulations  state  that  "most  of  the  rules  adopted  to 
secure  clearness  in  orders  apply  equally  to  messages." 

In  the  following  problems  which  are  designed  for  prac- 
tice in  framing  field  messages,  we  should  adhere  not  only 
to  Griepenkerl's  advice,  but  also  to  the  hints,  forms,  and 
cautions  of  Chapters  I  and  II.  Remember  that  each  time 
a  faulty  form  or  expression  is  used,  some  commanding 
officer  is  halted  or  hindered,  retarded  or  confused.  The 
highest  premium  should  be  placed  upon  correct  form  and 
expression. 

With  the  selection  of  material  from  the  purposely  mis- 
leading and  sometimes  ill-stated  problems  below,  you  may, 
however,  have  difficulty.     Certainly  all  of  the  long  narra- 

•  Letters  on  Applied  Tactics. 


f  4  English  of  Military  Communication* 

tive,  often  in  soldier  jargon,  cannot  be  placed  in  the 
message.  Some  facts  must  be  eliminated  as  unessential. 
What  you  should  let  your  commanding  officer  know  can  be 
determined  sometimes  only  by  technical  experience.  How- 
ever, Major  General  Morrison'sf  caution  along  this  line 
should  be  repeated  here  for  your  help:  "We  all  recognize 
the  fact  that,  as  a  rule,  the  sooner  information  reaches 
headquarters,  the  more  valuable  it  is.  But  this  applies 
only  to  information  which  really  has  value.  If  you  are  in 
doubt  as  to  whether  or  not  information  would  be  valuable, 
give  headquarters  the  benefit  of  the  doubt  and  send  it  in." 
So  you  see  that  if  you  are  not  quite  decided  about  stating 
a  detail,  it  is  better  to  give  the  information  than  to  with- 
hold it.  Therefore,  exclude  only  those  items  which  would 
on  the  ground  of  common  sense  be  pointless. 

In  extracting  and  writing  your  messages  from  the  prob- 
lems given,  it  will  be  assumed  that  you  do  not  know 
whether  or  not  the  recipient  is  provided  with  a  map 
similar  to  your  own.  It  may  be  taken  for  granted,  how- 
ever, that  he  is  acquainted  with  the  names  which  appear  on 
your  map. 

It  may  also  be  assumed  that  you  have  drawn  a  sketch 
on  the  reverse  side  of  your  message  sheet. 

In  reading  your  map  the  signs  and  abbreviations,  ex- 
plained in  Appendix  4,  Field  Service  Regulations,  will  aid 
you. 

A  scale  of  yards  is  at  the  bottom  (the  south)  of  your 
map.  By  the  use  of  a  slip  of  paper,  distances  in  yards  may 
be  measured  off  from  place  to  place. 

Wherever  it  is  stated  in  these  problems  that  a  person 
writes  a  message,  the  student  should  construct  that  same 
message.    In  so  doing: 

(1)   Assemble  your  information  in  proper  sequence, 

t  Seventy  Problems — Infantry  Tactics. 


English  »f  Military  Communications  St 

(2)  Give  it  proper  and  unmistakable  expression,  and 

(3)  Inspect  it  thoroughly  in  order  to  be  positive  that 
you  have  given  it  proper  sequence,  and  proper  and  un- 
mistakable expression. 

Hold  yourself  strictly  accountable  for  every  expression 
which  could  he  put  into  better  form. 

Caution. — The  hour  in  the  heading  of  message  is  the 
time  of  signature. 

PROBLEMS 

1.  On  January  27,  1926,  you  are  Corporal  Peck  in 
■charge  of  a  reconnoitering  patrol  from  the  advance  guard 
of  the  third  battalion  of  the  177th  regiment  of  Infantry. 
You  are  proceeding  along  the  road  east  to  Hunterstown 
from  549  (D,  5  and  6).  Yoix  arrive  at  the  east  edge  of 
J.  Bell's  orchard  when  you  set  several  men  at  the  zero  in 
602.  With  the  aid  of  your  field  glasses  you  make  out  four 
field  pieces  and  limbers  to  be  turning  to  the  north  off  the 
road  just  opposite  to,  and  south  of,  the  men.  The  vehicles 
soon  disappear  behind  the  knoll  of  602.  You  can  see  that 
the  men  are  wearing  the  enemy's  uniform.  After  five 
minutes  of  observation,  the  men  go  out  of  sight  on  the  far 
side  of  the  hill,  and  nothing  further  happens.  After  you 
have  written  your  message  at  half  past  four  o'clock  in 
the  afternoon,  you  travel  under  cover  of  the  creek  and 
fields  in  the  general  direction  of  Henderson  Meeting 
House,  in  the  hope  of  finding  out  more  about  the  force  in 
the  vicinity  of  602. 

2.  On  August  27,  1920,  you  are  Sergeant  Fenton  of  a 
left  flank  patrol  sent  out  from  the  second  battalion  (27th 
Infantry)  which  is  marching  north,  as  an  advance  guard 
to  its  regiment,  toward  546  from  Hunterstown.  As  you 
come  out  into  the  open  to  the  west  of  the  J.  Bell  farm 
house,  you  receive  a  volley  from  about  twenty  rifles  from 


S6  English  of  Military  Communications 

the  woods  at  the  north.  Two  of  your  men  are  killed. 
With  the  remainder  of  your  men  you  retire  hastily  under 
cover  of  the  Bell  orchard  to  the  stream  bed  which  you 
follow  to  the  north  until  half  way  between  the  Bell  house 
and  the  "R"  in  Beaverdam.  There  you  go  through  the 
fields  to  the  west  until  you  get  a  glimpse  of  the  high  ground 
in  the  vicinity  of  574.  You  can  make  out  through  the 
corn  rows  infantrymen  deployed  and  lying  down  facing 
you.  They  extend  along  the  fence  for  fifty  yards  on  each 
side  of  the  dirt  road.  You  can  see  a  field  piece  half  way 
between  the  ends  of  the  fence  and  at  the  edge  of  the  woods. 
You  go  back  to  where  you  left  the  stream  and  write  your 
message.  You  hand  it  to  one  of  your  men  at  20  minutes 
past  two  in  the  afternoon  for  delivery.  You  then  crawl 
forward  leaving  your  men  under  cover  in  the  stream,  and 
remain  in  observation  in  the  corn-field. 

3.  You  are  1st  Sergeant  James  in  charge  of  a  combat 
patrol  from  the  38th  Infantry  which  is  on  outpost  duty 
for  the  8th  Division  at  Granite  Hill  (5,  bottom).  In 
passing  the  house  at  5-E  the  farmer  tells  you  that  yester- 
day at  noon  he  saw  about  one  hundred  and  fifty  saddle- 
horses  in  a  lot  near  the  cross-roads  in  Hunterstown.  On 
questioning  him  further  he  tells  you  that  there  were  quite 
a  lot  of  soldiers  about,  having  a  good  time,  and  wearing 
the  enemy's  uniform.  You  keep  on  your  course.  When 
you  arrive  at  the  orchard  near  603  it  is  after  nightfall. 
You  hear  voices  and  laughing  at  the  northern  edge  of  the 
orchard  just  south  of  the  "6"  in  603.  You  sneak  up 
until  you  can  make  out  four  of  the  enemy's  infantrymen 
sitting  about  a  little  fire.  You  charge  with  bayonets  fixed, 
kill  three  and  capture  one.  He  is  half  drunk  on  apple- 
jack and  talks  freely.  He  says  his  brigade  is  in  bad  shape, 
has  marched  four  days  and  nights  without  stopping,  has 
a  big  outpost  at  Woodside  School  House,  and  that  he  him- 


English  of  Military  Communications  87 

self  is  with  a  bunch  of  the  advance  cavalry  in  the  town. 
At  a  quarter  of  ten  at  night  you  hand  your  message  to  a 
member  of  your  patrol  for  delivery.  You  then  proceed 
along  the  road  toward  549,  looking  for  more  information. 
You  arrive  there,  having  seen  nothing  of  value,  the  next 
day  at  7  a.  m.,  July  18,  1940. 

4.  On  June  21,  1920,  you  are  a  first  lieutenant  in 
charge  of  an  officer's  patrol  from  the  80th  Cavalry  which 
is  operating  as  Independent  Cavalry  for  the  190th  Divi- 
sion. It  is  six  o'clock  in  the  evening  when  as  you  are 
riding  along  the  road  from  Texas  to  Biglerville,  three  of 
the  enemy  jump  out  upon  you.  In  the  struggle  which 
ensues  the  three  are  overpowered  and  sabred  by  your 
superior  force.  You  search  the  dead  men,  but  find  nothing 
upon  them  but  ornaments  indicating  they  belong  to  the 
27th  Cavalry.  You  dismount,  tie  your  horses  in  the  or- 
chard near  the  word  Stiner,  and  proceed  with  two  of  your 
men  along  the  railroad  track  toward  Biglerville.  Near  626 
you  look  toward  the  town  to  find  the  space  between  you 
and  it  well  dotted  with  tents.  Placing  your  men  well 
under  cover  in  the  woods,  you  lie  down  in  the  culvert  at 
626.  Before  taps  is  blown  in  the  enemy's  camp,  from  con- 
versations which  have  gone  on  in  your  vicinity,  you  have 
learned  that  a  regiment  of  cavalry  has  been  encamped 
there  for  two  days,  that  no  other  force  is  about,  and  that 
the  regiment  will  move  out  at  five  the  next  morning,  march- 
ing toward  Goldenville.  You  write  your  message  at  9:15 
p.  m.  After  it  is  sent,  you  take  up  your  position  again  in 
the  culvert. 

6.  On  the  19th  of  February,  1940,  a  visiting  patrol  in 
charge  of  Corporal  Eaton  sent  out  from  2d  Battalion, 
which  is  acting  as  outpost  for  the  81st  Infantry,  is  on  its 
way  to  a  picket  of  friendly  troops.  Its  route  lies  from 
Boyd  School  House,  E-8  toward  McElheny.     As  it  ap- 


M  English  of  Miliary  Communications 

preaches  the  bridge  near  the  4  in  the  480  contour,  it 
hears  footsteps  of  men  hurrying  into  the  timber  to  the 
east.  The  suspicions  of  the  patrol  being  aroused,  it  looks 
about  and  discovers  loose  earth  scattered  over  the  snow 
at  the  abutments  of  the  bridge ;  upon  further  investigation 
it  finds  fuses  leading  from  the  center  of  the  pile  of  fresh 
earth.  The  message  is  finished  on  the  spot  at  exactly  mid- 
night. After  the  messenger  has  departed  the  corporal 
and  one  man  remain  on  guard  over  the  mines  whose  fuses 
were  cut  before  the  messenger  left. 

6.  You  are  Corporal  Peters  sent  out  with  a  visiting 
patrol  from  Company  A,  2d  Battalion  of  your  regiment. 
Your  company  is  Support  number  2  of  the  outpost  at  the 
"K"  in  Oak  Ridge,  E-8.  As  you  approach  Boyd  School 
House,  you  are  not  challenged  as  you  expect.  You  hurry 
on  to  where  the  sentry  of  the  picket  should  be  posted  at 
the  cross-roads,  only  to  find  him  dead  of  a  bayonet  thrust. 
You  go  to  the  south  side  of  the  school  house  and  there  find 
the  remainder  of  the  picket  in  their  blankets  in  the  same 
condition.  You  put  your  hand  on  one  of  the  men  and  find 
that  his  body  is  still  warm.  At  fifteen  minutes  to  three, 
September  30,  1932,  you  complete  your  message  at  the 
spot  where  you  found  most  of  the  picket  dead.  You  then 
take  your  remaining  man  with  you  and  together  perform 
double  sentry  duty  at  the  cross-roads. 

7.  On  July  4,  1925,  you  are  Sergeant  Black  in  charge 
of  an  harassing  patrol  sent  out  from  the  68th  regiment  of 
Infantry  which  is  acting  as  outpost  for  the  12th  Division. 
At  a  quarter  to  twelve  at  night,  you  have  just  fired  two 
volleys  from  Boyd  School  House  in  the  direction  of  Oak 
Ridge,  and  are  proceeding  toward  C.  Topper's  to  do  the 
same  there,  when,  as  you  cross  the  railroad  one  hundred 
yards  south  of  the  "r"  in  Topper,  you  stumble  upon  a 
wagon  wheel  imbedded  in  the  earth.     Cautious  inspection 


Bngluk  of  Military  Communication*  $*J 

reveals  four  howitzers  camouflaged.  With  the  aid  of 
known  measurements  upon  your  hand  you  find  that  the 
calibre  of  each  is  6  inches.  You  finish  a  message  at  a 
quarter  to  one  and  then  proceed  as  you  intended. 

8.  On  the  21st  of  August,  1919,  you  are  Sergeant 
Stuart  sent  out  in  charge  of  a  contact  patrol  from  the 
99th  Infantry  acting  as  outpost  of  the  32d  Brigade. 
After  hard  work  during  which  you  are  nearly  captured  at 
the  cemetery  near  Henderson  Meeting  House,  you  arrive 
with  your  patrol,  at  ten  minutes  to  nine  in  the  evening,  at 
601  just  west  of  Huntcrstown.  A  regiment  of  the  enemy's 
infantry  has  been  defeated  by  your  troops  during  the  day 
and  it  is  your  duty  to  find  out  what  you  can  about  the 
enemy's  whereabouts  and  intentions.  As  you  look  across 
to  the  west  you  see  lights  in  the  fields  between  R.  Smith's 
farm  house  and  J.  Bell's.  You  make  your  way  carefully 
down  the  hill  to  the  farm  house  at  D-6.  As  you  lie  in  the 
edge  of  the  woods  nearest  the  house  you  count  fifteen  rows 
of  tents  by  the  glow  from  the  fires.  You  see  no  animals  or 
picket  lines.  The  fires  die  down  shortly  and  the  talking 
ceases.  You  take  turns  on  watch  with  the  senior  man  of 
your  patrol.  At  a  quarter  to  one  while  you  are  on  watch, 
fires  begin  to  spring  up  at  the  ends  of  the  company  streets. 
Shortly  afterwards  a  young  soldier  comes  to  the  nearby 
farm  house  to  get  water.  He  grumbles  loudly  that  he 
must  get  up  in  the  middle  of  the  night  and  complains  that 
the  first  sergeant  has  ordered  the  company  to  be  in  ranks 
at  one  fifty.  You  get  your  message  off  at  five  minutes 
after  one  and  remain  in  observation  of  the  camp. 

9.  (Two  messages.)  On  May  31,  1940,  you  are  Cor- 
poral Decker  in  charge  of  a  reconnoitering  patrol  from 
the  71st  Regiment  of  Cavalry  acting  as  Advance  Cavalry 
to  the  18th  Division.  You  are  proceeding  toward  Heid- 
lersburg  from   Friends'   Grove   School   House,   and  you 


40  English  of  Military  Communications 

arrive  at  5-A.  When,  proceeding  to  the  east,  you  are  half 
way  through  the  woods,  you  hear  hoof-beats  on  the  road 
to  the  north.  Having  proceeded  due  east,  you  now  arrive 
at  the  edge  of  the  woods.  There  you  see  several  mounted 
men  of  the  enemy  halted  near  the  road  fork  545,  but  the 
trees  in  the  ravine  make  it  difficult  for  you  to  see  them 
clearly.  Near  the  main  cross-roads  of  the  town  you  see 
a  hundred  or  more  dismounted  men  holding  their  horses. 
After  watching  them  for  a  few  moments  you  realize  that 
the  horses  are  being  watered.  At  five  minutes  to  five  you 
start  to  write  your  message  where  you  are.  After  sending 
it  off  you  remain  to  see  what  is  going  to  happen  further. 

At  ten  minutes  past  five,  the  mounted  men  ride  west  with 
an  advance  guard  of  about  a  troop.  Your  patrol  was  well 
concealed  so  that  it  was  able  to  time  the  main  body  as  it 
trotted  past  the  road  fork  578  in  column  of  twos.  It  took 
two  minutes  and  a  half  to  pass.  The  group  near  545  that 
appeared  to  be  a  patrol  has  disappeared.  While  the  larger 
body  was  passing  road  fork  578  you  heard  firing  about  a 
mile  to  the  south  by  less  than  a  dozen  rifles.  You  begin  to 
send  a  message  at  a  quarter  after  five  and  start  to  return 
to  your  command.  (100  cavalrymen  in  column  of  twos 
will  trot  past  a  given  point  in  one  minute.) 


CHAPTER  IV 

MORE  PROBLEMS  ON   THE  COMPOSI- 
TION OF   THE   FIELD  MESSAGE 

1.  (Three  messages.)  On  July  18,  1930,  you  are 
Corporal  Flint  in  charge  of  a  reconnoitering  patrol  sent 
out  from  the  61st  Infantry  which  is  acting  as  Rear  Guard 
to  the  19th  Brigade,  and  which  is  withdrawing  from 
Goldenville  through  Table  Rock.  As  you  proceed  south 
along  the  stream  which  flows  past  Herman,  600  yds.  south 
of  C-7,  you  stumble  upon  one  of  your  own  regiment  serious- 
ly wounded  and  lying  at  the  "V"  in  Varney,  in  the  open 
field.  He  tells  you  that  a  regiment  of  Cavalry  of  the  enemy 
passed  by  the  nearest  farm  house  going  northeast  on  the 
dirt  road  when  the  sun  was  overhead.  You  ask  the  people 
of  the  farm  house,  who  are  manifestly  in  sympathy  with 
the  enemy,  what  they  know  about  the  occurrence,  but  they 
refuse  to  answer.  On  the  road  are  many  fresh  hoof- 
marks.  You  begin  to  write  your  message  at  the  Varney 
farm  house  at  half  past  three  in  the  afternoon.  When  you 
have  finished  you  proceed  southwest  along  the  same  road 
and  along  the  creek  bed  toward  the  race-track.  At  the 
bottom  part  of  the  "S"  in  Stock  Farm,  you  leave  your  men 
in  the  field  under  cover  and  go  south  along  the  edge  of  the 
main  road  toward  Boyd  School  House.  You  see  several 
patrols  of  the  enemy  but  you  press  on.  You  have  not  gone 
far,  however,  before  you  spy  a  low  heavy  cloud  of  dust 
ahead  which  seems  to  be  moving  toward  you.  At  the  Boyd 
School  House  Cross  Roads  it  turns  west  at  twenty-five 
minutes  to  six.  It  takes  the  column,  which  you  now  make 
out  to  be  infantry  in  column  of  squads,  three  minutes  and 


4i  English  of  Military  Communicatiom 

forty  seconds  to  pass  the  cross-roads  (175  Infantry  in 
column  of  squads  can  pass  a  given  point  in  one  minute). 
Since  the  patrols  of  the  enemy  are  becoming  rather  thick, 
you  decide  to  make  your  way  back  to  the  "K"  in  Stock 
Farm.  There  you  finish  writing  another  message  at  a 
quarter  after  seven.  You  have  scarcely  sent  it  olf  when 
there  is  a  noise  among  the  corn-stalks  near  you.  You  lie 
low  and  have  your  men,  whom  you  have  now  collected 
about  you,  do  the  same.  A  friendly  uniform  appears 
through  one  of  the  corn-rows;  it  is  just  light  enough  for 
you  to  make  it  out.  You  give  a  low  whistle  and  signal  at 
which  the  wearer  of  the  uniform  approaches.  He  turns 
out  to  be  Sergeant  Black  of  your  regiment  who  is  leading 
a  combat  patrol.  He  tells  you  that  he  counted  twenty 
passenger  coaches  hitched  together  on  the  railroad  to  the 
southwest.  The  engine  was  pointed  toward  the  north  and 
opposite  the  "r"  in  C,  Topper  at  four  o'clock.  The 
enemy's  soldiers  were  crowding  around  trying  to  hurry 
into  the  coaches.  After  the  Sergeant  leaves  you,  you  try 
to  make  your  way  back  to  your  company.  At  a  quarter 
to  twelve  you  have  arrived  under  cover  of  the  fields  and 
woods  near  the  road- fork  646  just  south  of  Hamilton 
when  you  hear  the  rumble  of  wheels  close  behind  you  to 
the  south.  One  of  your  men  counted  twelve  pieces  of 
light  artillery  which  turned  off  the  road  and  unlimbered 
just  south  of  664.  You  begin  to  write  another  message  at 
the  "n"  in  Hamilton  at  5  minutes  after  twelve. 

2.  On  September  1,  1927,  you  are  a  first  lieutenant  of 
Infantry  in  charge  of  an  expeditionary  patrol  from  the 
26th  Infantry,  which  is  acting  as  outpost  to  the  18th  Di- 
vision. The  outpost  is  covering  the  general  sector  from 
Stiner,  1,000  yards  north  of  Texas,  to  Bender's  Church, 
B-7.  The  Division  is  encamped  between  Biglerville  and 
Guernsey.    Your  patrol  leaves  the  outermost  picket  near 


Engluh  of  Military  Communicatiant  4S 

Table  Rock  at  three  o'clock  in  the  afternoon.  Its  mission 
is  to  capture  a  strong  officer's  patrol  of  the  enemy  which 
is  supposed  to  be  proceeding  north  along  the  railroad  from 
Hamilton.  You  conceal  yourself  and  your  patrol  in  the 
shrubbery  near  the  railroad  bridge  south  of  Table  Rock 
Station.  At  five  minutes  after  four  you  hear  footsteps 
and  subdued  talking  to  the  south.  You  allow  the  first  two 
men  to  pass  you,  and  when  the  main  body  of  the  patrol  is 
near  the  bridge  you  spring  out  upon  them  with  bayonets. 
The  melee  lasts  for  about  three  minutes.  Four  men  finally 
survive — the  leader  of  their  patrol,  two  of  your  men,  and 
yourself.  Because  of  the  wound  of  the  foreign  officer, 
whom  you  make  out  by  his  insignia  to  be  a  staff  officer  of 
their  132d  Regiment  of  Engineers  and  a  Captain,  you 
decide  that  you  will  be  unable  to  risk  bringing  in  your 
prisoner  at  once.  You  question  him  as  to  what  he  has 
been  doing  and  he  tells  you  that  he  has  been  all  day  on  the 
road  and  that  his  regiment  has  marched  for  three  days 
from  the  south  without  stopping  to  pitch  camp.  He  will 
answer  no  other  questions.  You  bind  and  gag  him,  after 
you  have  taken  him  into  the  field  to  the  bottom  of  the  "S" 
in  Table  Rock  Station.  There  you  start  to  write  your 
message  twelve  minutes  after  the  end  of  the  fight.  After 
you  have  sent  off  the  communication  you  and  the  one 
remaining  man  keep  guard  over  your  prisoner. 

3.  (Six  messages.)  On  October  29,  1945,  you  are 
Sergeant  Murray  sent  out  in  charge  of  a  strong  reconnoi- 
tering  patrol  from  the  82d  Infantry  which  is  acting  as 
Advance  Guard  to  the  34th  Brigade.  You  send  a  message 
from  Mt.  Olivet  School  House  (7-top)  that  the  country 
is  clear  of  the  enemy  from  there  back  to  Center  Mills  from 
which  you  have  come.  You  finish  your  message  at  half 
past  one  in  the  afternoon.  At  ten  minutes  after  two,  from 
the  main  cross-roads  of  Guernsey,  you  start  another  mes- 


44  English  of  Military  Communications 

sage  in  which  you  let  your  Commanding  Officer  know  that 
you  have  seen  nothing  of  the  enemy,  and  that  the  roads 
have  been  patrolled  to  a  distance  of  eight  hundred  yards 
on  each  side.  You  keep  on  going  south  along  the  rail- 
road. As  the  first  two  men  of  your  patrol  enter  the  rail- 
road cut  five  hundred  yards  south  of  the  main  cross-roads 
of  Guernsey,  they  receive  a  volley  from  the  top  and  west 
side  of  the  embankment.  They  back  out  while  you  with 
the  remainder  of  your  patrol  skirt  the  top  of  the  cut  to  the 
west.  Three  men  run  to  the  west  into  the  fields  and  woods. 
Your  fire  does  not  reach  them.  You  continue  to  scour  the 
country  as  far  as  the  stream.  At  five  minutes  to  three  you 
begin  to  write  a  message  from  the  farm  house  near  the 
southern  exit  of  the  cut.  You  then  proceed  south  along 
the  railroad  as  before.  As  you  approach  Biglerville  you 
try  to  see  through  your  field  glasses  any  signs  of  the 
enemy's  men  or  wagons- which  might  be  in  the  town.  Seeing 
none,  you  go  carefully  and  completely  around  the  village 
back  to  your  starting  point.  Two  of  your  men  then  enter 
the  main  street  from  the  east.  After  investigating  the 
first  eight  or  ten  houses,  they  signal  you  to  approach. 
You  then  with  your  patrol  go  along  every  street  of  the 
town,  go  into  the  main  stores  and  houses,  but  you  can 
iind  no  trace  of  the  enemy.  At  20  minutes  to  five  you 
finish  your  message  at  the  cross-roads  five  hundred  yards 
southwest  of  the  "B"  in  Biglerville.  You  then  take  the 
main  Carlisle  road  and  proceed  south  on  it.  As  you  go 
you  inspect  all  bridge,  railroad  tracks,  streams,  and 
ground  in  general  for  eight  hundred  yards  on  either  side 
of  the  road,  but  find  no  enemy.  At  twenty-five  minutes  to 
six  you  begin  your  message  at  the  Stiner  House.  Before 
you  now  go  south,  you  investigate  for  eight  hundred  yards 
the  roads  leading  to  the  east  and  west  from  the  main  cross- 
roads south  of  Stiner.     After  your  men  return  you  pro- 


English  of  Military  Communications  45 

ceed  along  the  side  of  the  road  south  toward  the  stream. 
As  you  come  up  to  the  bridge,  although  it  is  getting  dusk 
you  see  a  sentinel  on  the  bridge,  and  you  collect  your  men 
in  some  bushes  near  the  north  abutment.  You  tell  them 
that  when  you  give  the  word  they  are  to  charge  with  you 
across  the  bridge  at  a  run  with  bayonets  fixed.  There  is 
no  sentry  at  the  north  end  of  the  bridge,  and  the  one  at 
the  south  end  seems  to  be  lazily  looking  into  the  field.  You 
give  the  signal  and  your  patrol  leaps  out,  but  in  the 
middle  of  the  bridge  your  whole  party  is  caught  by  fire 
from  machine  guns  located  near  the  wooden  fence  half 
way  between  the  word  Texas  and  the  bridge.  All  but  two 
of  your  men  fall.  You  are  hit  in  the  leg,  but  are  dragged 
back  oiF  the  bridge  to  a  copse  at  the  edge  of  the  stream. 
Waiting  for  further  developments,  but  hearing  nothing 
more  of,  the  enemy  except  laughter  at  the  other  end  of 
the  bridge,  you  have  your  men  carry  you  further  eastward 
along  the  stream  to  a  place  of  comparative  safety  in  the 
woods.  You  start  writing  your  message  twenty  yards 
south  of  the  railroad  crossing  east  of  Stiner  at  seven 
o'clock.  You  find  that  you  will  be  unable  to  travel  for 
some  time.  After  sending  the  message,  you  remain  with 
one  man  where  you  are,  both  of  you  concealing  yourselves 
as  well  as  possible. 

MESSAGES  FROM  COMMANDERS 

4.  On  July  22,  1932,  you  are  Colonel  Algernon  M. 
Potts,  commanding  the  48th  Infantry  which  is  acting  as 
Advance  Guard  for  the  20th  Division.  You  have  at  a 
quarter  to  one  just  pushed  two  battalions  of  the  enemy's 
infantry  toward  Woodside  School  House.  Your  adjutant 
counts  on  the  ground  over  which  they  have  fled  forty-eight 
of  their  dead  and  wounded.    When  you  have  taken  up  and 


46  English  of  Military  Communications 

reorganized  your  line  from  Plainview  through  the  cross- 
roads at  666  to,  and  including,  the  farm  house  one  mile 
and  a  quarter  directly  east  of  A.  Logan,  Lieutenant  Shel- 
ley, adjutant  of  the  first  battalion,  reports  to  you  that 
Major  Jones'  command  has  captured  twenty-two  prison- 
ers. While  you  are  talking,  suddenly  a  heavy  fire  of 
artillery  comes  from  somewhere  in  the  vicinity  of  603  west 
of  Hunterstown.  At  the  same  time  a  message  reaches 
you  from  Sergeant  Stearns,  who  has  been  out  with  a  com- 
bat patrol  to  the  south,  that  a  regiment  of  the  enemy's 
cavalry  was  between  Table  Rock  and  Herman  at  half-past 
two,  and  that  a  civilian  had  telephoned  that  an  infantry 
regiment  of  the  enemy  was  seen  marching  west  through 
Hunterstown  at  twenty  minutes  to  twelve  that  morning. 
You  have  no  reenforcements  at  hand,  but  send  your  re- 
serve of  one  battalion  to  prolong  the  right  of  your  line 
to  the  bridge  at  Fidler,  B-7.  Your  artillery  seems  to  be 
superior  to  the  enemy's  and  is  holding  down  his  fire  which 
is  growing  heavier.  The  adjutants  of  the  2d  and  3d  bat- 
talions report  that  their  commands  have  lost  12  dead,  17 
wounded,  and  24  missing  during  the  previous  engagement. 
You  feel  that  you  will  scarcely  be  able  to  hold  out  more 
than  an  hour  under  the  present  circumstances,  but  decide 
to  make  strenuous  efforts  to  do  more.  You  start  to  write 
your  message  to  the  Division  Commander  at  four  o'clock 
in  the  afternoon. 

5.  You  are  Major  Mark  Montclair  in  command  of  the 
battalion  which  constituted  the  reserves  in  the  preceding 
problem.  When  you  arrive  in  your  designated  position  at 
a  quarter  to  five  you  are  immediatelv  charged  by  two 
troops  of  cavalry  which  you  drive  off  to  the  south  by 
superior  fire.  You  send  in  pursuit  one  company  and  a 
machine  gun.  By  the  number  of  loose  horses  you  see 
galloping  about  and  by  the  haste  with  which  the  troopMiB 


English  of  Military  Communications  47 

took  to  their  heels,  you  infer  that  the  casualties  must  have 
been  large.  Your  adjutant  arrives  at  this  time  reporting 
that  sixteen  prisoners  in  sound  condition  have  been  taken, 
that  twelve  dead  and  twenty-two  wounded  of  the  enemy 
have  been  counted,  and  that  your  own  losses  are  3  missing, 
4  dead,  and  8  wounded.  Just  before  you  start  to  write 
your  message  at  a  quarter  to  six,  word  reaches  you  from 
A  Company  which  is  still  pursuing  the  enemy,  that  they 
have  captured  18  prisoners  and  have  killed  and  wounded 
twelve.  You  finish  your  message  at  five  minutes  to  six, 
and  then  go  over  your  lines  in  order  to  make  them  stronger 
for  defense. 

6.  On  June  12,  1925,  you  are  Captain  James  A.  Marion 
in  command  of  Company  I,  203d  Infantry.  Your  com- 
pany, which  constitutes  a  detached  post  from  your  regi- 
ment acting  as  outpost  at  Granite  Hill,  is  at  601,  five 
hundred  yards  west  of  Hunterstown  Cross-roads.  At 
twenty-five  minutes  to  five  in  the  morning  you  are  charged 
by  a  squadron  of  cavalry  from  the  J.  Bell  farm.  They 
strike  you  from  the  front,  and  you  are  holding  them  by 
your  fire  when  a  troop  hits  your  right  flank  riding  at  a 
full  gallop  out  of  the  woods  from  the  direction  of  the 
Henderson  INIceting  House.  You  are  in  a  very  awkward 
position  and  are  prepared  to  do  or  die,  when,  without 
warning  of  any  kind,  a  squadron  of  your  own  29th  Cavalry 
which  has  been  on  a  raiding  expedition  in  the  direction  of 
New  Oxford,  deploys  at  a  gallop  from  Hunterstown.  The 
enemy,  who  is  now  in  turn  struck  in  flank,  is  in  serious 
straits.  He  breaks  and  runs  in  the  direction  of  Table 
Rock,  the  friendly  squadron  pursuing.  You  count  45  dead 
and  62  wounded  of  the  enemy.  Of  your  own  troops  12 
infantrymen  are  missing,  3  cavalrymen  and  9  infantrymen 
dead,  and  5  cavalrymen  and  18  infantrymen  wounded. 
You  start  to  write  your  message  at  twenty  minutes  to 


48  English  of  Military  Communications 

six.  You  straighten  out  your  former  position  and  send 
strong  connecting  and  reconnoitering  patrols  to  north 
and  west. 

7.  On  May  13,  1922,  you  are  Major  Gerald  Pendelton 
of  the  1st  Battalion,  43d  Infantry.  You  have  been  ordered 
by  your  regimental  commander  to  establish  by  a  line  of 
your  own  troops  a  defensive  position  facing  east  from  the 
4  (exclusive)  in  664  east  of  Hamilton,  D-8,  to  the  south- 
east corner  of  the  orchard  (inclusive),  five  hundred  yards 
northwest  of  Stock  Farm.  At  five  minutes  to  ten  at  night 
you  have  formed  your  line  as  ordered  and  are  beginning 
to  entrench.  You  are  proceeding  with  your  work  when  a 
messenger  from  B  Company  on  the  left  flank  tells  you  that 
G  Company  of  the  2d  Battalion  has  arrived  at  the  4  in 
664,  and  that  at  ten  minutes  to  ten  the  right  flank  of  that 
company  was  beginning  to  dig.  Seven  minutes  later  an- 
other messenger  from  A  Company  arrives  with  similar  in- 
formation concerning  Company  E,  2d  Battalion,  47th  In- 
fantry; he  states  that  the  left  flank  of  that  company  at 
thirteen  minutes  to  ten  started  to  dig  twenty  yards  south 
of  the  corner  of  the  orchard.  You  go  over  your  lines 
correcting  positions  here  and  there  and  start  to  send  a 
message  at  twenty-five  minutes  to  eleven.  The  order  of 
your  interior  companies  is,  left  to  right,  C,  D. 


CHAPTER  V 


VERBAL  FIELD  MESSAGE 

OBSERVATION— ATTENTION— EXPOSITION 

There  are  occasions  when  it  becomes  proper  not  to  write 
the  field  message,  but  to  speak  it.  If  the  enemy  is  strong 
and  active,  so  that  a  bearer  of  information  runs  grave  risk 
of  capture,  the  message  .is  safer  as  a  verbal  one.  In  the 
case  of  the  written  one,  both  message  and  messenger  are 
lost;  in  the  case  of  the  verbal  one,  only  the  messenger. 
Therefore,  it  is  best  to  entrust  the  information  to  the  care 
of  the  messenger's  mind.  The  facts  deposited  there  should 
remain  in  readiness  for  the  first  opportunity  of  delivery. 

There  are  times,  too,  when  no  chance  is  offered  to  write 
a  message  on  account  of  the  pressure  of  the  enemy.  The 
attention  of  a  leader  may  be  so  occupied  with  warding  off, 
or  moving  away  from,  strong  hostile  bodies,  that  work 
with  pencil  and  paper  becomes  an  impossibility. 

The  form  of  the  written  field  message  must  be  abbre- 
viated. The  gist  of  the  Heading  and  Ending  must  be 
stated  by  the  messenger  upon  his  arrival  at  his  destina- 
tion; and  the  Body  must  be  contracted  into  one  or  two 
sentences  depending  upon  the  accuracy  and  intelligence  of 
the  messenger.  Where  officers  are  messengers  the  message 
may  be  lengthened.  For  our  purpose  and  practice  we 
must  attempt  the  shorter  form. 

The  usual  procedure  in  sending  off  a  verbal  message 
may  be  represented  by  the  following  dialogue: 

Patrol  Leader  (or  Commander)  :  "Swinton,  go  back  at 
once  to  the  Commanding  Officer  of  our  Outpost  and  say, — 


80  English  of  Military  Communicationt 

Twelve  enemy's  cavalry  marching  north  on  Carlisle 
Road  at  Hamilton  11  'A5  a.  m.     Repeat." 

Swinton :  "1  am  going  back  to  the  Commanding  Officer 
of  our  Outpost  and  say, — 

Twelve  of  enemy  marching  north  on  Carlisle  Road  at 
11:45  a.  m." 

P.  L. :  "No,  Swinton,  twelve  enemy's  cavalry  marching 
north  on  Carlisle  Road  at  Hamilton  11:45  a.  m.  Repeat 
again." 

Swinton :  "I  am  to  go  back  right  away  and  say  to  Com- 
manding Officer, — 

Twelve  enemy's  cavalry  marching  north  on  Carlisle 
Road  at  Hamilton  11 :45  a.  m.     Repeat." 

P.  L. :  "Not  quite ;  you  are  to  go  back  to  Commanding 
Officer  of  Outpost.     Repeat  again." 

Swinton:  "I  am  to  go  back  and  say  to  Commanding 
Officer  of  the  Outpost, — 

Twelve  enemy's  cavalry  marching  north  on  Carlisle 
Road  at  Hamilton  at  11 :45  a.  m." 

P.  L.:  "That's  right.  It  is  now  12  o'clock.  Notice 
where  we  are  located.  I  am  going  to  continue  on  my 
mission  toward  the  southwest.    Do  you  understand?" 

Swinton:  "Yes,  sir." 

When  Swinton  arrives  at  headquarters  he  ought  thus 
to  be  able  to  give  to  his  commanding  officer  not  only  the 
accurate  Body  of  the  verbal  message,  but  the  contents  of 
the  Heading  and  Ending  of  a  similar  written  one. 

The  above  conversation  is  not  exaggerated.  It  is  not 
only  what  does  happen,  but  what  should  happen.  It  does 
happen  because  the  average  American  has  rarely  devel- 
oped his  powers  of  attention  to  things  outside  of  his 
interest.  It  should  happen  because  every  word  in  every 
good  message  is  a  vital  word.  Any  omission  or  substitu- 
tion is  a  loss. 


English  of  Military  Communicationa  f  1 

PROBLEMS 

In  each  of  the  following  problems  try  to  condense  the 
essential  facts,  without  loss  of  substance  or  truth,  if  pos- 
sible, into  one  sentence.  The  Body  only  will  be  attempted. 
In  other  words,  that  part  of  the  dialogue  which  preceded 
the  last  speech  of  the  Patrol  Leader  will  be  imitated.  It  is 
presumed  that  we  are  now  conversant  with  the  material 
of  the  Heading  and  Ending.  We  shall,  therefore,  dispense 
with  these  parts  of  the  message  in  the  verbal  exercise. 

CAUTION. — Under  no  circumstances  should  there  he 
any  writing  done  in  connection  with  the  solution  of  the 
problems.  A  violation  of  this  prohibition  will  destroy  the 
value  of  the  exercise. 

1.  You  are  alone  in  your  aeroplane  scouting  north  from 
your  Division  which  is  at  Granite  Hill.  While  you  are 
flying  low  in  the  vicinity  of  B-A,  you  notice  a  moving 
cloud  of  dust  which  produces  a  dark  spot  on  the  road  lead- 
ing south  from  Guernsey.  The  haze  extends  from  the 
lower  edge  of  the  "G"  in  Guernsey  indistinctly  through  the 
town.  You  turn  off  and  fly  over  Center  Mills.  When  you 
return  the  head  of  the  dust  cloud  has  reached  the  first 
roadfork  south  of  Guernsey  and  the  tail  of  it  is  at  the 
lower  edge  of  the  "G."  You  land  in  twelve  minutes  at 
Granite  Hill.  It  is  one  o'clock  in  the  afternoon.  You  are 
so  cold  that  you  walk  with  difficulty.  You  call  a  Corporal 
of  the  Signal  Corps  to  you  and  give  him  a  verbal  message. 

2.  You  are  sitting  on  the  knoll  at  624  immediately 
south  of  the  "Sta."  in  Granite  Hill  Station,  5-E.  You  see 
about  fifteen  horsemen  cross  the  railroad  tracks  and  ride 
up  to  the  cross-roads  to  the  east  of  you.  It  is  half-past 
ten  in  the  morning  when  you  see  them  split  up  into  three 
parties,  one  riding  southwest,  one  northeast,  and  one 
southeast  on  the  three  different  roads  in  your  vicinity.  As 
the  party  on  th«  road  running  southeast  comes  opposite 


52  English  of  Military  Communications 

you,  they  dismount.  You  can  make  them  out  to  be 
cavalrymen  of  the  enemy.  As  they  start  in  your  rear  to 
cross  the  stream  and  to  come  toward  you,  you  decide  to 
send  a  verbal  message. 

3.  You  are  proceeding  from  the  cross-roads  southwest 
of  Plainview  (B-5)  toward  Hershey  Mill  (B-6).  When 
you  approach  the  mill  race  you  notice  a  quantity  of  smoke 
rising;  when  you  come  nearer  you  see  the  smouldering 
ruins  of  the  mill.  You  go  on  to  the  Miller's  house  and 
there  perceive  that  the  bridge  has  buckled  in  the  middle 
and  is  lying  on  its  side  in  the  water.  The  Miller  tells  you 
that  an  aeroplane  of  the  enemy  went  up  and  down  the 
Conewago  at  six  o'clock  the  evening  before,  until  it  finally 
landed  a  bomb  upon  the  bridge.  As  it  was  circling  to 
leave,  it  let  another  bomb  drop  upon  the  mill.  You  go  to 
the  Miller's  telephone  and  send  a  message. 

4.  You  are  lying  on  the  long  knoll  566,  five  hundred 
yards  south  of  C-6.  You  are  watching  at  half-past  two 
in  the  afternoon  two  infantrymen  of  the  enemy  who  are 
walking  along  the  edge  of  the  stream  to  the  west.  You 
have  been  interested  in  their  movements  ever  since  they 
crossed  the  first  road  to  the  southwest  several  moments  ago. 
While  you  are  watching  them,  you  are  fired  upon  by  what 
you  estimate  to  be  sixteen  rifles  from  the  woods  to  the 
south.  You  hasten  north  and  give  to  one  of  your  men  a 
verbal  message  on  the  way. 

5.  You  are  proceeding  south  along  the  stream  at  7^-E. 
At  twenty  minutes  after  eight  in  the  morning  you 
approach  the  more  densely  wooded  section  of  country  near 
the  bridge.  You  look  toward  the  cross-roads  to  the  west 
and  spy  in  the  field  some  of  the  enemy  loafing  and  talking 
at  the  letter  "8"  in  488.  You  see  four  stacks  of  arms  and 
are  making  further  observations,  when  you  hear  a  rustle  of 
undergrowth  in  the  woods.    Eight  men  rush  out  upon  you. 


English  of  Military  Communications  58 

Three  of  your  men  are  killed.  You  escape  with  one  man. 
As  soon  as  you  are  able,  you  give  him  a  verbal  message, 
and  both  of  you  take  different  routes  back  to  head- 
quarters. 

6.  You  are  reconnoitering  south  along  the  railroad 
track  from  Biglerville.  When  you  reach  the  siding  at  626, 
you  notice  that  part  of  the  track  exactly  opposite  "B," 
both  on  the  siding  and  main  line,  is  completely  blown 
away.  You  count  ten  ties  burning  at  the  side  of  the  road. 
While  you  are  making  an  inventory  of  the  situation,  you 
are  fired  upon  by  a  machine  gun  mounted  on  a  flat  car  near 
the  next  bridge  to  the  south.  The  car  apparently  filled 
with  men  seems  to  be  approaching.  Your  patrol  scatters 
to  the  fields.    You  give  one  man  a  verbal  message. 

7.  You  have  been  sent  with  two  men  to  find  out  whether 
the  Conewago  is  fordable  at  any  point  between  Table  Rock 
and  Fidler,  B-7.  After  some  search  you  find  a  crossing 
directly  south  of  the  zero  in  the  number  540  which  marks 
the  contour  of  that  height.  Some  time  ago  you  sent  a 
written  message  to  the  eflPect  that  there  was  a  picket 
located  at  the  Logan  farm-house.  You  have  finished 
searching  thoroughly  that  part  of  the  stream  assigned  to 
you,  when  a  strong  party  of  the  enemy  is  seen  approaching 
your  position  from  A.  Logan.  You  give  your  remaining 
man  a  verbal  message.    Each  takes  a  separate  route. 

8.  You  are  in  charge  of  a  small  reconnoitering  patrol 
going  south  from  Boyd  School  House.  As  you  approach 
the  marsh  (7-4^5,  bottom)  at  the  west  of  the  road,  you  see 
three  pieces  of  artillery  stuck  in  the  mud  up  to  their  hubs. 
You  find  that  the  guns  are  3  in.  field  pieces.  While  you 
are  investigating  their  mechanism  in  order  to  confirm  your 
opinion  that  they  belong  to  hostile  troops,  about  forty 
men  of  the  enemy  with  ropes  and  tackle  appear  about  400 
yards  to  the  south.  You  hurry  away  under  cover,  and  find 
a  telephone.  You  send  a  verbal  message  over  the  wire  at 
twenty  minutes  to  five  in  the  evening. 


**  English  of  Military  Communicatiotu 

9.  You  are  delivering  a  message  by  motor  cycle  from 
Center  Mills  to  Granite  Hill  Station.  You  are  riding  at 
about  thirty  miles  an  hour  on  a  road  supposedly  clear  of 
the  enemy,  when  you  are  met  by  a  fusillade  from  the  woods 
in  the  vicinity  of  Henderson  Meeting  House.  As  you  pass 
the  road-fork,  shots  follow  you  and  you  feel  a  sharp  pain 
in  the  calf  of  your  leg.  You  speed  up  to  pass  the  cross- 
roads at  Hunterstown,  and  in  two  minutes  reach  Granite 
Hill  Station.  At  twenty  minutes  after  nine  in  the 
morning  you  dismount  from  your  motor  cycle  and  direct 
an  infantryman  standing  near  you  to  take  a  verbal 
message  to  headquarters  in  addition  to  the  written  one  you 
hand  him. 

10.  You  are  Captain  Williams  in  command  of  Company 
B,  1st  Battalion,  24th  Infantry.  You  are  acting  as  a 
support  during  the  Outpost  duty  of  your  battalion.  \''ou 
are  at  592,  northwest  of  the  Good  Intent  School  House, 
D-7,  and  are  engaged  in  driving  back  a  company  of 
infantrymen  which  is  attacking  you  from  the  stream  to 
the  west.  At  twenty-five  minutes  to  ten  in  the  morning 
you  are  suddenly  attacked  also  by  a  platoon  of  infantry 
from  the  direction  of  Herman.  The  nearest  friendly 
troops  are  those  at  battalion  headquarters.  \''ou  are  in  a 
serious  predicament.  You  at  once  send  a  verbal  message 
by  an  intelligent  sergeant. 

We  have  doubtless  demonstrated  to  our  own  satisfaction 
by  means  of  the  problems  above  how  difficult  it  is  to  frame 
a  message  briefly  and  unmistakably.  It  might  be  well  to 
inquire  why  we  have  had  this  trouble.  An  analysis  may 
not  only  reveal,  but  also  remedy,  the  cause  of  our  inability 
to  achieve  the  desired  result. 

We  find  upon  investigation  that  we  have  permitted 
certain  practical  talents  to  lie  unused  in  our  minds.    We 


English  of  Military  Communicationt  5§ 

have  not  acquired  the  habit  of  observing  anything  outside 
of  our  desire,  of  listening  to  anything  outside  of  our 
interest,  and  of  explaining  anything  outside  of  simplicity. 
Strict  observation,  attention,  and  exposition  are  the 
ordinary  tools  of  a  military  man.  Let  him  develop  them  to 
the  highest  degree  and  he  has  done  no  more  than  is 
expected  of  him. 

Here,  between  the  study  of  the  field  message,  which 
informs  commanders,  and  the  field  order,  which  directs 
troops,  it  is  especially  fitting  for  us  to  reckon  with  mental 
improvement.  For  it  is  in  this  interval  between  the 
information's  coming  to,  and  the  decision's  going  from,  a 
leader  that  the  fateful  question  arises,  "What  is  my  plan  ?" 
His  thoughts,  before  they  arrive  at  a  decision,  must  take 
in  and  classify  in  a  certain  definite  order  all  obtainable 
and  pertinent  facts.  He  must  assemble  all  his  data  before 
he  can  take  the  slightest  risk  as  to  how  his  troops  are  to 
act.  Lives  are  at  stake  in  the  passing  minutes ;  victory  is 
awaiting  the  decision.  In  all  this  stress  and  excitement 
the  commander  must  observe  and  listen  as  if  he  were 
stalking  a  deer  in  a  thicket.  And  when  his  mind  is  made 
up  he  must  formulate  his  decision  as  if  he  were  sitting 
before  his  own  peaceful  hearth  writing  a  letter.  But  he 
must  do  both  in  one  per  cent  of  the  time  allowed  for 
stalking  deer  or  writing  letters. 

To  acquire  this  ability,  he  must  have  regarded  before- 
hand the  development  of  these  three  talents  as  a  necessity. 
If  he  has  caused  himself  to  be  a  faithful  observer,  so  that 
he  is  capable  of  taking  in  many  details  at  once,  if  he  has 
compelled  himself  to  be  a  keen  listener  so  that  he  can 
absorb  every  word  instantly,  if  he  has  made  himself  into  a 
skilful  instructor  so  that  he  can  express  rapidly  his  exact 
wishes  and  knowledge,  he  will  be  able,  when  the  crisis 
comes,  to  give  his  entire  attention  to  his  plan.     Other^iise 


56  English  of  Military  Communications 

he  will  be  hampered.  If  he  has  not  observed,  if  he  has  not 
listened,  he  will  be  able  neither  to  decide  nor  to  state  his 
will  forcibly. 

The  following  hints  may  show  us  our  deficiencies  : 

1.  In  regard  to  the  scope  and  habit  of  observation, — 

(a)  Look  out  of  the  window,  count  off  to  yourself  five 
seconds,  turn  about  and  see  how  much  of  the  view  or  of  its 
salient  features  you  can  describe. 

(b)  After  you  have  taken  your  next  long  walk  through 
the  woods  or  open  country,  go  over  in  your  mind  your 
journey.  Pick  out  points  along  the  course  and  see 
whether  you  know  in  regard  to  each:  (1)  the  appearance 
and  number  of  trees  within  your  view,  (2)  the  rise  and  fall 
of  the  ground  within  your  view,  (3)  or  the  direction  you 
next  took. 

(c)  What  is  the  exact  color  of  the  hair  or  eyes,  or 
the  shape  of  the  hands  of  your  closest  associates.? 

(d)  Have  someone  place  five  articles  on  a  plane  surface 
while  your  back  is  turned.  Look  at  the  objects  for  ten 
seconds;  then  look  away  and  describe  fully  their  appear- 
ance and  position. 

2.  In  regard  to  the  power  and  habit  of  listening, — 

(a)  Have  someone  read  aloud  to  you  three  sentences 
capable  of  being  understood  by  a  person  of  ordinary  intel- 
lect. Try  to  repeat  in  your  own  words  every  idea  given  in 
the  reading. 

This  is  not  a  memory  exercise. 

(b)  The  next  time  you  find  yourself  interrupting  some- 
one, check  yourself  at  once,  and  try  to  repeat  in  your  own 
mind  the  substance  of  what  the  speaker  has  last  uttered. 

(c)  The  next  time  you  find  yourself  a  part  of  an 
audience  to  which  a  sermon  or  lecture  is  being  delivered, 
say  to  yourself,  "I  am  going  to  get  at  least  for  practice's 


English  of  Military  Communications  57 

sake  every  idea  this  speaker  has  to  offer."    Then  note  how 
short  a  time  it  is  before  you  miss  a  phrase. 
3.  In  regard  to  the  power  of  exposition, — 

(a)  With  your  hands  behind  your  back,  try  to  describe 
in  a  sentence  each  one  of  the  following  articles: 

A  barrel,  a  scabbard,  a  tea  kettle,  a  potato,  a  billiard 
cue,  a  chrysanthemum,  a  dumb-bell,  your  shoes,  a  fox 
terrier,  a  grand  piano. 

(b)  Give  the  shortest  complete  description  you  can  of 
the  parts  and  working  of  a  rifle. 


CHAPTER  VI 

THE  FIELD  ORDER,  THE  ESTIMATE, 
THE  DECISION,  THE  EXPRESSION 

"Upon  the  information  of  the  enemy  and  of  the  terrain 
obtained  by  reconnaissance,  and,  as  far  as  time  will  permit, 
upon  the  study  of  the  terrain  made  by  the  leader  in  the 
field  of  probable  operations,  the  plan  of  action  is  based." 
So  state  our  Field  Service  Regulations.*  Decision,  then, 
is  built  upon  the  amount  of  material  that  the  observation 
and  attention  of  a  commander  can  collect.  And  it  is  only 
his  observation  and  attention  which  count.  It  is  only 
what  he  himself  has  fixed  in  his  own  mind  which  is  going 
to  do  the  troops  harm  or  good.  He  may  receive  dozens  of 
excellent  messages,  or  may  view  the  battle-field  for  twenty 
miles ;  yet  it  is  only  Avhat  he  himself  appropriates  to  his 
own  straight  thinking,  which  can  influence  the  outcome. 
The  reports  or  the  visions  of  others  cannot  enter  into  the 
decision,  unless  he  has  transferred  those  reports  or  visions 
to  his  own  calculation^  How  can  he  weigh  what  he  has 
not  handled — consider  what  he  has  not  absorbed.?  The  de- 
cision of  a  leader  issues  from  the  door  of  his  own  observa- 
tion and  attention.  The  most  pertinent  facts  may  be  laid 
at  that  threshold  only  to  be  shut  out  because  he  has  not 
increased  his  capacity  to  take  them  in.  And  no  one  else 
can  enter  there  in  order  to  do  the  work  for  him  unless  the 
intruder  becomes  virtually,  if  not  actually,  the  leader. 

•  Par.  141. 


English  of  Military  Communications  59 

THE  ESTIMATE 

Let  us  suppose  that  the  observation  and  attention  have 
taken  in  all  that  they  should.  These  various  items  lying 
in  a  more  or  less  jumbled  mass  must  now  be  sorted.  In- 
formation of  one  class  must  not  be  found  mixed  with  that 
of  another  class.  Each  organized  body  of  information 
must  approach  the  leader's  judgment  by  itself  so  that: 
(1)  nothing  will  be  overlooked;  so  that  (2)  each  item  will 
be  with  its  proper  set.  After  they  have  all  passed  through 
his  thought,  certain  ones,  of  course,  may  be  discarded ;  but 
they  all  must  none  the  less  be  first  reviewed  consciously  by 
the  leader.  This  process  is  called  the  estimate  of  the 
sitiiation.  In  order,  therefore,  to  comply  with  the  full 
conditions  of  such  an  estimate,  a  fixed  classification  of  all 
the  essentials  which  should  go  through  the  hopper  of  a 
leader's  judgment  has  been  made.  After  his  information 
has  been  obtained  and  before  his  decision  has  been  formed, 
the  leader  must  say  to  himself : — 

1.  What  is  my  mission? 

2.  What  are  the  forces — the  enemy's  and  my  own.? 

3.  What  conditions  are  favorable  and  what  unfavor- 
able? 

4.  What  is  the  enemy  doing  and  what  will  he  probably 
do? 

6.  What  effect  has  the  terrain  upon  my  mission? 

6.  What  different  courses  are  open  to  me  in  order  to 
carry  out  my  mission,  and  what  are  the  advantages  and 
disadvantages  of  each? 

The  method  just  described  is  no  more  than  that  of 
collecting,  classifying,  and  weighing  data.  It  is  the  very 
process  we  must  follow  before  we  can  write  a  decent  theme, 
article,  report,  or  anything  fit  to  read.  An  estimate  of  a 
situation  is  nothing  more  than  an  outline  of  observations 


60  English  of  Military  Communications 

made  in  order  to  arrive  at  a  proper  conclusion.  The 
leader  has  no  time  to  write  down  the  points.  But  he  never- 
theless assembles  in  his  own  mind  everything  which  bears 
on  his  subject — imity;  he  classifies  all  this  into  groups 
with  a  certain  orderly  arrangement — coherence;  and  he 
considers  the  effect  of  each  item  upon  his  mission  and 
situation — clear  thinking. 

THE  DECISION 

As  soon  as  he  has  finished  with  this  estimate  of  the  situa- 
tion, there  should  stand  forth  as  a  result  of  this  clear 
thinking  his  decision.  If  he  has  been  in  the  habit  of  mak- 
ing his  ideas  unmistakable  in  conversation  or  writing — if 
he  has  been  accustomed  to  dealing  in  good  exposition,  his 
plan  ought  to  be  clear  and  simple.  For  no  man  can  make 
clear  statements  without  first  thinking  clear  thoughts.  If 
then  he  has  habitually  insisted  upon  his  own  use  of  only 
the  clearest  phraseology,  he  ought  certainly  to  arrive  at 
a  clear  plan  whatever  may  be  its  tactical  value. 

THE  EXPRESSION 

To  give  this  plan  expression  is  the  purpose  of  the  field 
order.  Certainly  if  the  decision  is  clear  and  simple,  the 
translation  into  language  ought  to  be  easy.  Infantry 
Drill  Regulations  state:  "Ambiguity  or  vagueness  in- 
dicates either  vacillation  or  inability  to  formulate  orders." 
Since  vacillation  is  a  matter  of  character,  the  discussion 
of  such  a  trait  is  outside  of  this  course;  but  the  inability 
to  formulate  orders  is  not.  In  fact  it  belongs  only  in  the 
course  of  Rhetoric  or  English.  The  following  terms  are 
found  in  our  Regulations  and  Text  Books :  "Clear  and  con- 
cise instructions  are  given  as  to  the  action  to  be  taken  in 
combat";^  "an  order  must  be  definite  and  the  expression 


1.    Infantry  Drill  Regs. 


English  of  Military  Communications  6l 

of  a  fixed  decision"  ;^  "field  orders  are  brief"  ;^  "field  orders 
must  be  brief  and  definite";^  "clear  and  decisive  orders 
are  the  logical  result  of  definite  and  sure  decisions  and  are 
the  means  of  transforming  the  decision  into  action";' 
"Make  your  order  short  and  make  it  definite"  ;^  "above  all 
do  not  give  vague  orders" ;'  "be  positive  and  definite" ;'  "a 
plan,  promising  success,  may  fail  if  it  does  not  find  correct 
expression  in  an  order."*  And  so  our  manuals  keep  on 
telling  us  to  use  correct  English,  but  failing  to  tell  us  how. 
Putting  the  clarified  decision  into  the  form  of  an  order  is 
the  business  of  Rhetoric.  And  the  process  requires  the 
application  of  every  rule  for  correct  English  we  have 
learned  or  are  going  to  learn, 

"Often  a  faulty  expression,  a  word  too  much  or  too 
little,  or  an  omission,  may  become  the  source  of  serious 
consequences,"  declares  Buddecke.  Even  in  the  orders  of 
the  greatest  commanders,  a  twist  of  phrase  or  a  wrong 
word  has  given  an  unintentional  meaning,  so  that  troops 
have  from  the  very  construction  of  the  order  acted  con- 
trary to  the  will  of  the  chief.  Napoleon,  in  a  despatch  to 
Davout  before  the  battles  of  Auerstadt  and  Jena,  stated: 
"If  the  Prince  of  Portecorvo  (Bernadotte)  is  with  you, 
you  may  march  together ;  but  the  Emperor  hopes  that  he 
will  be  already  in  the  position  assigned  him  at  Dornberg." 
Bernadotte,  as  it  happened,  had  not  gone  to  Dornberg. 
He  was  with  Davout.  He  determined,  from  the  last  clause 
of  the  order  and  from  the  word  "may,"  that  Napoleon 
desired  him  to  be  at  Dornberg.  To  Dornberg  he  marched, 
and  there  he  calmly  waited  within  sound  of  the  guns,  while 
the  battles  of  Auerstadt  and  Jena  were  fought.     He  was 


2.    Field  Service  Regs. 

8,     Morrison's  Infantry  Tactics. 

♦.    Buddecke's  Tactical  Decisions  and  Orders. 


62  English  of  Military  Communications 

useless  both  to  Napoleon  and  to  Davout.  Indeed,  he  was 
seriously  needed  by  Davout  who,  with  27,000  was  opposed 
to  51,000  Prussians.  Yet  the  error  is  attributable  not  to 
Bernadotte  but  to  Napoleon,  who  meant  to  say,  "You 
should  march  together;  but  the  Emperor  hopes  that  he 
has  arrived,"  etc.  Napoleon  for  once  did  not  say  what  he 
meant.  It  is  likely  we  may  be  found  more  wanting  in  this 
regard. 

There  is  no  error  in  the  expressiveness  of  a  field  order 
which  the  analytical  and  synthetical  study  of  English  will 
not  overcome.  We  must  first  learn  by  analysis  to  rec- 
ognize mistakes  when  we  see  them.  We  must  then  try  to 
manipulate  our  language  so  that  those  mistakes  will  not 
occur.  Indeed,  we  must  go  further  than  the  mere  negative 
avoidance  of  mistakes.  We  must  not  be  satisfied  until  we 
have  made  our  expressions  exert  a  positive  force.  The 
ways  and  means  of  so  doing  are  found  in  the  simple  rules  of 
rhetoric. 

It  is,  perhaps,  not  too  much  to  say  that  the  American 
works  against  heavier  odds  than  the  European.  The 
syntax  of  the  inflected  languages  of  Europe  demands  that 
the  speaker  pay  a  proper  attention  to  the  changes  of 
number,  gender,  and  case,  if  he  would  not  appear  ridicu- 
lous, whereas  the  English  language,  being  almost  without 
inflections,  permits  its  speaker  to  toss  his  words  about  with 
an  ease  unknown  to  Continental  speech,  and  still  be  intelli- 
gible. The  result  is  that  the  European  is  trained  to  more 
care,  and,  therefore,  greater  exactness,  than  is  demanded 
of  the  American.  Moreover,  the  average  American's  com- 
mercial education  does  not  include  a  careful,  analytical 
study  of  an  inflected  language.  His  geographical  aloof- 
ness from  the  rest  of  the  world  insures  him  also  a  linguistic 
isolation.  The  European,  on  the  other  hand,  has  an  added 
advantage  in  that  by  traversing  a  territory  no  larger 


English  of  Military  Communications  68 

than  three  or  four  of  our  big  states,  he  will  encounter  a 
half-dozen  languages,  of  all  of  which  he  must  have  some 
knowledge  if  he  is  to  be  a  financial  success. 

The  American,  then,  in  writing  orders  is  competing 
against  a  handicap.  Von  Kiessing,  a  foreigner,  states 
that  "the  best  of  plans,  the  most  skilful  combinations, 
may  fail,  if  the  commander  or  his  staff  officers  cannot  ex- 
press them  properly";  and  Buddecke,  also  a  foreigner, 
insists  that  "a  plan,  promising  success,  may  fail  if  it  does 
not  find  correct  expression  in  an  order."  If  these  men, 
schooled  in  language  as  well  as  in  tactics,  find  admonition 
so  emphatically  necessary,  how  must  we  look  upon  the 
matter.'' 

The  form  and  composition  of  the  order,  if  practiced 
now,  ought  to  give  us  a  certain  amount  of  independence 
when  we  come  to  practical  and  strategical  considerations 
later.  For  certainly,  we  shall  be  far  ahead  of  our  fellows 
who  must  try  at  once,  and  for  the  first  time,  both  tactics 
and  composition. 

THE  FORM  OF  THE  FIELD  ORDER 

"To  enable  the  will  of  the  commander  to  be  quickly 
understood,  to  secure  prompt  cooperation  among  his  sub- 
ordinates, and  for  ready  reference,  field  orders  are  re- 
quired to  follow  a  general  form.  This  form  divides  an 
order  into  sections  or  parts  and  assigns  to  each  a  par- 
ticular class  of  information. 

The  parts  of  the  field  order  are: 

The  Heading. 

The  Distribution  of  Tegops  (in  certain  orders). 

The  Body. 

The  Ending.''* 

•  F.  S.  R..  par.  PO. 


64  English  of  Military  Communications 

The  only  difference  between  the  divisions  of  the  field 
message  and  the  field  order,  then,  is  that  the  latter  con- 
tains in  certain  orders  The  Distribution  of  Troops. 
The  Heading. — The  heading  contains: 

The  Title  or  Name  of  Issuing  Officee's  Com- 
mand. 

The  Place. 

The  Date. 

The  Houe  of  Issue. 

The  Numbee  of  the  Oedee. 

The  Refeeence  to  Map  Used. 
The  Title  or  Name  corresponds  to  the  Name  of  Sending 
Detachment  in  the  field  message.  But  a  title  is  the  name 
'  applied  to  the  temporary  duty  of  a  command,  such  as, 
** Advance  Guard,  Det.  21st  Div.,"  whereas  the  name  itself 
might  be  "162d  Inf.,  Det.  21st  Div."  The  Place  does  not 
need  to  be  given  so  specifically  as  in  the  field  message,  be- 
cause the  command  issuing  a  field  order  takes  up  much 
more  space  than  a  reconnaissance  party.  The  Date  and 
Hour  of  Issue  are  written  as  in  the  field  message.  Field 
Orders  are  numbered  in  sequence  usually  annually.  The 
Reference  to  Map  Used  is  placed  immediately  below  the 
number.    The  Heading  of  a  field  order  would  appear  thus : 

Field  Orders :  Det.  21st  Div.,  12th  Corps, 

No.  22  Leavenworth,  Kansas, 

(Geological  Survey  Sheet)  9  Dec.  28,  8-15  p.  m. 

The  Disteibtttion  of  Teoops. — "The  distribution  of 
troops  shows  the  tactical  components  into  which  a  com- 
mand is  divided  (advance  guard,  main  body,  etc.)  and  the 
troops  assigned  to  each.  It  is  generally  used  in  march 
orders  and  in  the  first  field  order  applying  to  a  command 
newly  created  or  organized.  In  other  cases  it  is  usually 
more  convenient  to  name  the  troops  in  the  body  of  the 
order,  where  their  duties  are  prescribed. 


English  of  Military  Communication*  65 

When  a  *distribution'  is  used,  it  is  headed  *Troops,*  and 
in  written  or  printed  orders  is  placed  on  the  left  of  The 
Body,  occupying  about  one-third  of  the  page.  The  tac- 
tical components  are  marked  with  lettered  subheads  (a), 
(b),  etc.,  the  troops  listed  under  each  performing  the 
task  prescribed  in  the  similarly  marked  paragraph  of  the 
body  of  the  order. 

When  orders  are  dictated  or  sent  by  wire  or  signals, 
the  distribution  of  troops  (if  used)  is  given  immediately 
after  paragraph  2,  without  number."*  In  orders  for  a 
regiment  and  smaller  bodies  the  Distribution  of  Troops 
is  usually  omitted. 

The  Distribution  of  Troops  in  a  field  order  would  ap- 
pear thus : 

Troops. 

(a)  Independent  Cav- 
alry: 

Col.  Adams. 
1st  &  2d  Sqs.  Ist 
Cav. 
(less  one  troop) 

(b)  Advance  Guard: 
Col.  Byron. 

1st  Inf.,  1st  Cav., 

Btry.  B,  6th  F.  A. 
Det.  Co.  A,  Engrs. 
Det.  Amb.  Co.  No.  1. 

(c)  Main      Body,      in 
order  of  march: 

1st  Bn,  2d  Inf. 
1st  Bn,  6th  F.  A. 
(less  1  btry). 

♦  F.  S.  R.,  par.  92. 


66  English  of  Military  Communications 

1st  Brig,    (less   1st 

Inf.    and    1st    Bn. 

2d  Inf.). 
4th  Inf. 
Co.  A,  Engrs.  (less 

det.). 
Arab.     Co.     No.     1 

(less  det.). 
1st  F.  Hosp. 
(D)  Signal  Troops : 

Lieut.  Dash. 
1  plat.,  Co.  A. 

The  Body. — The  Body,  of  course,  is  the  main  part  of 
the  order.  It  contains  the  information  and  instructions 
for  the  command.  It  is  to  this  part  that  Buddecke  refers 
when  he  says :  "The  order,  which  is  to  transform  decision 
into  action,  is  of  the  utmost  importance." 

The  Sentence  and  the  Paragraph,  then,  should  be  per- 
fectly constructed.  Each  one  of  those  elements  should  be 
tested  to  see  that  it  is  unified,  coherent,  and  emphatic. 
The  examples  herein  given,  or  any  set  phrasing,  should 
never  he  imitated.  Every  leader  must  compose  his  own 
words,  his  own  decision.  He  must  give  to  his  subordinates 
the  language  that  best  suits  the  particular  occasion. 
Otherwise  there  will  be  no  unity  of  structure  and  little  like- 
lihood of  unity  of  action.  Every  military  situation  is  a 
a  law  unto  itself,  and  the  language  of  the  field  order  should 
fit  that  law. 

Nevertheless  there  are  certain  aids,  as  we  shall  see,  in 
composing  the  Body.  The  topic  of  each  paragraph  is  to 
be  found  in  our  Regulations.  We  must  see  that  nothing 
enters  the  paragraph  or  subparagraph  but  that  which  be- 
longs in  the  topic  assigned.     We  must  see,  also,  that  all 


English  of  Military  Communications  67 

of  the  matter  belonging  in  a  paragraph  is  placed  there, 
and  that  every  sentence  in  the  paragraph  is  free  from 
violations  of  Unity,  Coherence,  and  Emphasis. 

"Paragraph  1  contains  such  information  of  the  enemy 
and  of  our  supporting  troops  as  it  is  desirable  that  sub- 
ordinates should  know." 

"Paragraph  2  contains  the  general  plan  of  the  com- 
mander, or  so  much  thereof  as  will  insure  cooperation  of 
all  parts  of  the  command." 

"Paragraph  3  contains  the  detailed  tactical  dispositions 
adopted  by  the  commander  to  carry  out  the  plan  outlined 
in  paragraph  2,  including  the  tasks  assigned  to  each  of 
the  several  combatant  fractions  of  the  command.  These 
tasks  are  given  under  lettered  subheads  (a),  (b),  etc.,  the 
leading  fraction,  or  the  one  having  the  most  important 
duty  to  perform,  being  generally  considered  first.  For  in- 
stance :  In  an  attack  order  it  is  customary  to  consider  the 
artillery  first;  in  a  march  order  troops  are  considered 
according  to  their  position  in  column." 

"Instructions  applicable  to  all  of  these  fractions  may  be 
embodied  in  a  sub-paragraph,  letter  (X),  at  the  end  of 
paragraph  3." 

"Paragraph  4  contains  instructions  for  the  trains,  and 
may  designate  the  position  of  ammunition  distributing 
stations,  dressing  stations,  and  stations  for  slightly 
wounded." 

"The  last  paragraph,  usually  paragraph  5,  shows  where 
the  commander  can  be  found  or  messages  may  be  sent.  In 
orders  of  subordinate  commanders,  this  paragraph  also 
gives  the  location  of  lines  of  information,  if  any  have  been 
established." 

"If  additional  paragraphs  are  necessary,  they  are  in- 
corporated, properly  numbered,  after  paragraph  4. 
Sometimes  it  is  unnecessary  to  include  instructions  for  the 


68  English  of  Military  Communicationt 

trains;  but  whatever  the  number  of  paragraphs  the  last 
always  shows  where  the  commander  can  be  found,  etc."* 

Briefly,  then,  the  paragraphs  may  be  epitomized  as 
follows : 

1.  Enemy   (sub-paragraph  neither  numbered  nor  let- 

tered). 
Your  own  troops  (sub-paragraph  neither  numbered 
nor  lettered). 

2.  Plan  (single  paragraph). 

3.  (a)   Task  of  the  leading,  or  the  most  important, 

fraction  of  command, 
(b)   Task  of  next,  or  next  important,  fraction  of 
command.     (X)  Anything  which  applies  to  all 
fractions  of  command. 

4.  Trains. 

6.  Location  of  commander  or  place  to  which  messages 
are  to  be  sent  (sub-paragraph  neither  numbered 
nor  lettered). 
Location    of   lines    of    information    (sub-paragraph 
neither  numbered  nor  lettered). 
The  Body  of  a  field  order  would  appear  thus: 

1.  The  enemy's  cavalry  patrols 

have  been  seen  north  of 
KICKAPOO.  His  infan- 
try and  artillery  are  re- 
ported at  ATCHISON. 
Our  division  is  8  miles  south 
of  LEAVENWORTH. 

2.  This  detachment  will  march 

to-morrow  to  KICKAPOO. 

3.  (a)  The  independent  cavalry 

will   start   at   5:30   a.   m., 
covering  the  movement. 

•F.  S.  R.,  par.  93. 


English  of  Military  Communications  69 

(b)  The  advance  guard  will 
clear  the  northern  exit  of 
LEAVENWORTH  at  6 
a.  m.,  marching  by  the 
ATCHISON  CROSS- 
FRENCHMAN  road. 

(c)  The  main  body  will  fol- 
low the  advance  guard  at 
1,200  yards. 

(d)  The  signal  troops  will 
establish  a  line  of  informa- 
tion along  the  line  of 
march  between  the  inde- 
pendent cavalry  and 
LEAVEN^WORTH,  one 
of  the  stations  being  at 
FRENCHMAN. 

4.  The  field  train,  escorted  by 

one  company  4th  Inf.,  will 
follow  the  main  body  as  far 
as  FRENCHMAN. 

5.  The  detachment  commander 

will  be  with  the  main  body 
until  7  a.  m.,  and  there- 
after   with     the     advance 
guard. 
The  Ending. — "The  ending  contains  the  authentica- 
tion of  the  order  and   a   statement   of  how  it  is   com- 
municated to  the  command.     This  statement  is  an  im- 
portant feature  of  a  field  order  and  is  made  by  the  officer 
signing  the  order,  he  being  responsible  that  it  is  properly 
distributed."* 

•  P.  S.  R.,  par.  94. 


70 


English  of  Military  Commumcations 


The  ending  then  would  appear  thus: 
By  order  of  Brig.-Gen.  Forse : 

J.  G.  HAMILTON, 

Lt.  Col.  1st  Inf., 
Act.  Chief  of  Staff. 
Copies  to  Colonels  Adams  and  Byron,  commanders  of 
artillery  and  engineers,  and  to  staff;  to  division  comman- 
der by  wire. 

The  various  parts  of  the  field  order,  when  assembled, 
appear  as  follows : 

Det.  21st  Div.  12th  Corps, 
Field  Orders :  Leavenworth,  Kansas, 

No.  22.  9  Dec.  28,  8-15  p.  m. 

(Geological  Survey  Sheet.) 
Troops. 


(a)   Independent 
Cavalry : 
Col.  Adams. 
1st  &  2d  Sqs.  1st 
Cav. 
(less  1  troop). 


(b)   Advance  Guard: 
Col.  Byron. 
1st  Inf. 

1  Troop,  1st  Cav. 
Btry.  B,  5th  F.  A. 
Det.     Amb.     C  o. 
No.  1. 


The  enemy's  cavalry  patrols 
have  been  seen  north  of 
KICKAPOO.  His  infan- 
try and  artillery  are  re- 
ported at  ATCHISON. 

Our  division  is  8  miles  south 
of  LEAVENWORTH. 

This  detachment  will  march 
tomorrow  to  KICKAPOO. 
(a)  The  Independent  Cav- 
alry will  start  at  5-30 
a.  m.,  covering  the  move- 
ment. 

(b)  The  advance  guard  will 
clear  the  nothern  exit  of 
LEAVENWORTH  at  6 
a.  m.,  marching  by  the 
ATCHISON  CROSS- 
FRENCHMAN  road. 


English  of  Military  Communications 


71 


(c)  Mam     Body,     in 

order  of  march: 
1st  Bn.  2d  Inf. 
1st  Bn.  5th  F.  A. 

(less  1  btry). 
1st  Brig,  (less  1st 

Inf.  and  1st  Bn. 

2d  Inf.). 
4.th  Inf. 
Co.  A,  Engrs. 

(less  det.). 
Amb.    Co.    No 

(less  det.). 
1st  F.  Hosp. 


(c)  The  main  body  will  fol- 
low the  advance  guard  at 
1,200  yards. 

(d)  The  Signal  troops  will 
establish  a  line  of  informa- 
tion along  the  line  of 
march  between  the  inde- 
pendent cavalry  and 
LEAVENWORTH,  one 
of  the  stations  being  at 
FRENCHMAN. 

1      4.     The  field  train,  escorted  by 
one  company  4th  Infantry, 
will  follow  the  main  body 
as  far  as  FRENCHMAN. 
5.     The     detachment     c  o  m- 
mander    will    be    with    the 
main  body  until  7  a.  m., 
and  thereafter  with  the  ad- 
vance guard. 
B  y     order     o  f     Brig.-Gen. 
Forse : 

J.  G.  HAMILTON, 
Lt.  Col.,  1st  Inf., 
Acting  Chief  of  Staff. 
Copies  to  Colonels  Adams  and  Byron,  commanders  of 
artillery  and  engineers,  and  to   staff;   to  division   com- 
mander by  wire. 
There  are  certain 

Special  Cautions 
in  regard  to  the  writing  of  the  field  order. 

-What  is  required  in  paragraph  3  of  the  Body  is 


(d)   Signal  Troops: 
Lieut.  Dash. 
1  plat.  Co.  A. 


1.- 

that  the  order  be  logical- 
*See  1st  par..  Appendix. 


-coherent.* 


72  English  of  Military  Communications 

2. — ^An  order  tells  a  subordinate  what  to  do  but  not 
how  to  do  it. 

3. — Conjectures,  expectations,  reasons  for  measures 
adopted,  and  detailed  instructions  for  a  variety  of  possible 
events,  do  not  inspire  confidence,  and  should  be  avoided. 

4. — As  a  rule,  an  affirmative  form  of  expression  is  used. 
Such  an  order  as:  "The  supply  train  will  not  accompany 
the  division,"  is  defective,  because  the  gist  of  the  order 
depends  upon  the  single  word  "not."  It  is  far  better  to 
say,  "The  supply  train  will  remain  at  so  and  so  until 
further  orders." 

6. — Do  not  use  such  expressions  as  "attempt  to  cap- 
ture," "try  to  hold,"  "as  far  as  possible,"  "as  well  as  you 
can."  Besides  being  indefinite,  they  divide  responsibility. 
You,  for  example,  receive  an  order  "to  try  to  capture"  a 
certain  position.  Immediately  there  pops  into  your  mind 
the  suspicion  that  the  coinmanding  officer  did  not  believe 
that  the  place  could  be  taken,  or  was  not  anxious  about 
having  it  captured.  The  commanding  officer  by  the  very 
wording  of  his  order  has  taken  on  himself  a  part  of  the 
responsibility  in  the  event  of  a  repulse.  At  least  he  has 
not  placed  all  the  burden  of  the  undertaking  upon  you. 
In  the  latter  case  he  has  been  guilty  of  improper  sub- 
ordination. 


CHAPTER  VII 
PROBLEMS  IN  THE  FIELD  ORDER 

After  the  plan  of  Trench  of  the  English  Service,  we  are 
going  to  take  up  the  problems  in  the  construction  of  the 
field  order  along  the  lines  on  which  tactical  situations 
naturally  develop  themselves  during  hostihties.  We  shall 
discover  that  the  sequence  will  not  only  conform  to 
actual  conditions,  but  will  lead  from  the  more  simple  to 
the  more  complex.     We  shall,  then,  proceed  with, — 

(1)  The  March  Order. 

(2)  The  Attack  Order. 

(3)  The  Order  for  Position  in  Readiness. 

(4)  The  Defense  Order. 

(5)  The  Retreat  Order. 

(6)  The  Pursuit  Order. 

(7)  The  Halt  Order. 

(8)  The  Outpost  Order. 

Emphasis  will  be  laid  upon  the  march  and  attack 
orders,  because  they  are  the  most  usual  and  the  most 
criticaL 

In  these  problems  all  necessary  data  will  be  given.  No 
attempt  will  be  made  to  mislead  in  regard  to  fact.  But 
every  attempt  will  be  made  to  mislead  in  regard  to  the  ex- 
pression of  the  fact.  Crude  violations  and  mixtures  of 
rhetoric  will  therefore  be  found  throughout. 

In  arranging  his  material  the  student  should  use  his 
own  style  and  should  not  attempt  to  copy  phraseology 
from  any  military  forms.  That  which  is  most  brief  and 
most  v/nmistakable  is  best,  no  matter  who  writes  the  order. 

Note. — The  topographical  data  will  not  be  found  upon 
the  map.    The  units  for  which  a  field  order  must  be  written 


%4i  English  of  Military  Communications 

require  an  area  larger  than  that  which  our  limited  sheet 
provides.  The  student,  by  reading  over  the  problem  two 
or  three  times  ought,  with  the  aid  of  his  imagination,  to 
perceive  the  wiU  of  the  commander. 

(1)  March  Ob,deb,s 
1. — On  June  12,  1925,  you  are  Major  General  Aber- 
crombie  in  command  of  the  16th  Division  of  the  12th 
Army  Corps.  You  wish  your  division,  which  is  in  the 
vicinity  of  Bruceville,  to  march  over  to  Littlestown  the 
next  day.  You  want  it  to  cover  the  base  and  line  of 
supply  for  your  troops.  You  want  it  to  do  aU  this  be- 
cause one  of  your  flying  corps  lieutenants  saw  from  a  cap- 
tive balloon  about  a  division  of  the  enemy  pass  through 
Chambersburg  early  in  the  morning.  The  enemy  was 
marching  east  and  according  to  the  heutenant  was  com- 
posed of  infantry,  cavalry,  field  artillery — in  fact,  all 
branches  of  the  service.  You  finish  with  this  your  twenty- 
second  order  since  January  1st  at  a  quarter  after  ten  at 
night.  But  just  before  you  finish  with  your  order  a 
Colonel  of  Cavalry  on  your  staff  tells  you  that  he  person- 
ally saw  cavalry  in  Gettysburg  during  the  evening.  You 
want  your  advance  guard,  which  consists  of  the  1st  Bri- 
gade, 1st  Battalion  of  the  1st  Field  Artillery,  Company  A, 
First  Battalion  of  Engineers,  one  section  of  a  Signal  Com- 
pany, and  the  first  ambulance  company,  to  get  past  the 
bridge  over  Pipe  Creek  at  precisely  six  o'clock  and  to  go 
along  the  main  road  to  Littlestown  in  its  route.  The 
advance  guard  is  to  be  commanded  by  Brigadier  General 
Black.  Now  the  main  body,  you  figure,  will  go  along  in 
column  from  front  to  rear, — one  section  of  the  Signal 
Company,  the  fourth  regiment  of  Infantry,  the  Field 
Artillery  Brigade  without  its  combat  train,  the  2d  Brigade 
without  the  4th  Infantry,  the  third  Brigade,  the  Signal 


Englith  of  Military  Communications  75 

Company  (Company  A)  without  its  detachments,  the  first 
Battalion  of  Engineers  without  Company  A,  the  Field 
Artillery  Combat  Train,  and  then  the  second,  third,  and 
fourth  Ambulance  companies. 

You  want  this  main  body  to  start  across  the  Pipe  Creek 
bridge  at  half  past  six  and  you  want  it  to  go  along  keep- 
ing a  distance  of  a  mile  behind  the  tail  of  the  advance 
guard.  You  want  to  tell  your  troops,  too,  that  you  will 
be  with  the  tail  of  the  reserve  of  the  advance  guard.  You 
intend  to  sign  your  order  yourself  and  you  want  copies 
sent  to  Lieutenants  Kingsley  and  Lawrence,  and  to 
Brigade  Generals  Black,  Dare,  Evans,  Colonel  File,  Major 
Glad,  Captain  Hume  and  your  staff.  You  want  your 
trains  to  follow  your  main  body  in  order  from  front  to 
rear:  field  trains,  ammunition  columns,  supply  columns, 
field  hospitals,  medical  reserve,  and  pack  train.  You  feel 
that  the  man  in  command  of  your  signal  corps  should 
arrange  to  have  radio  connection  between  your  indepen- 
dent cavalry  and  the  advance  guard.  That  idea  brings 
up  another  matter.  Your  independent  cavalry,  which  will 
be  commanded  by  Colonel  File  and  which  will  consist  of  the 
1st  Cavalry  and  one  section  of  the  Signal  Company,  will 
have  to  reconnoiter  all  the  roads  which  lead  out  of  Gettys- 
burg and  which  are  between  the  York  Pike  and  the  Em- 
mitsburg  road.  You  want  the  cavalry  to  reconnoiter  the 
York  Pike  and  the  Emmitsburg  road,  too.  You  want  this 
cavalry  to  maneuver  so  that  they  will  come  in  contact 
with  the  enemy  as  soon  as  practicable.  Now  you  want 
the  independent  cavalry  to  do  all  this  because  you  want  it 
to  cover  the  whole  movement  of  your  troops  and  you  think 
it  ought  to  start  out  promptly  at  five  o'clock  in  the 
morning  in  order  to  accomplish  its  purpose  best. 

2. — On  the  tenth  of  August,  1928,  you  are  Colonel 
Bruce  commanding  the  129th  regiment  of  Infantry  which 


76  Engliih  of  Military  Communications 

is  acting  as  advance  guard  to  the  5th  Division.  On  tht 
tenth  of  August  at  half  past  five  in  the  morning  at  the 
Penitentiary  of  Leavenworth,  Kansas,  you  sign  your  27th 
field  order.  You  have  in  reality  dictated  it  to  your 
officers,  but  you  sign  it  as  soon  as  you  have  finished.  You 
have  told  them  in  substance  that  all  but  one  squad  of 
Troop  A,  imder  command  of  Captain  Briggs,  21st 
Cavalry,  would  comprise  the  Advance  Cavalry;  that  the 
first  battahon  of  the  1st  Infantry,  one  squad  of  Troop  A, 
21st  Cavalry,  and  a  detachment  of  Company  A  of  the 
Engineers  under  Major  Chittombly,  would  constitute  the 
support ;  and  that  the  Reserve  would  be  Headquarters  and 
2d  Battalion  of  the  129th  Infantry,  Battery  B  of  the  6th 
Field  Artillery,  the  third  Battalion  of  the  129th  Infantry, 
and  a  Detachment  of  Ambulance  Company,  Number  1. 
You  assembled  all  the  officers  of  your  command  when  you 
dictated  your  order  and  you  told  them  that  the  troops  of 
the  command  would  march  in  order  as  stated  above.  You 
told  them  that  you  would  stay  with  the  reserve  and  would 
march  near  its  head.  You  stated  that  the  field  train  would 
assemble  at  the  first  cross-roads  to  the  south  and  there 
wait  under  command  of  Captain  Phillips,  the  Quarter- 
master of  the  1st  Infantry,  for  the  field  train  of  the  main 
body  and  would  join  that  field  train  as  it  passed.  The 
main  body  was  to  come  along  so  that  the  head  of  it  would 
be  just  a  half  mile  behind  the  tail  of  the  Reserve  of  the 
Advance  Guard.  The  whole  of  the  Advance  Guard  you 
want  to  march  on  Kickapoo,  because  the  enemy  which 
someone  had  reported  to  have  camped  near  Atchison  the 
night  before,  and  is  composed  of  all  branches  of  the 
service,  has  cavalry  patrols  out  which  were  seen  in  the 
vicinity  of  Kickapoo  yesterday.  You  wish  the  point  of 
the  support  to  begin  the  march  at  a  quarter  to  six  in  the 
morning.     It  is  to  go  by  the  general  route  which  marks 


Englith  of  Military  Communications  77 

the  turning  points  Atchison  Cross,  Frenchman,  Kickapoo, 
along  a  continuous  stretch  of  road.  So  that  the  Advance 
Cavalry  will  have  time  to  get  ahead,  you  want  it  to  leave 
camp  at  once  and  march  by  way  of  Atchison  Cross  to 
Kickapoo.  This  proceeding  is  necessary  because  you  want 
all  the  country  west  of  the  line  of  march  to  the  extent  of 
three  miles  very  carefully  observed.  You  want  Sheridan's 
Drive  to  be  observed  carefully  also.  You  want  the  reserve 
to  follow  the  support  so  that  there  will  be  800  yards 
distance  between  it  and  the  tail  of  the  support.  You  send 
a  copy  of  the  order  to  your  Division  Commander. 

3. — On  the  thirty-first  of  May,  1931,  you  are  Major 
Greneral  Perkins  in  command  of  the  16th  Division,  22d 
Corps.  War  has  just  broken  out  and  not  any  of  your 
army  has  crossed  the  frontier  as  yet.  However,  it  is  going 
to  do  so  on  the  next  day,  and  the  22d  Corps  is  going  to 
march  on  Thurmont  and  Frederick.  Your  division  has 
been  ordered  to  cover  the  left  of  the  whole  army.  Your 
independent  cavalry  in  command  of  Colonel  Frank  and 
composed  of  the  11th  Cavalry  and  the  first  radio  section  of 
the  Signal  Corps,  is  to  be  followed  by  the  Advance  Guard 
under  command  of  Brigadier  General  Blood.  The  advance 
guard  is  composed  of  the  first  Brigade,  the  first  battalion 
of  the  first  field  artillery,  a  company  of  the  first  Battalion 
of  Engineers,  the  first  Ambulance  Company,  and  one  radio 
section  of  the  Signal  Company.  You  sign  your  order  at 
eight  in  the  evening  and  send  copies  to  Brigadier  Generals 
Blood,  Cook,  Dean,  Enfield,  Colonel  Frank,  Major  Good, 
Captain  Harry,  by  officers.  You  also  furnish  copies  to 
your  staff.  You  decide  to  have  your  division  march  on 
Gettysburg  in  order  to  carry  out  your  mission.  Your 
main  body  is  going  to  start  at  seven  in  the  morning  and 
will  march  in  the  following  order :  one  section  of  the  Signal 
Company,  the  first  battalion  of  the  4th  Infantry,  all  but 


78  English  of  Military  Communications 

one  battalion  of  the  first  brigade  of  Field  Artillery,  all  of 
the  second  Brigade  but  the  first  battalion  of  the  4th 
Infantry,  the  entire  third  Brigade,  all  but  one  company  of 
the  first  battalion  of  engineers.  Signal  Company  A  without 
certain  detachments  mentioned  before,  the  field  artillery 
combat  trains,  and  three  ambulance  companies.  You  want 
the  advance  guard  to  be  up  and  out  of  camp  at  half  past 
six  in  the  morning.  It  is  to  march  by  the  Chambersburg 
Pike  on  Gettysburg  and  to  be  followed  by  the  main  body 
with  a  mile  between  the  two  units.  The  independent 
cavalry  is  to  be  up  and  out  of  camp  by  six  o'clock  in  the 
morning.  You  want  your  trains  to  follow  your  main  body 
five  miles  behind  it  and  j'^ou  want  them  to  follow  in  this 
order:  field  trains,  first  section  of  the  supply  trains, 
ammunition  column,  the  remainder  of  the  supply  trains, 
field  hospitals,  medical  reserve,  pack  train.  You  want 
your  independent  cavalry  to  advance  on  Gettysburg.  You 
want  your  independent  cavalry  to  reconnoiter  all  the  roads 
which  run  out  of  Gettysburg  to  the  south  and  east  and  you 
want  them  to  get  in  touch  with  the  cavalry  of  the  corps  as 
soon  as  possible.  You  are  going  to  march  at  the  forward 
end  of  the  reserve  of  the  advance  guard.  When  you  have 
signed  your  order  at  Chambersburg  where  your  troops  are 
located,  you  have  it  telegraphed  to  Corps  headquarters. 

4. — On  May  the  eleventh,  1940,  you  are  in  command  of 
the  8th  Division  of  the  19th  Corps.  You  are  at  Frederick, 
Maryland,  and  you  want  your  division  to  advance  toward 
Gettysburg  and  to  be  a  protection  to  your  main  army 
which  is  going  to  come  through  the  passes  of  the  mountains 
in  that  vicinity.  You  are  going  to  remain  in  Frederick 
until  half  past  eight  the  next  morning,  and  then  you  are 
going  to  go  and  be  with  the  advance  guard  at  its  head. 
You  want  your  main  body  to  begin  to  move  out  when  the 
head  is  at  the  first  railroad  crossing  north  of  the  town,  and 


English  of  Military  Communications  79 

at  ten  minutes  to  seven  to  follpw  a  mile  behind  the  advance 
guard  which  you  are  going  to  have  march  along  the  Em- 
mitsburg  Turnpike.  The  end  of  the  column  ought  to  be 
across  the  first  railroad  crossing  north  of  the  town  at  half 
past  six  in  the  morning.  The  enemy's  main  army  is  near 
Baltimore  and  Washington.  You  haev  heard  from  pretty 
good  sources  that  a  part  of  his  army  is  in  such  a  condition 
that  any  immediate  movement  is  rendered  out  of  the  ques- 
tion, though  you  have  reliable  word  that  one  of  his  di- 
visions and  possibly  more  are  in  fit  condition  to  move  to- 
ward the  frontier.  Indeed  they  may  have  done  so,  for  al- 
ready your  frontier  is  being  observed  by  all  sorts  and  kinds 
of  small  detachments  of  the  enemy.  You  want  your  field 
trains  to  come  along  and  get  together  north  of  the  town 
as  soon  as  all  of  the  troops  have  got  out.  You  want  them 
to  be  divided  into  two  sections  and  you  want  the  first  sec- 
tion to  be  about  two  miles  in  rear  of  the  troops  and  the 
second  section  to  come  along  after  the  first  section  with  a 
two  mile  distance.  Your  main  body  in  order  of  march  will 
be,  one  section  of  the  sismal  company,  the  first  battalion  of 
the  fourth  regiment  of  infantry,  the  first  brigade  of  Field 
Artillery  without  its  first  battalion,  all  but  the  first 
battalion  of  the  second  brigade,  all  but  one  company  of  the 
first  battalion  of  Engineers,  Signal  Company  A  without 
its  detachment,  the  field  artillery  combat  train,  and  three 
ambulance  companies.  You  want  the  river  crossings  of 
the  Monocacy  and  the  roads,  railroads,  and  in  fact  all 
approaches  to  them  from  the  east  to  be  especially  observed 
by  the  Advance  Guard.  That  body  will  consist  of  the  first 
brigade,  the  first  battalion  of  the  first  field  artillery. 
Company  A  of  the  Engineers,  the  first  Ambulance 
Company  and  the  first  section  of  the  Signal  Company,  all 
under  command  of  Brigadier  Greneral  Bates.  The  first 
section  of  the  field  train  will  have  the  following  order: 


80  English  of  Military  Communicatioiis 

field  trains ;  one  section  of  the  supply  column ;  one  wagon 
company  of  artillery  ammunition;  and  one  wagon 
company  of  small  arms  ammunition.  The  second  section: 
field  hospitals,  all  but  two  wagon  companies  of  the 
ammunition  column;  all  but  one  section  of  the  supply 
column ;  medical  reserve ;  and  pack  trains.  You  are  going 
to  begin  this  whole  march  on  the  next  day.  Your 
independent  cavalry,  commanded  by  Colonel  Fine,  and 
consisting  of  the  first  regiment  of  Cavalry  and  one  section 
of  the  Signal  Company  is  to  start  out  at  half  past  five  in 
the  morning  and  cover  your  whole  movement.  You  want 
this  cavalry  to  scout  around  Taneytown  and  see  what  it 
can  find  on  the  roads  which  go  off  from  the  southeast  from 
there.  The  whole  army  of  which  you  are  a  part  aims  to 
take  up  an  advance  movement  and  it  plans  to  get  to 
Gettysburg  on  the  eighteenth  of  May.  This  is  the  second 
field  order  you  have  issued  in  this  campaign.  You  send 
copies  of  it  by  your  aide  Lieut.  Kill  to  Generals  Bates, 
Cutts,  Dent,  and  Eaton ;  by  Lieut.  Link  to  Colonel  Fine, 
Major  Good,  Captain  Hall,  and  to  the  commander  of  the 
trains.  You  read  the  order  to  your  staff,  send  a  copy  by 
mail  to  Corps  Headquarters  and  telegraph  a  synopsis  to 
the  same  place.  You  sign  your  order  at  a  quarter  after 
nine. 

6. — On  June  10,  1925,  you  are  Brigadier  General 
Stewart  in  command  of  a  Detachment  from  the  ninth 
division.  You  are  lost.  You  can  find  out  nothing  about 
the  enemy.  Indeed  you  can  get  no  wind  of  where  your  own 
troops  are.  You  assemble  all  your  officers  and  read  at  ten 
minutes  after  five  in  the  morning  an  order  which  you  have 
written  at  Bonnyville  where  you  are  located.  You  want 
your  whole  command  to  go  by  way  of  Whitehall  and  move 
toward  Levere.  You  want  your  field  train  and 
ammunition    wagon    companies,    on    account    of    your 


Englith  of  Military  Communications  81 

ignorance  of  the  enemy  to  park  near  the  western  end  of  the 
town  where  the  road  runs  out.  They  are  to  make  this 
maneuver  after  half  past  six  and  are  to  be  in  readiness  to 
move  to  the  west  or  to  the  east.  The  advance  guard  under 
command  of  Colonel  Dent,  and  composed  of  all  of  the 
second  infantry  but  the  third  battalion,  is  to  march  on  the 
road  past  St.  Luke's  Church  and  then  on  the  same  road 
toward  Whitehall.  It  is  to  get  past  the  road  fork  where 
the  main  road  goes  out  of  the  town  at  the  southeastern 
edge  at  twenty  minutes  to  six.  You  are  going  to  be  with 
the  advance  guard.  You  will  be  up  front  with  the  reserve. 
Your  independent  cavalry  is  to  march  at  half  past  four. 
It  consists  of  the  first  squadron  of  the  fifth  cavalry  under 
command  of  Major  Curt.  It  is  going  to  try  to  get  in 
touch  with  the  enemy.  The  main  body  is  to  come  along 
after  the  advance  guard  so  that  it  will  be  eight  hundred 
yards  from  the  tail  of  it.  Your  main  body  will  march  in 
the  following  order :  third  battalion  of  the  second  infantry, 
first  battalion  without  the  reserve,  the  third  regiment  of 
infantry,  the  first  regiment  of  infantry,  the  artillery 
reserve,  the  first  ambulance  company  and  Signal  Company 
A.  Part  of  your  main  body  is  doing  outpost  duty,  and 
you  have  told  your  oflicer  when  you  issued  your  order  that 
when  the  support  of  the  advance  guard  reached  St.  Luke's 
Church  the  next  morning  the  outpost  would  stand  relieved, 
and  that  it  would  take  its  place  in  column  after  it  had 
closed  in  to  the  road,  when  the  troops  came  along. 

(2)  Attack  Orders 
6. — ^You  are  Brigadier  General  Greene  commanding  a 
Detachment  of  the  18th  Division,  and  on  June  11,  1965 
you  are  at  the  headquarters  of  your  division  at  St.  Luke's 
Church.  You  receive  reliable  messages  to  the  effect  that 
the  enemy  is  in  your  front  about  two  and  a  half  miles 


82  English  of  Military  Communicationa 

away.  You  determine  to  attack  the  left  of  the  enemy  and 
to  envelop  that  flank.  You  want  the  cavalry  to  cover 
your  own  left  flank,  and  you  want  the  cavalry  also  to 
send  out  patrols  to  keep  a  lookout  on  the  right.  First  of 
all,  though,  you  want  the  battalion  of  artillery  to  go 
south  via  the  Newman  farm  and  take  a  position  north  of 
the  farm.  You  want  the  artillery  to  begin  firing  as  soon  as 
it  arrives  in  the  position  designated.  You  have  heard 
from  other  patrols  coming  in  that  the  enemy  is  taking  up 
a  position  on  a  hill  in  your  front  about  the  distance  away 
you  had  previously  estimated.  You  want  the  first  infantry 
to  form  the  reserve  and  you  want  it  to  follow  in  rear  of 
the  left  flank  of  the  third  infantry.  The  third  infantry 
will  take  up  and  follow  over  the  same  route  as  the  artillery. 
After  crossing  Plum  Creek  the  whole  regiment  will  move 
to  attack  the  enemy.  The  regiment  will  keep  its  left  near 
the  road  which  runs  past  Piper  and  Whitehall.  The 
battalion  of  artillery  when  it  is  moving  to  its  new  position 
should  move  off  the  road  whenever  it  is  necessary  to  screen 
itself  from  hostile  view.  The  second  infantry  will  attack 
along  the  road  it  is  now  on.  It  should  not,  however, 
advance  beyond  the  Whitehall  School  House  until  the 
artillery  opens  fire.  It  ought  then  to  help  along  the  attack 
in  support  of  the  third  infantry.  You  sign  your  message 
at  half  past  six  in  the  morning.  You  want  your  first 
ambulance  company  to  follow  the  reserve.  When  the  com- 
pany gets  to  Plum  Creek,  however,  it  should  stop  there 
and  wait  until  further  orders.  You  hear  that  your  cavalry 
out  in  front  has  defeated  the  enemy's  cavalry  and  that  the 
enemy's  cavalry  is  fleeing  eastward.  You  wish  to  in- 
corporate this  fact  in  your  order.  You  will  have  some 
one  always  ready  to  receive  messages  at  the  cross-roads  at 
the  Newman  farm  if  you  are  not  there  yourself.  You 
send  a  copy  of  this  your  sixth  field  order  of  the  cam- 


English  of  Military  Communications  88 

paign  by  Lieutenant  Cost  to  Major  Call.  You  read  the 
order  at  half  past  six  to  your  commanders  of  infantry 
regiments,  artillery  battalion,  signal  company,  and  staff 
officers.  You  desire  the  Signal  Company  to  establish  a 
line  which  will  connect  you  with  Bonnyville,  and  you 
should  have  a  line  to  your  support  commander,  who  is  the 
commanding  officer  of  the  second  infantry. 

7. — You,  on  September  1,  1922,  are  at  Kolpatrick 
School  House.  You  are  in  command  of  the  28th  Brigade 
3d  Division,  and  you  issue  to  your  assembled  officers  by 
word  of  mouth  the  twenty-ninth  field  order  of  this  cam- 
paign at  ten  minutes  after  nine  in  the  morning.  You  send 
a  copy  to  the  Chief  of  Staff  of  your  Division  by  an  aide. 
You  have  just  decided  to  attack  a  hostile  detachment 
which  has  just  been  reported  by  an  officer  to  be  near  you 
and  to  be  about  half  your  strength.  In  fact  this  detach- 
ment has  taken  a  position  on  a  ridge  of  long  mountains 
about  two  and  one  half  miles  straight  to  the  south  of  you. 
You  wish  to  communicate  to  your  troops,  also,  that  the 
entire  army  of  which  your  brigade  is  a  part  is  engaged  in 
a  fight  with  the  enemy;  and  that  the  right  of  the  line  of 
the  army  is  near  Two  Taverns.  You  do  not  want  the 
field  train  to  move  out  and  to  accompany  you  in  your 
movement.  The  third  infantry  you  have  decided  to  make 
your  reserve.  It  ought  to  take  up  some  kind  of  position 
to  the  right  of  the  second  infantry  and  in  rear  of  it.  The 
first  infantry  should  move  out  and  should  follow  the  road 
leading  south,  and  before  any  of  the  others  of  the  troops 
it  ought  to  attack  the  enemy  in  front.  You  want  the  first 
infantry  to  begin  their  movement  right  off  and  then  later 
on  to  support  the  enveloping  attack.  The  enveloping 
attack  you  have  trusted  to  the  second  and  third  infantry 
regiments.  The  second  followed  by  the  third  is  to  move 
out  with  the  artillery  on  their  left.    The  whole  body  is  to 


84  English  of  Military  Communications 

march  along  Brush  Run  under  cover  of  a  ridge  of  moun- 
tains on  which  you  are  located  until  it  comes  opposite  to 
the  Brush  Run  School  House.  The  artillery,  as  you  plan 
it,  is  then  to  go  into  position  west  of  Brush  Run  School 
House,  and  to  open  fire  on  the  enemy.  The  second  in- 
fantry is  then  to  deploy,  and  it  is  to  deploy  so  that  its 
right  will  be  about  five  hundred  yards  to  the  left  of  the 
artillery's  position.  The  second  infantry  is  then  to  go 
right  off  into  an  attack  on  the  enemy's  right  flank.  While 
this  body  of  troops  is  on  the  march  (the  second,  and  third 
infantries  and  the  artillery),  the  commanding  officer  of 
the  second  infantry  should  see  that  the  necessary  precau- 
tions are  taken  against  surprise  or  attack  by  the  enemy. 
You  have  decided  to  be  during  the  attack  at  the  head  of 
the  column  on  the  extreme  left  until  it  deploys.  After 
that  you  are  going  to  be  with  the  reserve.  The  first 
squadron  of  the  fourth  cavalry  under  your  command  is 
going  to  cover  your  left  in  this  movement.  It  should  send 
out  strong  patrols  to  the  right  besides  sending  them  to 
the  left  and  get  in  touch  with  the  right  of  the  main  army. 
The  ambulance  will  go  along  with  the  third  infantry.  But 
when  the  third  Infantry  gets  to  Cedar  Ridge,  the  am- 
bulance company  will  not  proceed  any  further. 

8. — On  the  6th  of  January,  1930,  you  are  Brigadier 
General  Hitt  in  command  of  the  first  Brigade,  first  Di- 
vision. You  are  at  Ode,  Missouri.  You  defeated  the 
enemy  the  day  before.  You  have  since  heard  that  he  is 
occupying  the  line  which  extends  from  Baldwin  to  the  hill 
south  of  Eppley's  Farm.  You  have  an  advance  guard  for 
your  Brigade  and  you  decide  to  take  up  an  attack  forma- 
tion which  will  not  necessitate  the  use  of  an  advance  guard 
any  longer.  The  trains  you  feel  should  not  be  moved  from 
where  they  are  located,  but  the  ambulance  company  ought 
to  move  toward,  and  take  a  suitable  position  near,  Ode. 


English  of  Military  Communicationt  95 

You  decide  to  attack  immediately,  and  you  are  going  to 
do  so  in  a  way  which  will  cause  the  enemy's  left  to  be  en- 
veloped. You  issue  the  61st  field  order  of  the  campaign  at 
half  past  nine  in  the  morning. 

You  understand  from  reliable  sources,  in  fact  from 
officers'  patrols,  that  there  is  a  large  convoy  of  the  enemy 
parked  somewhere  in  Farley.  You  decide  that  the  first 
infantry  ought  to  take  up  the  main  advance  against  the 
enemy,  and  you  think  it  ought  to  go  in  a  general  direction 
along  the  road  which  runs  past  Square  Corners  and  Ep- 
pley.  After  the  1st  Infantry  has  launched  its  attack  it 
ought  to  support  the  attack  of  the  2d  Infantry.  The  3d 
Infantry  is  going  to  send  the  2d  Infantry  a  machine  gun 
company,  which  you  think  you  will  have  attached  to  the 
2d  Infantry.  The  2d  Infantry,  you  have  figured  out, 
ought  to  advance,  keeping  the  ravine  near  Meas  between 
itself  and  the  enemy.  After  it  strikes  the  ravine,  it  ought 
to  go  along  it  until  the  first  part  of  the  column  approaches 
and  comes  up  to  a  point  where  the  ravine  starts  to  bend 
south.  When  it  has  exactly  reached  that  point  where  the 
ravine  does  bend  south,  it  ought  to  start  out  on  the 
enemy's  left  in  an  attack.  The  2d  Infantry  ought  to  push 
this  attack  with  all  its  might.  The  3d  Infantry  will  be 
known  as  a  reserve,  and  it  will  be  under  your  orders ;  until 
further  orders  it  ought  to  take  up  a  position  in  some 
sheltered  place  to  the  west  of  Square  Corners.  Before  it 
starts  out,  however,  it  ought  to  send  its  machine  gun  com- 
pany, without  further  delay,  so  that  the  company  may 
report  to  the  commander  of  the  1st  Infantry  as  soon  as 
practicable.  You  give  all  this  order  to  your  regimental 
commanders  after  they  have  been  assembled — in  fact,  you 
read  it  off  to  them.  With  the  regimental  commanders 
have  been  assembled  also  Major  Black  of  the  7th  Field 
Artillery,  and  the  officers  in  charge  of  the  ambulance  com- 


86  English  of  Military  Communications 

pany,  and  the  officers  of  your  staff.  You  are  going  to  send 
a  copy  of  this  order  by  the  aide  to  your  Division  Com- 
mander. You  are  going  to  have  a  station  at  the  reserve 
where  you  will  be  in  touch  with  any  messages  that  might 
come  in — in  fact,  all  the  messages  ought  to  be  sent  there. 
You  want  the  cavalry  to  cover  your  left  flank,  and  you 
want  a  strong  patrol  sent  in  the  general  direction  of  the 
west  and  also  of  the  south.  Before  you  finished  writing  this 
order  you  found  out  that  the  bridges  over  the  Platte  River 
were  all  destroyed.  The  Platte  River  runs  along  the  rear 
of  the  enemy.  All  those  bridges  which  are  between  Platte 
City  and  Farley  you  know  are  destroyed;  you  hear  also 
that  the  enemy  is  at  work  repairing  them.  From  all  the 
messages  and  all  sources  of  information  which  you  can 
assemble,  you  estimate  that  it  will  require  two  or  three 
hours  to  make  these  bridges  safe  for  troops.  You  want 
the  1st  Battalion  of  the  7th  Field  Artillery  to  move  out 
straight  to  the  south  and  to  take  up  a  position  500  yards 
south  of  where  you  are  writing  your  message.  When  the 
artillery  gets  there,  you  want  it  to  open  fire  just  as  soon 
as  it  can  on  the  enemy's  position  wherever  that  might  be. 
You  want  your  artillery  to  make  the  enemy's  artillery  a 
target,  and  to  develop  that  target  as  soon  as  possible. 

9. — On  the  17th  of  May,  1919,  you  are  in  command  of 
the  1st  Division  of  the  18th  Corps.  Your  division  is  en- 
camped near  Mt.  St.  Mary's.  You  want  your  division  to 
attack  the  enemy  right  away  and  you  want  him  to  go 
around  so  he  will  develop  the  left  of  the  enemy.  Your  first 
ambulance  company  ought  to  follow  the  Field  Artillery  to 
where  Hampton  Valley  starts,  and  it  ought  to  stay  there 
until  further  orders.  Your  second  ambulance  company 
you  want  to  go  along  with  and  follow  the  3d  Brigade. 
This  ambulance  company  ought  to  go  as  far  as  the  cross- 
ing of  Beaver  Branch,  and  then  it  should  stay  there  and 


English  of  Military  Communications  87 

not  go  away  until  further  orders.  The  third  and  fourth 
ambulance  companies  should  not  move  out  at  all,  but  ought 
to  park  somewhere  near  the  road  near  the  place  called 
Rodey.  The  field  hospitals  will  not  move  out  at  all,  but 
ought  to  stay  until  you  send  them  orders  to  the  contrary. 
In  the  place  called  Thurmont,  there  ought  to  be  a  collect- 
ing station  for  the  slightly  wounded.  Your  first  artillery 
ought  to  move  out  at  once  down  Hampton  Valley  and  take 
a  position  somewhere  near  the  road  which  runs  through 
Emmitsburg  and  along  past  St.  Joseph's  Academy.  The 
2d  Field  Artillery  should  find  a  position  and  take  it  up 
somewhere  near  Motters.  The  3d  Brigade,  which  we 
found  the  second  ambulance  company  was  to  follow,  should 
move  out  and  then  go  along  by  Motters  and  launch  an 
attack  on  the  enemy ;  the  3d  Brigade  ought  to  envelop  the 
enemy's  left.  The  left  of  the  3d  Brigade  ought  to  rest  on 
the  line  which  runs  through  the  place  called  Motters,  and 
also  runs  through  Tom's  Creek  Church.  The  Brigade 
Commander  of  the  3d  Brigade  will  have  the  general  line  of 
the  Monocacy  Creek  under  observation  of  mounted  men. 
This  line  ought  to  be  kept  in  under  observation  pretty  well 
south — in  fact,  to  the  mouth  of  Hunting  Creek.  The  main 
attack  will  be  launched,  as  you  figured,  all  along  the  front, 
which  is  determined  by  a  line  running  through  St.  Joseph's 
Academy  and  also  running  through  Long's. 

The  brigade  commander  of  this  brigade  ought  to  detail 
a  battalion  of  infantry;  the  special  duty  of  this  battalion 
will  be  to  form  an  escort  for  the  1st  Field  Artillery  which 
it  will  accompany.  One  wagon  company  of  artillery  am- 
munition will  go  down  to  the  mouth  of  Hampton  Valley. 
You  have  heard  that  there  is  a  great  party  of  the  enemy, 
which  has  been  estimated  at  say  two-thirds  of  a  division, 
and  that  this  big  force  is  assembling  and  concentrating  in 
rear  of  the  outlying  timber.     This  fringe  of  timber  ex- 


88  English  of  Military  Communicationt 

tends  from  Tom's  Creek  Church  all  the  way  north  to  near 
Parkersburg.  This  hostile  force  averages  about  60  yards 
south  of  this  timber.  The  first  cavalry  you  feel  ought  to 
cover  your  left.  You  feel  that  the  reconnaissance  that 
it  ought  to  take  up  must  be  strong,  dashing,  and  vigorous, 
and  that  it  should  reconnoiter  east  of  the  Monocacy.  You 
write  your  order,  which  is  the  third  one  during  the  year,  at 
9  o'clock  in  the  morning. 

Your  Signal  Company  will  lay  a  line  from  the  1st  JField 
Artillery  to  the  road-fork,  600  yards  west  of  Round 
Corners.  A  second  line  will  be  laid  from  the  2d  Brigade 
to  the  same  road-fork.  Your  leading  wagon  company  of 
small  arms  ammunition  should  be  placed  just  north  of 
Riley.  You  want  to  state  to  the  remainder  of  your  trains 
that  they  are  not  to  move  out  from  there  until  they  get 
orders  from  you.  You  send  copies  of  this  order  to  Majors 
Black,  Cord,  Darwin,  Enfield,  Colonel  Forse,  Major  Good, 
and  Captain  Harrow.  You  report  by  telegraph  to  your 
Division  Headquarters  what  you  have  said  in  your  order. 
The  2d  Brigade  is  going  to  be  your  general  reserve;  it 
should  take  up  a  position  outside  near  the  cross-roads. 
This  cross-roads  that  you  mean  is  1,600  yards  west  of 
Motters.  Any  messages  and  reports  which  are  going 
to  come  to  you,  you  want  to  have  reach  you  at  the  road- 
fork,  which  is  about  2,000  yards  west  of  the  place  called 
Motters. 

10. — You  are  Brigadier  General  Aaron  in  charge  of  a 
detachment  of  the  1st  Division.  You  are  about  to  get  out 
your  fourth  field  order  of  the  campaign,  which  you  issued 
and  signed  at  ten  minutes  to  seven  on  the  morning  of 
October  6,  1918.  Your  Chief  of  Staff  is  Lieutenant  Bean. 
The  main  body,  of  which  you  are  a  part,  is  engaged  with 
the  enemy  at  the  present  time.  The  two  bodies  opposed 
to  each  other,  fighting  strenuously,  extend  from  near  the 


English  of  Military  Communications  89 

Belmont  School  House  toward  the  north.  You  want  the 
1st  Infantry  to  advance  via  the  530-618  road,  and  you 
want  it  to  deploy  whenever  it  is  necessary  for  it  to  do  so. 
You  want  it  to  deploy  with  its  left  flank  touching  the  548- 
618  road.  After  it  has  done  this  you  want  it  to  attack  at 
the  same  time  that  the  2d  Infantry  does.  Your  artillery 
you  want  to  move  out  by  way  of  the  road  which  runs 
through  542  and  550,  and  you  want  it  to  go  so  it  will  get 
a  position  somewhere  near  the  Hill  608 ;  it  will  be  escorted 
by  the  1st  Battalion  of  the  2d  Infantry.  You  want  this 
artillery  to  support  the  attack  in  the  best  way  it  can. 
The  1st  Battalion  of  the  2d  Infantry  should  take  up  such 
formation  and  movement  as  wiU  best  provide  protection 
for  the  left  of  your  whole  line.  The  whole  of  the  2d  In- 
fantry, of  course,  excepting  the  first  battalion,  will  ad- 
vance by  452.  It  will  then  take  a  cut  across  country 
and  then  by  the  road  which  goes  by  546  and  548.  The 
2d  Infantry  will  attack  the  enemy's  right  flank.  The 
cavalry  should  cover  the  left  of  your  own  troops  and  make 
strong  reconnaissance  of  the  country  to  the  north  and 
also  to  the  west.  A  troop  of  this  Cavalry  should  be  sent 
over  to  the  right  flank  of  our  troops.  The  work  of  this 
troop  should  be  to  get  into  communication  and  keep  com- 
munication with  your  main  army  by  telegraph.  You 
want  the  Signal  Detachment  to  give  you  wire  communica- 
tions, or  in  fact,  any  kind  of  communications  which  will 
best  keep  you  in  touch  with  the  1st  Infantry.  You  are  at 
the  cross-roads  near  Mt.  Vernon  School  House  when  you 
write  your  order.  Y'^ou  have  learned  that  there  is  a  body 
of  the  enemy,  a  rather  large  body  in  fact,  which  is  going 
into  some  position  selected  near  Granite  Hill.  You  gain 
from  reliable  patrols  all  the  above  information,  and  also 
the  fact  that  this  detachment  of  the  enemy  is  about  one- 
half  your  own  strength.    You  decide  that  you  are  going 


yo  Engiisk  of  MiLitary  Communicatiom 

to  attack  at  once  this  detacliment  which  is  just  spoken  of, 
which  is  going  into  a  position  near  Granite  Hill.  If  it  is 
going  into  position,  and  if  it  is  now  only  one-half  your 
strength,  you  can  see  that  there  are  two  reasons  why 
you  must  launch  your  attack  with  the  utmost  vigor  and 
celerity,  because  the  enemy  might  gain  reinforcements,  or 
a  good  position  in  the  meantime.  You  state  in  your  order 
that  you  are  going  to  be  with  the  reserve  all  the  time,  and 
you  send  copies  to  all  your  officers,  especially  to  Major 
Good  who  is  commanding  the  cavalry,  and  you  report 
what  you  have  done  by  telegraph  to  the  Chief  of  Staff. 
You  decide  to  have  the  3d  Infantry  be  the  reserve.  If  the 
3d  Infantry  is  the  reserve  and  you  are  with  it,  it  ought 
to  be  under  your  orders.  The  3d  Infantry  will  follow 
along  behind  the  2d  Infantry  until  the  latter  regiment 
deploys. 

11. — ^You  are  Maj  or-General  Plunkitt  On  the  3d  of 
September,  1923,  you  are  near  the  town  of  Guldens.  You 
are  in  command  of  the  4th  Division  of  the  12th  Corps. 
You  issue  a  written  order  by  your  Chief  of  Staff,  who  is 
Lt.  Col.  Miley,  at  a  quarter  of  eight  in  the  morning  of 
this  day.  You  propose  that  your  division  shall  make  a 
vigorous  attack  upon  the  enemy,  and  that  you  will  break 
through  his  outpost  line.  Your  intention  is  to  go  on 
through  with  all  speed  to  Gettysburg.  You  are  going 
to  be  near  the  Plank  Farm  when  this  is  happening.  The 
two  troops  of  cavalry  who  are  now  with  your  advance 
guard,  or  really  have  just  been  with  your  advance  guard, 
are  going  to  continue  covering  your  left  flank  as  they  have 
been  doing.  The  3d  Brigade  will  march  from  near  the 
I.  P.  Plank  Farm,  and  it  will  proceed  north  on  the  road 
which  runs  north  from  that  farm.  Now,  it  will  keep 
going  on  that  road  until  it  gets  to  the  woods  and  then  it 
will  advance  to  the  northwest  of  the  railroad,  and  go 


English  of  Military  Communicatioru  01 

against  the  enemj.  The  2d  Brigade  and  Engineer  Bat- 
talion are  going  to  make  up  the  reserve.  They  are  going 
to  be  under  your  orders  directly,  and  they,  in  order  to 
make  this  attack  successful  will  take  a  position  somewhere 
under  cover  northwest  of  Granite  Hill.  Colonel  Field  of 
your  cavalry  will  cover  your  right  flank  with  those  of  his 
regiment  who  are  not  covering  the  left.  He  ought  to  as- 
semble his  main  body  right  now  somewhere  on  the  Harris- 
burg  road.  You  are  writing  this  7th  field  order  since  the 
first  of  the  year  at  a  quarter  to  eight  in  the  morning  when 
information  from  oflScers'  patrols  comes  in  that  there  is 
only  one  division  of  the  enemy  in  Gettysburg,  and  that  he 
has  lost  heavily  by  casualties  in  the  fight  you  have  had 
with  it  the  day  before.  You  learn  also  at  the  same  time 
that  there  is  an  outpost  line  of  the  enemy,  which  is  ex- 
tending from  Body  School  House  to  McAllister  HiU. 
This  outpost  line  crosses  the  road  you  are  on  and  your 
troops  are  on,  at  Hill  618;  you  find  out  also  that  Wolff 
Hill  is  fuU  of  the  enemy.  The  artillery  of  your  command 
you  figure  ought  to  take  up  some  position  to  the  west  of 
Granite  Hill,  and  that  it  should  open  fire  on  the  enemy  as 
soon  as  the  enemy  has  been  discovered.  The  Signal  Com- 
pany should  connect  you  and  your  headquarters  with  all 
of  the  commanders  of  the  first,  third,  and  artillery  Bri- 
gades. You  send  copies  of  all  these  orders  by  Lieut. 
Knight  to  your  four  brigade  commanders,  and  also  to  the 
officers  in  charge  of  the  first  section  of  your  train;  you 
read  it  off  to  your  staff,  and  you  send  a  copy  by  an  orderly 
to  the  second  section  of  your  train.  Your  ambulance  com- 
panies are  going  to  park  near  the  right  fork  of  617,  and 
you  are  going  to  camp  east  of  this  fork,  which  is  northeast 
of  Granite  Hill.  You  want  the  first  sections  of  your 
trains  to  go  and  park  at  Guldens,  and  you  want  the  second 
section  not  to  budge  from  where  it  is  now  stationed.    Your 


92  English  of  Military  Communications 

first  brigade  should  continue  its  advance  along  the  road 
you  are  on,  and  when  it  becomes  necessary  finally  to  de- 
ploy, they  should  deploy  across  this  road.  After  they  have 
deployed  they  ought  to  take  up  the  attack  at  once  and  go 
forward  with  Hill  618  as  their  objective.  There  are  about 
a  thousand  of  your  troops,  you  learn,  who  are  wounded 
in  Gettysburg ;  then,  too,  there  are  many  wounded  who  are 
now  held  as  prisoners  of  war  in  Gettysburg  where  a  divi- 
sion of  the  enemy  is  stationed,  and  where  it  has  lost 
heavily. 


CHAPTER  VIII 

MORE  PROBLEMS   OF  THE   COMPOSI- 
TION OF  THE  FIELD  ORDER 

(3)     Order  for  Position  in  Readiness 

1. — You  are  Major  General  Tuttill  in  command  of  the 
10th  Division  of  the  3d  Corps,  which  is  at  Taney  town. 
On  June  3,  1952,  your  division  has  been  designated  to  keep 
a  certain  force  of  the  enemy  out  of  a  battle  which  is  going 
to  take  place  with  your  whole  army.  This  hostile  force  is 
directly  in  your  front.  You  determine  therefore  to  take 
up  a  position  in  readiness  on  the  south  side  of  Pipe  Creek. 
You  have  been  encamped  with  the  outpost.  You  want  this 
outpost  and  the  cavalry  which  is  attached  to  your  com- 
mand, to  watch  out  for  the  retirement  of  your  whole  di- 
vision to  this  position  in  readiness.  After  that,  this  whole 
outpost  is  to  withdraw  to  Keymar.  They  are  to  get  to 
Keymar  by  going  over  the  road  through  Bruceville.  The 
commander  of  the  outpost  will  be  notified  when  he  will 
begin  this  withdrawal.  The  enemy,  you  have  learned,  is 
directly  in  your  front  and  has  gone  into  camp  along  Piney 
Creek  near  the  village  of  Piney  Creek  toward  the  north. 
The  third  brigade  is  to  start  at  4  o'clock  in  the  morning 
and  is  to  march  directly  to  Keymar,  and  the  artillery 
brigade,  all  but  one  battalion,  will  start  out  at  the  same 
hour  and  will  go  around  by  Otterdale  mill  and  will  go  to 
Montunion  Church.  The  first  brigade  should  march  the 
^'ery  same  hour  with  its  destination  to  be  near  the  vicinity 
of  a  small  amount  of  woods,  which  are  about  1,000  yards 
in  a  southerly  direction  from  Trevanion.  Your  army  on 
this  very  day  crossed  the  Monocacy.     During  the  ex- 


94  English  of  Military  Communications 

pedition,  they  don't  meet  with  very  much  opposition,  so 
that  they  intend  on  the  next  day  to  attack  the  main  body 
of  the  enemy  which  is  somewhere  in  the  vicinity  of  Mt. 
Ary.  Your  signal  company  should  leave  the  third  brigade. 
When  the  signal  company  gets  to  Keymar,  it  should  con- 
nect up  that  place  with  the  station  of  the  first  brigade ;  it 
should  put  in  on  this  line  a  station  for  the  artillery  bri- 
gade. In  addition,  the  signal  company  ought  to  keep  up 
a  line  of  communication  with  the  outpost  until  the  outpost 
is  withdrawn.  You,  as  the  commanding  general  of  this 
division  want  to  notify  all  your  troops  about  a  certain 
fact  which  applies  to  every  one — ^namely,  that  the  staff 
officers  should  go  along  with  the  infantry  brigade  before 
mentioned,  and  should  pick  out  and  mark  points  which 
are  to  be  entrenched.  Your  engineer  battalion  will  start 
to  march  at  the  same  hour  as  the  other  troops  mentioned 
above.  They  are  to  strike  then  across  to  Middleburg  and 
then  they  are  to  go  to  places  which  are  to  be  picked  out 
by  the  chief  of  staff,  and  when  they  get  to  those  places 
they  are  to  assist  in  the  entrenching.  You  decide  that  you 
are  going  to  go  to  Taneytown  and  stay  there  until  the  out- 
post is  withdrawn.  You  want  the  field  trains  to  start 
out  at  three  o'clock  in  the  morning,  and  these  should  go 
along  and  follow  in  the  course  which  has  been  already 
designated  for  the  respective  units  to  which  the  field  trains 
belong.  These  field  trains  are  to  cross  the  Pipe  Creek 
and  are  to  assemble  at  Woodsburg.  All  the  other  columns 
of  the  trains  will  start  out  at  the  same  hour  as  the  troops. 
The  ammunition  columns  and  the  two  field  hospitals  are 
to  halt  at  Ladysburg;  all  the  others  halt  at  Woodsburg. 
You  issue  this  order  at  10  o'clock  in  the  evening  and  you 
siam  it  yourself,  and  you  send  copies  of  this,  your  lOth 
field  order  of  the  campaign,  to  all  officers  who  come  to 
TOur  headquarters  to  receive  orderf. 


English  of  Military  Communication$  §5 

(4)     The  Defense  Okdek 

S. — ^You  are  Major  General  Standish.  You  have  ju«t 
received  word  that  the  enemy  to  which  you  are  opposed  hag 
been  very  heavily  reenforced  and  has  now  about  two  di- 
visions in  the  town  of  Taneytown.  Your  main  army  is 
not  going  to  leave  until  the  19th,  and  then  it  will  get  as 
far  as  Marshall  probably.  You  are  in  command  of  the 
21st  division  of  the  8th  corps,  and  you  are  south  of  Em- 
mitsburg  on  the  17th  day  of  May,  1945.  You  decide  that 
you  can't  do  anything  else  but  take  up  a  defensive  posi- 
tion. You  accordingly  want  to  make  your  division  occupy 
a  position  extending  from  McKee  Knob  to  the  northeast. 
You  want  the  second  brigade,  which  is  going  to  be  reen- 
forced by  the  first  cavalry  and  also  by  the  2d  battalion,  1st 
field  artillery  to  cover  this  movement,  to  take  up  a  de- 
fensive position.  General  Calhoun  of  the  second  brigade 
has  to  put  in  place  of  the  infantry  of  his  brigade  on  the 
southern  line  of  outpost,  certain  cavalry  patrols.  These 
cavalry  patrols  will  come  from  two  corps  which  have  been 
sent  to  General  Calhoun,  or  at  least  have  been  ordered  to 
report  to  him  at  Motters  at  one  o'clock  in  the  morning. 
General  Calhoun  should  relieve  the  outpost  of  the  third 
brigade  at  two  o'clock  in  the  morning,  and  of  the  first  at 
three  o'clock  in  the  morning.  The  first  brigade,  after  its 
outpost  is  relieved,  should  immediately  take  up  the  march, 
going  up  the  road  which  runs  through  Emmitsburg  and 
Liberty  Hall  School  House.  It  should  halt  when  it  gets 
northeast  of  656.  General  Calhoun  has  to  be  placed  in 
command  in  order  to  carry  out  his  part  of  the  situation  as 
to  certain  other  troops — in  fact,  the  2d  battalion  of  the 
1st  field  artillery,  and  the  1st  cavalry,  should  now  become 
a  part  of  his  command.  The  2d  battalion  of  the  1st  field 
artillery  is  at  the  northeastern  outskirts  of  the  town  of 


96  English  of  Military  Communications 

Emmitsburg,  and  the  1st  cavalry  has  its  headquarters  at 
Fairplay;  he  will  begin  to  command  these  troops  at  two 
o'clock  in  the  morning.  You  write,  at  11  o'clock  at  night, 
your  sixth  field  order  and  send  copies  by  Lieut.  Fright  to 
Generals  Byrd,  Carr,  Dale,  and  to  Colonel  Fink  and  Cap- 
tain Hervey.  You  read  the  message  off  to  your  staff  and 
report  by  telegraph  to  army  headquarters  what  you  have 
done.  You  decide  to  have  your  third  brigade,  after  this 
outpost  is  relieved,  march  by  way  of  Emmitsburg  from 
Four  Points.  Then  the  brigade  is  to  march  by  the  road 
just  east  of  McKee  Knob  to  a  position  half  a  mile  north 
of  587 ;  there  the  brigade  will  halt.  General  Calhoun 
should  delay  the  crossing  of  the  river  by  the  enemy.  He 
should  do  this  as  much  as  he  is  able,  but  he  should  not  be- 
come too  closely  engaged  with  the  enemy.  You  decide  that 
you  will  be  at  Emmitsburg  until  after  5  o'clock  in  the 
morning ;  then  you  are  going  to  be  at  Liberty  Hall  School 
House.  The  signal  company  will  take  up  what  lines  it  has 
laid  down  after  two  o'clock  in  the  morning.  Then  one- 
half  of  the  company  will  report  to  Brigadier  General  Cal- 
houn, and  the  remainder  of  the  signal  company  will 
proceed  to  join  the  3d  brigade.  You  want  your  entire 
command  to  know  that  there  is  to  be  on  no  occasion  any  un- 
necessary noise  and  that  this  noise  is  to  be  avoided  at  all 
hazards.  You  do  not  wish  a  bugle  call  to  be  sounded  be- 
fore the  sun  rises. 

3. — On  the  4th  of  June,  1964,  you  are  Major  General 
Boswell  in  command  of  the  first  division  of  the  fourth  armji 
corps.  Your  division  is  west  of  Gettysburg.  You  hear 
that  the  enemy  in  your  front  is  at  Cashtown  and  has  been 
heavily  reenforced.  The  troops  for  these  reenforcements 
have  come  from  his  main  army.  This  gives  you  the  idea 
that  you  had  better  take  up  a  defensive  position ;  you  had 
better  take  up  this  position  astride  the  road  which  you 


English  of  Military  Communications  97 

now  are  on  and  you  must  hold  this  position  throughout  the 
day.  Your  third  brigade  should  start  right  away  to  make 
preparations  for  the  defense.  They  should  take  up  a  line 
in  their  defense  preparations  extending  from  somewhere 
east  of  Seven  Stars,  and  should  continue  this  line  to  the 
southwest  for  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile.  The  first 
cavalry  should  send  two  platoons  to  report  to  the  Major 
who  commands  the  engineer  battalion  near  Moonsburg. 
These  should  be  sent  if  the  enemy  advance  in  force,  and 
they  should  be  sent  with  the  patrol  on  your  right  flank. 
The  main  body  of  this  cavalry  should  patrol  the  left  of 
your  line  to  cover  it.  The  2d  brigade  will  prepare  for  de- 
fense a  line  extending  from  near  Seven  Stars  northwest. 
It  should  extend  this  line  until  it  reaches  the  farm  road 
which  crosses  the  ridge.  The  1st  brigade  will  be  the 
reserve.  They  are  going  to  be  under  your  direct  orders; 
they  should  therefore  remain  midway  between  Knoxburg 
and  597.  There  is  a  road  fork  there  where  they  should 
stay.  The  engineer  battalion  will  go  at  once  and  prepare 
the  high  ground  southwest  of  Moonsburg  for  defense,  and 
in  this  defense  which  they  will  make  at  this  point,  they  are 
to  act  as  a  right  flank  guard.  The  ambulance  companies 
will  be  held  near  the  north  end  of  Herr  Ridge.  You  have 
a  second  field  hospital  which  you  have  established  at 
Gettysburg  and  you  want  it  to  stay  there.  You  want  your 
first,  third,  and  fourth  field  hospitals  at  the  western  out- 
skirts of  Gettysburg.  You  want  these  first,  third,  and 
fourth  field  hospitals  to  assemble  by  the  road  somewhere 
there.  Company  A  of  your  signal  corps  you  decide  to 
have  lay  certain  lines.  All  these  lines  should  go  from  the 
position  of  the  reserve  to  the  second  field  artillery,  and 
on  this  line  there  should  be  a  station  so  that  the  com- 
mander of  the  second  brigade  could  cut  in,  and  then  Com- 
pany A  also  should  lay  a  line  from  the  first  field  artillery 


98  Englith  of  Military  Communications 

to  the  reserve.  On  this  line  also,  the  commander  of  the 
third  brigade  should  have  a  station  where  he  can  go.  The 
signal  company  also  ought  to  arrange  to  have  receiving 
stations  for  flag  signals  for  the  engineer  battalion,  and 
ought  to  do  the  same  thing  for  the  cavalry  on  the  left 
flank.  Two  wagon  companies  of  small  arms  ammunition 
should  be  held  near  585,  and  another  wagon  company  of 
artillery  ammunition  near  687.  You  are  going  to  be 
at  Division  Headquarters  at  597.  Your  second  field 
artillery  should  set  out  at  once  to  the  road  leading  south- 
west about  half  a  mile  from  Moonsburg;  it  should  move 
around  the  Moonsburg  road  to  do  this.  It  should  then 
go  by  this  road,  which  leads  southwest,  to  an  intersection 
of  that  road  to  the  next  farm  road.  The  Colonel  of  the 
second  field  artillery  should  prepare  a  position  in  this 
vicinity  which  would  be  capable  of  supporting  the  entire 
line  of  defense  when  this  line  was  attacked.  The  first  field 
artillery  should  go  about  half  a  mile  south  of  this  camp; 
it  should  proceed  around  by  the  road  parallel  to  the 
Chambersburg  road,  and  should  go  as  far  as  a  point  one 
mile  south  of  Seven  Stars.  When  it  gets  there  it  should 
select  and  prepare  a  position  to  support  the  defense.  You 
want  all  the  other  trains  which  you  have  not  mentioned 
not  to  move  out  from  where  they  are,  but  want  them  to  be 
ready  to  move  in  any  direction  at  your  command.  You 
know  that  your  main  army  is  going  to  attack  the  weaker 
hostile  force,  which  is  in  its  front,  on  the  very  morning 
your  order  is  issued.  You  also  know  that  if  your  own 
army  is  successful  in  this  attack,  it  will  send  you  later 
some  reenforcements  if  you  really  need  them.  You  write 
this  order  at  twenty  minutes  of  five  in  the  morning.  You 
send  copies  of  this,  your  sixth  field  order,  since  the  begin- 
ning of  the  campaign,  to  all  officers  who  have  been  sent 
under  vour  order  to  receive  them. 


Englith  of  Military  Communications  99 

(6)  Reteeat  Ordee 
4. — On  May  the  2d,  1919,  at  4  a.  m.,  you  wish  copies 
of  this  your  12th  field  order  since  the  beginning  of  the 
year  sent  to  the  commanders  of  the  first  brigade,  the 
artillery  brigade,  and  the  10th  cavalry  by  Lieut.  Alber; 
to  the  commanders  of  the  second  brigade,  the  engineer 
battalion,  the  signal  company,  and  the  chief  surgeon  by 
Captain  Cutts ;  to  the  commander  of  the  third  brigade,  and 
to  Major  Quincy  by  Sgt.  Donohue.  Your  name  is  Major 
General  Slump.  You  are  in  command  of  the  second  di- 
vision of  the  third  army  corps.  Your  division  is  at  Platte 
City,  Missouri.  There  are  two  divisions  of  the  enemy  who 
are  coming  down  against  Platte  City  from  the  north. 
You  know  this  to  be  reliable  information,  and  you  know, 
also,  that  one  division  of  the  enemy  went  into  camp  last 
night  before  you  found  out  that  the  outposts  of  that  di- 
vision were  six  miles  north  of  Tracy  on  the  road  that  runs 
through  Tracy  and  Severn.  The  other  division,  you  know, 
camped  six  miles  further  to  the  north.  You  give,  in  your 
order,  the  direction  that  the  first  brigade  is  to  take  up  a 
position  on  the  west  end  of  the  farm  road  which  runs  west 
from  Nile.  You  want  this  brigade  to  be  prepared  to  make 
all  sorts  of  resistance — in  fact,  you  want  it  to  delay  the 
enemy's  advance,  and  to  hold  this  position  until  you  order 
it  to  retire  further.  You  decide  really  that  your  whole 
division  should  go  into  a  position  west  of  the  Platte  river. 
Your  idea  is  that  it  should  hold  back  the  enemy  there,  and 
should  hold  it  back  sufficiently  until  the  trains  can  be 
withdrawn.  When  the  trains  are  all  withdrawn,  then  you 
ought  to  be  able  to  make  an  orderly  retreat  in  the  general 
direction  of  the  Nile.  At  the  crack  of  dawn  the  next 
day,  you  figure  that  the  cavalry  ought  to  begin  going 
out  and  looking  for  the  enemy  with  all  possible  speed  and 
vigilance.     And  then,  too,  you  think  that  the  cavalry 


100  English  of  Military  Communications 

ought  to  look  out  especially  for  your  left  flank.  Your 
second  brigade  should  start  out  at  ten  minutes  to  five  the 
next  morning.  It  should  go  to  "E"  and  should  close  up 
off  the  road  near  "E,"  and  should  march  by  the  B-D  road. 
This  brigade  is  to  be  the  second  line  and  it  should  take  up 
such  a  position  and  be  in  such  a  state  as  to  hold  back  any 
movement  of  the  enemy  which  should  come  in  this  direction. 
If  it  is  going  to  be  necessary,  this  second  brigade  ought  to 
cover  the  troops  of  the  first  line  who  are  withdrawing.  The 
engineer  battalion  should  be  ready  to  march  out  at  half 
past  four ;  it  ought  to  follow  immediately  behind  the  artil- 
lery brigade  until  the  engineer  battalion  gets  somewhere  be- 
yond Tracy.  The  signal  company  will  be  ready  to  march 
at  twenty-five  minutes  of  five  and  to  follow  the  battalion  of 
engineers  until  the  signal  company  gets  to  the  southeast 
corner  of  Tracy.  The  advance  should  move  out  in  this 
way:  the  supply  trains,  the  ammunition  columns,  the 
bridge  train,  and  the  field  hospital  will  march  at  a  quarter 
of  four  and  they  should  march  toward  Leavenworth. 
They  should  go  by  the  road  that  runs  two  miles  east  of 
Platte  City  through  56  and  54.  The  field  train  of  the 
first  brigade  will  clear  "15"  at  4  o'clock.  The  field  train 
of  the  second  brigade,  the  engineer  battalion,  the  signal 
company,  ambulance  companies,  and  division  headquar- 
ters, in  the  order  named,  will  move  out  toward  56  at  half 
past  five  in  the  morning.  These  trains  just  enumerated 
will  follow  the  division  trains.  The  bfigorage  of  the  third 
brigade,  and  the  artillery  brigade  will  proceed  to  Leaven- 
worth and  will  go  by  the  road  which  runs  through  56  and 
54.  The  bagffasre  will  go  anv  prescribed  distance  as  far 
as  50;  during  this  move  it  will  follow  the  third  brigade. 
You  want  Maior  Quincy  to  be  put  in  charge  of  all  the 
division  trains — ^V  fact,  you  want  him  to  be  put  in  charge 
of  all  the  trains  that  join  his  column,  and  you  want  him 


English  of  Military  Communications  101 

to  regulate  the  march.  You  want  messages  sent  to  you 
between  five  o'clock  in  the  morning  and  the  time  of  the 
withdrawal  of  the  first  line  to  the  small  orchard  which  is 
between  13  and  15.  After  that  time  you  want  messages 
sent  to  you  at  "12."  One  section  of  your  artillery  ammuni- 
tion, and  one  section  of  your  small  arms  ammunition  are 
to  be  at  a  point  between  50  and  52  at  six  o'clock  in  the 
morning.  All  the  other  sections  of  the  ammunition  column 
will  be  on  the  road  between  Alexander  and  "50"  after  one 
o'clock  in  the  morning.  The  ambulance  companies  will 
march  at  5 :30  a.  m.,  and  park  by  the  road  near  "B."  The 
road  fork  at  "14"  will  be  the  collecting  station  for  the 
slightly  wounded.  The  artillery  brigade  will  get  into  posi- 
tion as  follows :  one  regiment  about  one  mile  north  of  "15," 
the  other  somewhere  near  a  mile  north  on  the  road  1,100 
yards  northwest  of  13.  The  artillery  command  should 
open  fire  as  soon  as  the  enemy  is  seen  anywhere,  or,  in  any 
strength,  at  any  time. 

(6)  PuESUiT  Oeder 
5. — ^You  are  Major  General  Jervey  in  command  of  the 
12th  division  6th  corps.  You  have  just  defeated  the 
enemy,  and  you  have  defeated  him  so  badly  that  he  is  re- 
treating in  great  disorder  in  the  direction  of  Gettysburg. 
You  are  near  Cashtown  when  you  issue  your  12th  field 
order  of  the  campaign.  It  is  twenty  minutes  to  four  in 
the  afternoon,  June  12,  1925,  when  you  issue  to  your 
brigade  commanders,  and  to  Lt.  Col.  Miles,  Colonel  Forse, 
Major  Good,  and  Captain  Harrow  copies  of  your  order. 
You  decide  to  pursue  the  enemy  without  any  delay.  You 
want  your  second  brigade,  which  is  now  without  the  6th 
infantry  which  ordinarily  belongs  to  that  brigade,  to  re- 
form itself,  and  you  want  the  second  brigade  at  half  past 
four  to  follow  the  third  brigade  in  the  general  direction 


10^  Englith  of  Military  Communication* 

of  Gettysburg.  The  third  brigade,  which  is  under  the 
command  of  Brigadier  General  Dunn,  you  think  ought  to 
advance  at  once.  You  are  going  to  reenforce  it,  however, 
with  the  second  infantry,  the  second  field  artillery,  and  the 
filrst  cavalry.  The  third  brigade  ought,  by  all  reasonable 
surmise,  to  drive  the  enemy  inside  of  Gettysburg  or  even 
beyond  Gettysburg.  After  the  third  brigade  with  this  re- 
enforcement  has  done  so,  it  ought  to  seize  the  whole  of  the 
McPherson  Ridge  and  hold  it.  Two  companies  from  the 
second  brigade  ought  to  be  detailed  to  report  to  the  divi- 
sion surgeon  there.  They  should  assist  him  in  poUcing 
all  the  field.  You  are  going  to  be  at  Seven  Stars  as  soon 
as  you  can  get  there  and  you  are  going  to  start  at  five 
o'clock.  All  but  one  squadron  of  the  first  cavalry  will 
move  out  by  the  north  of  Gettysburg.  You  plan  that  it 
shall  be  the  first  cavalry's  object  to  interrupt  communica- 
tion and  delay  traffic  on  the  railroad  there,  and  then  it 
ought  to  reconnoiter  in  the  general  direction  of  the  east. 
The  first  brigade  you  think  ought  to  follow  the  first  field 
artillery.  The  first  brigade  you  figure  should  select  two 
companies  from  its  organization  and  detail  them  to  report 
to  the  division  surgeon.  Those  two  companies  should 
assist  in  policing  all  the  battle  field.  The  first  field  artil- 
lery will  follow  the  second  brigade:  this  regiment  should 
detail  an  officer  and  thirty  men,  and  this  officer  and  thirty 
men  ought  to  do  the  same  thing  as  the  two  companies 
from  the  first  brigade  were  detailed  to  do.  The  division 
will  have  entire  charge  of  the  policing  of  the  field.  A 
field  hospital  ought  to  be  established  at  Cashtown.  Cars 
will  be  available  for  the  division  surgeon  by  five  o'clock  at 
Ortanna.  The  evacuation  of  the  wounded,  therefore, 
should  be  through  Ortanna.  The  whole  of  the  first  bat- 
talion of  engineers  will  report  to  the  division  surgeon  and 
go  under  his  orders. 


English  of  Military  Communication*  103 

(7)       tLLLT    O&DES 

6. — You  are  Brigadier  General  Short;  you  are  in  com- 
mand of  a  detachment  from  the  first  division.  You  have 
just  decided  that  jour  whole  command  should  go  into 
camp  for  the  whole  night.  Your  command  is  at  Bonny- 
ville.  You  want  to  let  your  troops  know  that  your  cavalry 
has  come  in  contact  with  hostile  cavalry,  and  that  this 
attack  was  made  near  Whitehall.  About  an  hour  after 
the  issue  of  your  message  your  cavalry  drove  back  the 
hostile  cavalry  toward  Littlestown.  You  want  the  second 
infantry  to  camp  in  a  field  southwest  of  the  town  in  which 
your  division  is  now  located.  You  want  your  first  bat- 
taUon  of  your  fourth  artillery  to  camp  in  a  field  north- 
west of  the  same  town.  You  understand  from  a  patrol 
which  has  just  reported  to  you,  that  at  noon  a  column  of 
the  enemy  was  on  the  march  going  west,  and  that  at  that 
time  the  advance  guard  of  this  column  of  the  enemy  was 
at  Center  School  House.  You  decide  to  place  the  first 
infantry  in  a  camp  northwest  of  Sweet  Home  School 
House.  There  this  first  infantry  is  to  establish  an  out- 
post. The  outpost  is  to  extend  from  Hill  627  on  the 
north,  along  through  St.  Luke's  Church  up  into  a  place 
called  Coshun.  You  want  to  notify  the  first  infantry  of 
your  command,  that  in  case  it  is  attacked,  the  line  which 
has  just  been  designated  will  be  the  one  to  be  held.  Your 
third  infantry  you  want  to  have  camp  in  a  field  north  of 
the  town  in  which  you  are.  You  want  your  field  trains  to 
join  their  organizations;  that  is,  the  organization  to  which 
they  ordinarily  belong,  and  you  want  this  done  right  away. 
You  yourself  at  your  own  headquarters  are  going  to  camp 
where  the  main  street  comes  out  of  the  western  end  of 
this  town  at  which  you  are  located.  At  one  o'clock  in  the 
afternoon  of  June  2,  1930,  you  deliver  this  order  verbally 
to  your  advance  guard  commander,  to  all  your  columns 


104  English  of  Military  Communicationg 

of  infantry,  to  your  artillery  commander,  and  all  your 
stall' ;  you  send  one  of  your  aides  with  a  copy  of  the  order 
to  Major  Kline  of  the  fifth  cavalry,  Captain  Quigley  who 
is  in  charge  of  the  train,  and  to  Captain  Supple  of  the 
signal  corps.  This  is  the  7th  field  order  you  have  written 
in  this  campaign.  Signal  Company  A  is  to  be  camped 
west  of  the  second  infantry,  and  the  first  ambulance  com- 
pany is  to  be  near  the  signal  company.  All  the  ammuni- 
tion companies  are  to  be  camped  near  the  farm  house 
called  Lawrence.  The  first  squadron  of  the  5th  cavah-y 
ought,  you  figure,  to  camp  somewhere  near  and  west  of 
the  artillery. 

7. — The  enemy  has  been  retreating ;  he  is  continuing  his 
retreat.  Your  troops  know  that  he  has  been  retreating, 
but  they  do  not  know  that  he  is  continuing  his  retreat.  In 
fact,  he  is  retreating  in  great  disorder.  He  is  retreating 
in  such  great  disorder  that  he  is  offering  no  show  of 
resistance  to  any  of  your  troops  who  are  pursuing  him. 
You  are  Major  General  Plight  in  command  of  the  first 
division  of  the  first  army  corps.  You  are  on  the  Balti- 
more Turnpike  near  White  Run.  You  decide  to  have 
your  advance  guard  camp  north  of  Two  Taverns  and  to 
establish  an  outpost  line.  They  are  to  have  a  line  of 
observation  and  keep  on  the  alert  on  that  line  of  observa- 
tion which  will  extend  from  Bonny ville  through  German- 
town  to  the  cross  roads  at  568.  The  first  brigade  will 
come  between  the  two  branches  of  White  Run,  which  are 
north  of  the  road  just  mentioned.  The  artillery  brigade, 
with  one  battalion  gone,  will  camp  along  the  road  which 
runs  through  the  western  branch  of  White  Run.  The  am- 
bulance companies,  you  figure,  should  camp  south  on  the 
road  just  mentioned  and  west  of  White  Run.  Your  di- 
vision headquarters  you  decide  to  have  placed  west  of  the 
farm  house.    This  farm  house  is  located  west  of  where  the 


Englith  of  Military  Communicationt  105 

road  you  are  on  crosses  over  Rock  Creek.  You  wish  to 
tell  jour  commuud  that  orders  will  be  issued  from  these 
headquarters  at  nine  o'clock.  Your  whole  command,  you 
decide,  should  halt  for  the  whole  night.  Your  second 
brigade  should  camp  j  ust  north  of  the  road  where  you  are 
located,  and  just  west  of  a  road  known  by  the  name  of  Low 
Dutch.  This  2d  brigade  should  have  a  detached  post 
which  it  will  detail  for  outpost  duty.  Such  a  post  should 
be  in  observation  of  the  cross  roads  at  580.  This  cross 
roads  is  just  west  of  the  Mt.  Vernon  School  House.  The 
engineer  battalion  should  camp  south  of  the  road  you  are 
on  and  east  of  White  Run.  The  signal  company  should 
camp  at  a  spot  where  the  road  you  are  on  goes  across 
Rock  Creek.  You  want  the  signal  company  to  lay  a  wire 
from  there  to  the  outpost,  and  you  want  the  signal  com- 
pany to  have  a  station  on  this  wire  or  line  at  a  place  in- 
dicated by  489.  You  want  your  outpost  to  know  that  if 
they  are  attacked  they  will  be  supported  by  you.  You 
give  copies  of  this  order  to  the  officers  who  are  sent  from 
the  various  commands  to  get  the  orders.  You  issue  the 
order  at  a  quarter  after  two  in  the  afternoon  of  June  2, 
1935.  They  are  the  77th  field  orders  you  have  issued  in 
this  campaign.  Your  field  trains  ought  to  join  their 
commands  right  off.  You  want  the  remaining  trains  to 
go  into  park  on  the  main  battlefield  of  Gettysburg.  You 
decide  that  issues  of  supplies  will  be  best  made  from  the 
supply  column  and  that  these  issues  should  be  made  at 
half  past  five  in  the  morning.  The  place  you  decide  from 
which  such  issues  should  be  made  is  523.  Your  supply 
wagons,  which  have  been  emptied,  ought  to  proceed  to 
Ortanna  for  the  night.  There  they  should  fill  up  with 
supplies  and  come  back  and  join  early  the  next  day. 


106  English  of  Military  Communications 

(8)  The  Outpost  OacEa 
8. — You  are  Colonel  iluke  of  the  99th  infantry,  and 
you  are  located  near  Bonnyville.  You  decide  to  establish 
an  outpost,  and  you  decide  that  your  regiment  should  go 
into  camp  in  the  vicinity  of  Sweet  Home  School  House. 
The  outpost  should  extend  from  Hill  627  at  the  northern 
extremity,  and  then  go  on  through  St.  Luke's  Church,  and 
should  extend  to  the  right  fork  at  587  at  its  southern 
extremity.  This  road  fork  at  587  is  south  of  the  Coshun 
place.  You  want  the  line  of  support  to  be  held  if  you 
are  attacked.  Your  line  of  support  will  be  at  one,  two, 
three,  four,  and  five,  in  order.  Your  support  No.  1  will 
take  a  position  near  the  road  fork  at  587,  about  a  mile 
southwest  of  Bonnyville.  This  support  will  cover  the 
sector  from  the  stream  on  the  west  to  the  first  stream  on 
its  east  both  inclusive.  Frequent  patrols  will  be  made  to 
the  Baltimore  Turnpike.  You  issue  this,  your  first  field 
order,  at  half  past  one  on  the  afternoon  of  June  2,  1950. 
You  dehver  this  order  in  person  by  reading  it  after  you 
have  assembled  all  your  field  officers,  your  staff  oflficers, 
and  your  company  commanders.  You  decide  that  you 
will  be  at  the  Sweet  Home  School  House  during  the  con- 
tinuation of  the  outpost.  Your  cavalry  on  this  very  day 
came  in  contact  with  some  cavalry  of  the  enemy.  About 
noon  at  Whitehall  this  occurrence  took  place.  There  your 
cavalry  drove  back  the  enemy's  cavalry  toward  Littles- 
town.  From  reliable  patrols  you  get  a  report  that  at 
noon,  the  very  same  time  that  this  occurrence  took  place,  a 
large  column  of  the  enemy  was  seen  to  be  coming  west. 
The  head  of  the  advance  guard  of  this  platoon  of  the 
enemy  was  then  at  Center  School  House.  Your  Support 
No.  1,  in  command  of  Captain  Link,  will  consist  of  Com- 
pany G  and  four  mounted  scouts.  Support  No.  3,  you 
decide  to  go  into  a  position  near  St.  Luke's  Church.     It 


Englith  of  Military  Communication*  107 

ought  to  be  responsible  for  the  sector  of  ground  which 
you  designate  to  extend  from  the  stream  about  500  yards 
south  of  St.  Luke's  Church,  on  to  a  farm  house  1,000 
yards  northeast  from  a  point  500  yards  south  of  St. 
Luke's  Church.  You  wish  to  include  both  these  extremi- 
ties in  the  sector  of  Support  No.  3.  Support  No.  3  ought 
to  patrol  the  road  which  runs  past  Whitehall  School 
House.  The  reserve  ought  to  camp  near  the  Sweet  Home 
School  House.  Support  No.  5  should  take  a  position  on 
the  north  slope  Hill  627 ;  the  duty  of  Support  No.  5  ought 
to  consist  of  connecting  with  Support  No.  3,  and  of  cover- 
ing by  their  observations  the  road  forks  of  601  and  598. 
Support  No.  5  will  consist  of  2d  Lieut.  Prince  and  the 
first  section  of  Company  I.  Support  No.  4  should  go 
and  take  a  position  at  a  point  on  the  Hanover  road.  This 
point  is  the  place  where  the  Hanover  road  joins  with  the 
Bihl  farm  road.  Support  No.  4  will  cover  the  ground 
around  Support  No.  3,  and  the  road  fork  at  597.  This 
road  fork  is  north  of  Square'  Corners.  Support  No.  4 
will  include  in  its  observations  the  points  mentioned  as  the 
extremities  of  this  section.  Support  No.  2  should  take 
a  position  somewhere  near  the  road  fork  of  617;  this  road 
fork  is  just  about  a  mile  and  a  quarter  south  of  the  camp 
where  you  are.  Support  No.  2  should  cover  the  territory 
which  is  included  in  the  ground  around  the  stream,  which 
is  west  on  the  road  for  617,  to  a  point  500  yards  east  of 
this  road  fork.  The  reserve  should  consist  of  the  first  in- 
fantry, of  which  five  companies  will  already  have  been 
taken  out,  and  also  fourteen  scouts.  You  want  the  wagons 
of  the  field  trains  to  go  ahead  right  away  and  join  the 
organizations  to  which  they  ordinarily  belong.  Support 
No.  3  is  to  be  under  the  command  of  Captain  Nutt,  and  is 
to  consist  of  Company  H  and  six  mounted  scouts.  Those 
wagons  of  the  field  trains,  which  belong  to  the  companies 


108  English  of  Military  Communications 

in  support,  will  join  the  wagons  of  the  regimental  head- 
quarters ;  they  will  do  this  by  eight  o'clock  in  the  evening. 
Support  No.  3,  under  the  command  of  Captain  Nelson, 
will  consist  of  Company  I,  excepting  the  first  section,  and 
two  mounted  orderlies.  Support  No.  2,  under  the  com- 
mand of  Major  King,  will  consist  of  the  second  battalion, 
all  except  Companies  G  and  H  and  will  also  consist  of 
four  mounted  scouts.  You  want  to  tell  your  troops  that 
your  brigade  to  which  your  regiment  belongs  is  about  to 
go  into  camp  in  the  vicinity  of  Bonnyville. 

March  Obders  with  Advance  and  Rear  Guard 
9. — On  the  4th  of  September,  1956,  you  are  Major 
Britton.  You  are  in  command  of  the  fourth  division  of 
the  19th  army  corps  and  you  are  about  to  issue  an  order 
which  will  keep  your  division  on  the  march  on  the  next 
morning;  you  have  been  marching.  At  10  o'clock  at  night 
you  issue  your  order  near  Abbottstown,  stating  that  you 
yourself  are  going  to  be  at  the  head  of  your  main  body. 
You  feel  that  you  should  march  in  the  general  direction  of 
York  on  the  next  day.  Your  main  body  in  this  order  of 
march  will  consist  of  the  first  infantry,  of  the  second  bat- 
talion of  the  8th  field  artillery,  of  the  third  brigade,  of 
signal  company  "D,"  and  of  the  four  ambulance  com- 
panies. Your  main  body  should  move  out  so  as  to  come 
along  behind  the  advance  guard,  so  that  the  tail  of  the 
advance  guard  will  be  1,000  yards  ahead  of  the  head  of 
the  main  body  itself.  Wagon  trains  should  move  out  so 
that  they  in  turn  will  come  along  behind  the  main  body, 
so  that  the  head  of  the  lead  horses  will  be  1,000  yards  be- 
hind the  tail  of  the  main  body.  You  are  in  such  a  posi- 
tion between  two  large  forces  of  the  enemy  that  you  must 
have  a  rear  guard.  This  rear  guard  will  be  in  command 
of  Major  General  Huff.  It  will  consist  of  the  first  cavalry 
division,  of  the  second  brigade,  of  the  7th  field  artillery, 


English  of  Military  Communications  109 

of  the  4th  battalion  of  engineers,  and  of  the  1st,  2d,  and 
3d  ambulance  companies.  You  hear  that  the  enemy  has 
probably  been  reenforced  and  that  this  reenforcement 
probably  consists  of  a  brigade  of  cavalry.  You  also  hear, 
just  when  you  issue  this,  your  7th  field  order  of  the  cam- 
paign, that  there  are  some  hostile  infantrymen  near  York, 
say,  about  a  brigade.  The  rear  guard,  you  figure,  ought 
indeed  to  keep  the  enemy  in  check.  A  rear  guard  of  this 
nature  ought  to  resist  any  advancement  on  the  part  of 
the  enemy  until  your  advance  guard  can  open  a  road 
through  York.  The  first  cavalry  division,  you  have 
knowledge,  is  bivouacking  near  where  you  are.  It  has, 
indeed,  reported  for  duty  in  connection  with  the  work  of 
the  division.  , 

The  idea  of  the  last  two  chapters  has  been  to  put  a 
jumbled  military  decision  into  good  working  form.  The 
object  has  not  been  to  salve  tactical  problems,  but  rather 
to  put  the  ideas  correctly  expressed  into  their  logical 
places. 


CHAPTER  IX 
THE  VERBAL  FIELD  ORDER 

"The  initial  combat  orders  of  a  division  are  almost 
invariably  written;  those  of  the  brigade  are  generally  so. 
The  written  order  is  preferable  and  is  used  wherever  time 
permits.  Subsequent  orders  ai-e  likewise  written  either  as 
field  orders  or  messages."*  In  chapters  VII  and  VIII  we 
actually  practiced  the  expression  of  the  field  orders  for 
the  higher  units.  We  illustrated  to  ourselves  how  difficult 
it  was  to  express  disordered  and  straggling  thoughts  in 
the  most  direct  way.  We  did  this  work  for  two  purposes : 
first,  to  gain  facility  in  dealing  with  language,  and  sec- 
ond, to  go  through  with  a  part  of  the  mental  process  de- 
manded of  commanders  in  the  field.  We  should  have 
found  out  how  perplexing  it  is  to  put  the  new-born  deci- 
sion into  form. 

We  now  progress  in  our  development  to  a  more  difficult 
performance.  We  are  going  to  discard  our  pencil.  Just 
as  we  took  up  the  practice  of  speaking  a  field  message  after 
we  had  been  drilled  in  writing  it,  so  here  we  are  going  to 
learn  to  dictate  the  field  order  after  we  have  been  schooled 
in  composing  it. 

"The  initial  combat  orders  of  regiments  and  smaller 
units  are  given  verbally.  For  this  purpose  the  subor- 
dinates for  whom  the  orders  are  intended  are  assembled, 
if  practicable,  at  a  place  from  which  the  situation  and 
plan  can  be  explained.  Subsequent  orders  are  verbal  or 
are  in  the  form  of  verbal  or  written  messages."f  The  ver- 
bal field  order,  then,  may  be  divided  into  two  classes : 

♦Infantry  Drill  Reg.  par.  378. 
t  Infantry  Drill  Reg.  par.  8T9, 


English  of  Military  Communications  111 

(1)  The  initial  combat  order. 

(2)  The  subsequent  order,  in  the  form  of  a  field  mes- 
sage. 

Number  1  follows  implicitly  the  sequence  of  the  body  of 
the  written  field  order.  Number  2  follows  the  form  of  the 
written  or  verbal  message. 

What  really  happens  in  action  is  this.  A  regiment  or 
battalion  commander,  after  he  has  arrived  at  a  decision 
by  way  of  his  estimate  of  a  situation,  assembles  his  sub- 
ordinate officers.  He  recites  to  them  his  order.  He  points 
out  on  the  map  and  on  the  ground  the  various  places  to 
which  he  refers  in  his  order.  He  gives  an  opportunity, 
when  he  has  finished,  for  his  officers  to  ask  questions.  He 
then  dismisses  them. 

The  asking  of  questions  is  delaying.  It  mars  efficiency ; 
and  it  points  either  to  faulty  expression  on  the  part  of  the 
commander  or  to  inattention  on  the  part  of  his  audience. 

After  the  subordinates  have  returned  to  their  com- 
mands and  have  set  out  upon  the  accomplishment  of  the 
mission,  it  is  of  course  impossible  to  reassemble  them  dur- 
ing the  progress  of  the  engagement.  Often,  too,  the 
colonel  or  major  desires  to  issue  instructions  to  but  one  or 
two  officers  of  the  command  at  a  time.  Number  2,  there- 
fore, becomes  the  natural  means  of  communication  until 
the  conflict  is  over  or  the  situation  is  passed.  When  a  new 
situation  arises  the  commander  assembles  his  officers  as 
before,  and  the  procedure  throughout  is  repeated. 

Let  us  suppose,  now,  that  a  colonel,  faced  with  a  new 
or  changed  situation,  wishes  to  make  his  will  known  to  his 
subordinates.  When  his  officers  are  assembled  he  speaks 
as  follows: 

"It  is  reliably  reported  that  two  battalions  of  the  enemy 
are  entrenching  on  that  hill  (he  points  out  the  hill)  one 
mile  to  the  southeast  of  here.    Their  position  extends  from 


112  English  of  Military  Communications 

the  Jordan  River  to  the  Wellington  Road,  both  inclusive. 
Our  main  body  is  at  Tarrytown.  (He  points  toward 
Tarry  town  both  on  the  ground  and  map.)  We  will  attack 
at  once  enveloping  the  enemy's  left. 

The  First  Battalion  will  attack  the  hostile  trenches 
from  the  Jordan  River,  exclusive,  to  the  Darlington 
House,  exclusive.  The  Second  Battalion  will  attack  the 
hostile  trenches  from  the  Darlington  House,  inclusive,  to 
the  west,  and  will  envelop  the  enemy's  right.  The  Third 
Battalion  and  machine  gun  companies,  in  reserve,  will  fol- 
low the  Second  Battalion.  Ambulances  and  combat 
wagons  will  assemble  at  Main  Station.  Battalions  will 
maintain  semaphore  communications  with  the  reserve 
where  I  shall  be." 

The  Regimental  Adjutant  writes  down  this  order  im- 
mediately after  its  issue,  gives  it  its  proper  heading  and 
ending,  and  files  it  away.  It  thus  becomes  a  written  field 
order  and  a  part  of  the  records  of  the  regiment.  Copies 
of  it  are  sent  to  higher  commanders. 

Let  us  imagine  that  the  attack  is  well  under  way,  and 
that  the  regiment  is  holding  its  own,  but  is  not  progress- 
ing as  it  should.  The  colonel  decides  to  increase  the  size 
of  the  enveloping  body.  He  therefore  calls  a  staff  officer 
to  him  and  says : 

**Go  over  to  Major  Swift,  in  command  of  the  third 
battalion,  and  tell  him  to  send  K  and  L  Companies  to  ex- 
tend our  right.    Repeat." 

The  staff  officer  replies, — ^**I  am  to  go  to  Major  Swift, 
in  command  of  the  third  battalion  and  am  to  say  to  him 
that  the  Regimental  Commander  directs  him  to  have  K 
and  L  Companies  extend  the  right  of  our  line.'* 

We  must  notice  that  the  initial  field  order,  when  spoken, 
has  exactly  the  same  arrangement  and  brevity  of  expres- 


English  of  Military  Communicationa  118 

sion  as  when  written.  Of  course,  the  heading  and  ending 
are  omitted.  But  the  distribution  of  troops,  if  necessary 
for  small  units,  would  follow  what  would  be  paragraph  2 
in  a  written  order.  The  relation  which  exists  between  the 
verbal  and  written  message  holds  true  in  principle  for  the 
field  order. 

In  the  following  problems  read  over  the  matter  several 
times.  Put  it  in  orderly  arrangement  in  your  mind  be- 
fore you  speak.  Then  utter  it  in  the  most  brief  and  un- 
mistakable form. 

Cautions. — (1)  Onltj  oral  solutions  mil  prove  valuable 
in  working  these  problems.  The  student  should  malce 
only  such  notes  as  will  enable  him  to  carry  the  problem  in 
his  mind.  Proper  notes  would  include  the  organizations, 
their  present  situations,  etc. — things  which  an  actual  com- 
mander would  know  as  a  matter  of  course. 

(2)  Once  begun  on  the  order,  the  student  should  pay 
no  heed  to  a  false  start,  but  should  continue  to  the  end. 
It  is  better  to  remake  the  entire  order,  than  to  patch  the 
faults.  He  should  not  permit  himself  to  change  a  pre- 
vious statement,  begin  a  new  sentence  in  the  midst  of  an 
unfinished  one,  or  hesitate  wnreasonably.  He  must  take 
care  not  only  to  express  the  matter  in  proper  form,  but 
also  to  entmciate  so  distinctly  that  any  one  within  hearing 
may  understand  him. 

Intentional  rhetorical  errors  will  be  found  in  the  prob- 
lems which  follow.     Watch  for  them. 

PROBLEMS  IN  THE  VERBAL  FIELD 
ORDER 

1. — You  are  Colonel  Foote,  halted  with  your  regiment 
in  Golden ville.  You  have  previously  sent  out  Lieutenant 
lift^^ker  toward  Gettysburg  for  information.    He  has  .iust 


114  English  of  Military  Communications 

sent  you  a  message.  You  have  made  up  your  mind  from 
the  facts  in  his  message  that  you  will  march  south  at  once 
and  that  you  will  march  in  the  direction  of  Gettysburg. 
You  desire  the  first  battalion  and  the  Machine  Gun  Com- 
pany to  be  the  Advance  Guard  for  your  regiment.  The 
remainder  of  the  regiment  will  follow  the  first  battalion  in 
order  as  follows:  second  battalion,  third  battalion,  band, 
and  ambulances.  The  field  trains  are  not  to  move  out  but 
are  to  stay  behind  until  they  get  orders  from  you.  They 
are  to  remain  at  Texas.  The  message  from  Lieutenant 
Lasker  stated  that  about  a  regiment  of  the  enemy  was 
throwing  up  intrenchments  north  of  Penn  College.  The 
message  also  stated  that  about  half  of  the  regiment  of  the 
enemy  consisted  of  recruits.  You  want  the  main  body  of 
your  regiment  to  follow  the  tail  of  the  Advance  Guard  so 
that  there  will  be  a  distance  of  a  half  mile  between  the  tail 
of  the  Advance  Guard  and  the  head  of  the  main  body. 
You  want  to  notify  your  troops  where  the  Regimental 
Headquarters  will  march  so  that  the  troops  will  know 
where  to  send  messages.  You  decide  to  have  the  Head- 
quarters march  between  the  Advance  Guard  and  the  main 
body.  The  Advance  Guard  is  to  march  at  once  and  it  is 
to  proceed  south  by  way  of  the  Hamilton  Farm  and  the 
Boyd  School  House.  You  assemble  your  majors,  their 
staffs  and  your  staff,  and  you  issue  verbally  the  decision 
which  you  have  just  made.  You  issue  it  in  the  shape  of 
a  verbal  order. 

2. — ^You  are  Major  Black  in  command  of  the  Advance 
Guard  mentioned  in  the  preceding  problem.  It  is  now 
your  mission,  of  course,  to  form  the  advance  guard  and 
to  tell  your  captains  that  you  are  going  to  do  so,  and  that 
you  are  going  to  be  reinforced  by  the  machine  gun  com- 
pany. You  ought  also  to  tell  them  just  where  your  regi- 
ment is  going  to  march.  You  want  Companies  C  and  D  and 


English  of  Military  CommunicatiotiM  115 

the  machine  gun  company  to  march  in  the  order  men- 
tioned, and  they  are  to  follow  Company  B  as  soon  as  that 
company  has  got  its  distance.  Company  C  will  be  the 
company  which  is  to  regulate  the  pace.  Company  A  is  to 
go  out  and  act  as  a  left  flank  guard.  It  is  to  move  by  way 
of  the  eastern  branch  of  the  Carlisle  Road  while  it  is  on 
this  duty.  You  ought  also  to  let  your  captains  know 
all  the  information  about  the  enemy  which  has  been  given 
to  you  by  your  colonel.  You  want  Company  B  to  be  the 
advance  party;  you  want  it  to  go  ahead  of  the  remainder 
of  the  battalion  so  that  there  will  be  four  hundred  yards 
distance  between  it  and  the  main  body.  You  want  to 
attach  Lieutenant  Kay,  the  Battalion  Adjutant,  and  his 
orderly,  to  Company  B.  You  want  to  direct  the  march  of 
the  advance  party  so  that  it  will  know  where  it  is  to  go. 
You  decide  that  it  shall  go  by  the  railroad  to  the  Carlisle 
Road,  and  then  by  the  Stock  Farm,  and  on  down  to  the 
Boyd  School  House.  You  are  going  to  be  right  behind  the 
advance  on  the  march.  You  want  the  combat  wagons  to 
move  out  right  away,  and  you  want  them  to  go  by  the 
cross-roads  which  is  one-quarter  of  a  mile  west  of  Golden- 
ville,  and  then  south  on  the  Carlisle  Road,  and  finally,  to 
join  the  tail  of  Company  D  where  the  railroad  crosses  the 
road. 

3. — ^You  are  the  Company  Commander  of  Company  A 
of  the  preceding  problem.  You  call  your  officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers  together  and  you  give  them  a  verbal 
order.  You  tell  them  that  your  company  is  to  march  as 
the  flank  guard  of  the  battalion  to  which  you  belong,  and 
you  tell  them  that  the  enemy  possibly  has  about  a  regiment 
in  Gettysburg ;  at  least,  that  is  the  belief  of  the  Regimental 
Commander.  Your  regiment  is  on  its  way  to  Gettysburg. 
The  First  Battalion  and  the  machine  gun  company  is 
going  as  the  advance  guard.  You  want  to  let  your  com- 
mand  know  that  all  of  the  battalion,  except  yourselves  is 


Il6  English  of  Military  Communications 

leaving  on  the  road  to  the  west.  You  want  Lieutenant 
Johnson,  the  Second  Lieutenant  of  your  company,  and  the 
Fourth  Platoon,  to  act  as  the  advance  guard  to  the  flank 
guard,  which  is  the  duty  on  which  the  company  is  acting. 
You  want  this  platoon  to  march  by  the  country  road  east 
of  the  knoll  marked  651,  and  then  you  want  it  to  march 
along  the  east  branch  of  the  Carlisle  Road.  The  distance 
you  decide  upon  for  the  advance  guard  to  be  in  front  of 
the  main  body  is  500  yards, 

4. — ^You  are  Major  Simpson,  and  you  are  halted  with 
your  battalion  at  the  cross-roads  621,  near  Goldenville. 
Your  mission  is,  with  your  battalion,  to  act  as  outpost 
during  the  coming  night  for  your  regiment ;  you  have  the 
machine  gun  company  attached  to  you.  You  are  operat- 
ing toward  the  south.  You  want  company  C  and  one  of 
the  platoons  of  the  machine  gun  company  to  take  station 
on  the  ridge  north  of  ^he  point  where  you  are.  This  ridge 
has  the  figure  707  on  it.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  this  de- 
tachment to  secure  that  sector  between  Goldenville  and 
Five  Forks,  just  a  little  off  the  map,  about  1,500  yards 
west  of  the  Carlisle  Road.  You  want  Company  C  to  estab- 
lish communication  with  Texas  by  signals  on  this  hill,  where 
they  are  to  be  located.  If  you  are  going  to  be  attacked  on 
that  hill,  instead  of  falling  back,  you  want  them  to  hold 
the  ridge.  You  want  a  platoon  of  Company  C  to  be  sent 
over  to  Hamilton  Farm  to  act  as  a  picket  there.  You 
have  received  reports  from  Lieutenant  Finley  of  your 
command  that  there  are  no  detachments  of  the  enemy  or 
patrols  which  have  come  north  of  the  Stock  Farm  at  any 
time.  You  want  to  tell  your  captains  that  the  remainder 
of  the  outpost  is  going  into  camp  at  Texas,  and  that  the 
resriment  itself  is  moving  into  camp  just  north  of  the 
Conewacro.  Yon  want  the  rations  and  basrsrajre  of  Com- 
pany C  to  be  sent  up  to  the  company,  but  you  want  the 


English  of  Military  Communications  117 

wagons  to  be  returned  immediately  after  they  have  been 
there,  to  Texas  for  the  night. 

6. — You  are  in  command  of  Company  C  which  was  to  go 
to  Hill  707  in  the  preceding  problem.  You  want  to  notify 
your  company  what  you  are  going  to  do;  in  other  words, 
you  want  to  deliver  to  them  verbally  your  field  order. 
For  this  purpose  you  assemble  your  officers  and  non-com- 
missioned officers  and  the  lieutenant  who  is  in  charge  of 
the  machine  gun.  You  state  that  the  outguards  will  be 
posted  as  follows:  Corporal  B^o^vning,  with  his  squad  as 
No.  1,  is  to  be  posted  at  the  Five  Forks  679,  three-quar- 
ters of  a  mile  west  of  where  you  are;  Corporal  Martin, 
with  his  squad  as  No.  3,  is  to  be  posted  at  the  road-fork 
numbered  621,  which  is  on  the  Carlisle  Road;  Corporal 
Denton,  with  Privates  Noonan,  Ogden,  and  Prince  will  go 
as  No.  4.  His  post  will  be  posted  at  the  railroad  crossing 
in  Goldenville.  You,  as  Company  Commander,  deliver  the 
information  about  the  enemy  which  has  been  received 
through  your  major.  Corporal  Calhoun,  with  Johnson, 
Kelly,  and  Latham  are  to  go  as  No.  2,  and  they  are  to 
be  posted  at  the  cross-roads  648,  which  is  500  yards  west 
of  the  point  where  you  are  located — Goldenville.  You 
state  that  this  company  and  that  a  platoon  of  machine 
guns  is  to  take  station  on  the  ridge  to  the  north  of  the 
road  on  which  you  are  located,  and  is  to  go  as  support  to 
the  outpost.  Lieutenant  Haskins  will  take  the  4th  platoon 
and  will  proceed  as  a  picket  down  to  the  Hamilton  Farm. 
This  farm  is  a  mile  and  a  quarter  south  of  here  on  the 
Carlisle  Road.  Lieutenant  Haskins  is  to  get  some  sort 
of  flag  communication  with  Hill  707.  He  is  also  to  send 
small  patrols  down  as  far  south  as  Boyd's  School  House. 
Corporal  Roberts  will  go  to  the  top  of  Hill  707;  he  will 
take  four  signalers  with  him.     He  wUl  get  in  communica- 


118  English  of  Military  Communicatioiu 

tion  with  Texas  and  keep  in  communication.  He  will  do 
the  same  for  each  one  of  the  outguards  and  he  will  also 
do  the  same  for  Lieutenant  Haskins'  picket. 

6. — You  are  Major  Perkins  and  you  are  in  command 
of  a  squadron  of  cavalry.  You  are  between  Goldenville 
and  the  bottom  of  the  map.  You  receive  word  that  the 
enemy  is  somewhere  to  the  north,  and  you  get  messages 
from  your  commanding  oflBcer  stating  that  you  are  to  go 
as  independent  cavalry  for  your  brigade.  Reports  also 
come  in  to  you  that  the  enemy,  which  consists  of  about 
1,000  men,  is  occupying  Carlisle.  You  have  assembled 
your  captains,  and  you  state  to  them  that  Troop  A  will 
make  up  the  Advance  Guard.  You  state  also,  that  it  will 
keep  a  small  patrol  about  two  or  three  miles  to  the  front 
in  the  direction  in  which  it  is  going.  You  tell  Troop  A, 
also,  that  its  average  rate  of  speed  should  be  about  four 
miles  per  hour,  and  that  this  rate  includes  halts.  You 
know  that  your  main  body  is  going  to  march  at  6  o'clock 
the  next  morning  in  the  direction  of  Carlisle  and  you  know 
that  it  is  only  going  to  advance  15  miles  on  that  day.  You 
know,  also,  that  it  is  going  by  the  Gettysburg — Table 
Rock — Center  Mills — Carlisle  Road.  You  want  your  main 
body  to  follow  the  advance  guard,  which  you  have  already 
mentioned,  so  that  there  will  be  a  distance  between  the  ad- 
vance guard  and  the  main  body  of  about  a  mile.  The  main 
body  is  to  march  from  front  to  rear — Troops  B,  C,  and  D. 
You  wish  to  inform  everybody  present  that  Lieutenant 
Butler  and  Sgt.  Clifford  are  out  with  patrols  and  that 
these  patrols  are  very  far  out  to  the  flank  of  the  line  of 
march.  You  decide  to  ride  in  this  march  of  the  indepen- 
dent cavalry  near  the  head  of  the  main  body.  You  want 
your  officers  to  know  that  both  of  the  patrols  which  you 
have  just  mentioned  are  going  to  send  reports  to  you,  and 


Engluh  of  Military  Communications  119 

that  these  reports  should  arrive  at  the  squadron  when  the 
main  body  is  about  two  miles  north  of  the  Conewago. 
You  desire  wheel  transportation  of  all  kinds  to  join  the 
advance  of  the  main  body  of  infantry  back  near  Gettys- 
burg. 

7. — You  are  Captain  Small  in  command  of  Troop  A  of 
the  preceding  problem.  You  are  to  constitute,  as  you 
remember,  the  advance  guard  of  the  squadron  of  inde- 
pendent cavalry.  You  wish  to  tell  your  officers  and  non- 
commissioned oflScers,  whom  you  have  assembled,  that 
Lieutenant  Butler  and  Sgt.  Clifford  are  out  with  patrols, 
and  you  want  to  give  them  the  information  you  have  got 
from  your  major  in  regard  to  your  own  troops  and  the 
enemy.  You  want  Corporal  Dillingham  to  take  four  men 
and  to  go  ahead  of  the  troop.  He  is  to  go  at  a  rate  of 
about  six  miles  per  hour  until  Conewago  Creek  is  crossed ; 
after  that,  he  is  to  go  about  four  miles  an  hour.  When  he 
gets  about  a  mile  north  of  Gettysburg  he  is  to  take  the 
right-hand  road  which  goes  through  Table  Rock  and 
Center  Mills.  He  is  to  give  quick  and  prompt  warning  of 
the  appearance  of  any  of  the  enemy  or  hostile  troops 
which  he  encounters.  He  is  also  to  report  promptly  any 
places  in  the  road  which  cannot  be  crossed  by  troops  or 
vehicles.  In  fact,  he  is  to  report  any  information  which 
will  interfere  with  the  march  of  the  squadron.  You,  as 
the  captain  of  the  troop,  are  going  to  march  between  the 
advance  party  and  the  support. 

8. — ^You  are  Major  Adams  and  you  are  in  command 
of  a  squadron  of  cavalry  which  is  mounted  and  ready  for 
action  at  D-6.  You  see  a  squadron  of  the  enemy  in  an 
open  field  to  the  west,  about  600  yards  west  of  the  woods 
where  you  are  located.  You  see  the  guidons  mounted, 
and  you  see  that  the  remainder  of  the  men  are  leading  their 


120  English  of  Military  Communications 

horses  into  line  or  are  saddling  up.  You  note,  also, 
through  your  glasses,  that  the  guidons  are  facing  in  -your 
direction.  You  note,  also,  that  the  wagons  have  left  the 
camp  and  have  gone  around  the  woods  just  north.  You 
call  your  captains  together  and  you  issue  a  verbal  order — 
you  have  decided  to  attack  the  hostile  squadron  at  once, 
and  to  attack  that  squadron  while  you  are  mounted.  You 
want  Troops  D  and  C,  commanded  by  Captain  Denton, 
who  is  senior  to  Captain  Clifford,  to  form  the  main  attack- 
ing line.  You  want  Captain  Denton  to  take  advantage  of 
an  opening  in  the  woods  which  is  about  150  yards  to  your 
front.  He  is  to  attack  the  enemy  in  close  order,  mounted, 
as  soon  as  he  has  cleared  the  woods  in  which  you  are  all 
located.  You  give  to  the  captains  the  information  which 
you  have  got  through  your  field  glasses.  You  also  state 
that  Captain  BiUings  with  his  troop.  Troop  B,  is  to  go 
in  rear  of  Troops  D  and  C  and  form  the  supporting  line, 
keeping  a  distance  of  about  150  yards,  and  at  the  same 
time  he  is  to  look  out  for  the  right  flank.  You  want  Lieu- 
tenant Fink,  who  is  the  squadron  adjutant,  and  who  has 
seen  the  same  things  through  his  glasses  as  you  have  seen, 
to  accompany  Captain  Denton  with  his  two  troops  to  the 
edge  of  the  woods,  where  he  is  to  point  out  to  Captain  Den- 
ton the  enemy's  position.  You  yourself  are  going  to  be 
with  the  reserve.  Captain  Andrews  with  his  troop.  Troop 
A,  is  to  constitute  the  reserve.  Captain  Andrews  with  his 
command  is  to  follow  the  attacking  line  at  a  distance  of 
400  yards.  He  is  to  echelon  his  command  with  the  left 
flank.  You  want  the  whole  command  to  move  out  at  once. 
9.— You  are  General  Temple  and  you  are  700  yards 
northwest  of  Hermans  with  your  brigade  when  you  receive 
a  message  from  Lieutenant  Kline,  Aeroplane  No.  7.  The 
substance  of  this  message  states  that  the  left  of  the  enemy 


Englith  of  Military  Communications  121 

has  extended  itself  by  a  battalion  from  a  regiment  which 
is  northwest  of  501  cross-roads.  He  also  states  that  there 
is  another  battalion  from  a  regiment  near  504,  and  that 
this  battahon  is  moving  toward  Vamey.  He  states  that 
there  is  a  regiment  of  artillery  posted  on  Oak  Ridge,  and 
that  there  is  another  regiment  of  artillery  which  has  its 
right  flank  at  the  Stock  Farm  and  its  left  flank  near  531 
road  fork.  You  assemble  your  regimental  commanders 
and  your  cavalry  commander;  also,  your  artillery  com- 
mander. You  state  that  the  artillery  battalion  which  is 
with  you  is  to  go  into  a  position  near  where  you  are  and 
that  it  is  to  operate  against  the  artillery  of  the  enemy  and 
the  attacking  infantry  of  the  enemy.  This  your  artillery 
battalion  is  to  do  at  first,  but  later  it  will  support  your 
attack.  The  first  battahon  of  the  first  infantry  you  want 
to  have  assigned  as  a  support  to  the  artillery.  You  want 
the  first  infantry,  minus  its  first  battalion  which  is  going 
to  go  as  support  to  the  artillery,  to  advance  in  the  direc- 
tion of  Herman's  Farm  House;  then  it  is  to  deploy  and 
attack.  It  is  to  attack  so  that  the  right  of  the  regiment 
will  pass  through  the  J.  Weaver  Farm  House.  The  third 
infantry  is  to  be  the  reserve;  it  will  be  under  your  com- 
mand and  it  will  move  out  and  go  forward  to  the  Good 
Intent  School  House.  The  first  platoon  of  Troop  A  and 
the  first  cavalry  will  take  a  position  on  the  hill  which  is 
designated  by  the  figures  651.  This  platoon  will  cover 
your  right  flank  and  report  immediately  any  changes 
which  take  place  in  the  disposition  of  the  enemy.  Your 
station  for  the  slightly  wounded  will  be  at  Table  Rock. 
You  are  going  to  be  at  the  Good  Intent  School  House, 
where  messages  are  going  to  reach  you.  Of  course,  you 
give  your  officers  whom  you  have  assembled,  the  contents 
of  the  aeroplane  message  which  you  received.  You  want 
the  infantry  combat  wagons  to  assemble  at  Table  Rock, 


122  English  of  Military  Communications 

and  you  want  them  to  go  there  after  all  the  troops  have 
cleared  the  road.  You  want  the  second  infantry  to  get 
under  cover  from  the  enemy  and  to  go  toward  Hill  586; 
this  hill  is  northeast  of  Varney.  When  they  are  deployed 
they  will  attack  so  that  their  left  will  pass  through  Hill 
586. 

10. — Major  Quincy,  in  charge  of  the  artillery  battalion 
of  the  preceding  problem,  assembles  the  captains  of  his 
batteries  and  issues  his  instructions  covered  by  the  follow- 
ing data :  he  wishes  Batteries  A  and  B  to  attack  the  hostile 
artillery,  and  he  wishes  them  to  take  up  a  position  on  the 
north  end  of  the  field  near  where  the  brigade  is  halted. 
He  wants  Battery  C  to  go  to  Hill  592.  From  that  point 
he  wants  that  Battery  to  attack  the  hostile  infantry.  He 
gives  to  his  commanders  the  information  which  was  con- 
tained in  the  aeroplane  message  of  the  preceding  problem. 
He  also  states  that  the  enemy  in  superior  force  is  attack- 
ing from  the  west.  He  points  out  also  that  between  3,000 
and  4,000  yards  to  the  southwest  can  be  seen  a  long  line 
of  artillery  of  the  enemy  and  that  this  artillery  is  in 
action.  He  also  states  that  the  first  battalion  of  the  first 
infantry,  which  is  now  marching  down  the  road,  which  is 
the  support  of  the  artillery,  will  occupy  Hill  592.  Battery 
A's  target  is  to  be  the  further  half  of  the  line  of  the 
enemy's  guns,  and  Battery  B's  target  is  to  be  the  nearer 
half.  He  states  to  his  Battery  Commanders  that  he  has 
already  marked  the  position  that  they  are  to  occupy  with 
their  commands,  and  he  tells  them  that  they  are  to  occupy 
this  position  at  once  and  prepare  for  immediate  action. 
He  tells  Battery  A  that  the  adjutant  will  give  them  the 
firing  data  and  they  are  to  range  by  volleys.  They  are 
to  report  to  him  when  ready,  and  they  are  to  be  on  the 
alert  and  await  his  order  to  commence  firing.  He  also 
states  that  the  advance  cavalry  is  on  the  Hill  651  south 


English  of  Military  Communications  123 

of  Goldenville,  and  that  they  are  covering  the  right  of  the 
line.  He  wishes  to  tell  his  battery  commanders  that  the 
infantry  is  marching  in  a  general  direction  south,  and  that 
it  is  going  from  here  to  begin  an  attack  against  the  left  of 
the  enemy.  He  wishes  to  tell  them  also  that  he  is  to  be, 
during  the  action,  on  the  left  of  Battery  A. 


CHAPTER  X 

THE  OPERATION  ORDER,  ORDERS, 
LETTERS  OF  INSTRUCTION 

Before  August,  1914,  the  Operation  order  was  the  Eng- 
lish term  for  our  Field  order.  Both  orders  had  the  same 
functions  and  about  the  same  form.  At  times,  the  term 
operation  order  was  used  by  us  to  include  only  battle 
orders,  but  on  the  whole,  the  terms  Operation  orders  and 
Field  orders  practically  amounted  to  American  and  Eng- 
lish designations  of  the  same  thing. 

In  the  beginning  of  the  present  war,  after  a  few  weeks 
of  open  conflict,  this  kind  of  fighting  in  France  gave  way 
to  a  vast  siege.  The  English  found  themselves,  after  some 
cross-country  fighting,  in  the  trenches.  There  the  opera- 
tion order  which  had  provided  for  situations  of  march, 
halt,  bivouac,  and  battle,  was  gradually  made  over  to  suit 
the  peculiar  needs  of  defenses,  raids,  and  frontal  attacks. 
The  barrage  fire,  bombs,  mortars,  machine  guns,  and  intri- 
cate lines  of  communication  added  to  the  number  of  details 
to  be  considered.  Little  by  little  the  will  of  the  commander 
expressed  itself  in  such  completeness  that  the  former  size 
of  his  operation  order  passed  all  bounds.  It  was  natural, 
then,  that  although  the  scope  and  character  of  the  English 
order  steadily  changed,  its  name  remained  the  same. 

When  the  Americans  came  to  take  part  in  the  war,  the 
operation  order  had  during  the  previous  years  of  struggle 
developed  out  of  all  resemblance  to  its  former  self.  It 
was  no  longer  a  field  order  as  we  know  the  term.  It  was 
fully  grown  to  meet  the  tremendous  progress  of  English 
experience  in  the  trenches.    The  consequence  was  that  the 


English  of  Military  Communications  125 

American,  finding  both  the  state  of  siege  and  the  order  to 
cover  it  beyond  his  experience,  associated  the  English  name 
with  the  novel  warfare.  Thus,  today,  the  operation  order 
is  a  term  used  in  connection  with  the  disposition  of  troops 
on  the  battle  fronts  of  Europe. 

We  should  bear  in  mind,  then,  that  the  operation  order 
is  nothing  more  than  a  field  order  fitted  to  trench  condi- 
tions. We  must  not  gain  the  idea  that  it  has  supplanted 
the  order  which  goes  with  mobile  exercises  on  open  ground. 
Open  warfare  began  this  conflict,  and  will,  provided  it  be 
ended  by  martial  victory,  bring  it  to  a  close.  Open  war- 
fare has  been  the  rule  on  the  long  Russian,  Italian,  Serbian, 
Turkish,  and  Roumanian  fronts.  We  must  not  be  led 
astray  in  our  estimate  of  the  proportions  because  the  front 
in  France  and  Belgium  is  the  most  vital  one  to  us  from  a 
strategic  standpoint.  Field  orders,  which  are  the  accom- 
paniments of  open  warfare,  should  still  form  the  larger 
part  of  our  study. 

Nevertheless,  the  operation  order  is  the  order  next  in 
importance  to  the  field  order.  It  must  be  framed  with 
mathematical  precision  under  fire. 

It  has  the  greatest  conciseness,  but  is  not  brief.  It  goes 
into  the  minutest  details,  but  its  details  are  tersely  put. 
In  certain  parts  it  is  telegraphic  like  the  field  message;  in 
others  it  has  completed  sentences  like  those  of  the  field 
order.  It  has  an  orderly  arrangement  of  paragraphs  and 
brief  and  unmistakable  language.  If  we  are  able  to  com- 
pose a  good  field  message  and  order,  we  should  find,  after 
we  have  familiarized  ourselves  with  the  technique  of  the 
trenches,  that  the  construction  of  the  operation  order  will 
fall  naturally  into  place  in  our  minds. 

Unfortunately,  we  are  forbidden  to  place  an  example 
of  one  of  our  own  operation  orders  upon  these  pages.  But 
we  may  have  the  opportunity  of  viewing  a  German  one, 


126  English  of  Military  Communications 

which  contains  the  principles  of  our  own.  The  example 
given  was  issued  by  a  regimental  commander  for  a  raid. 
The  action  actually  took  place  near  La  Boisselle,  April 
11,  1916. 

110th  Reserve  Infantry  Regiment.    In  the  field,  6th  April, 
1916. 

Regimental  Orders  for  a  Raid  on  the  Spion 

1.  The  raid  will  probably  take  place  at 

dusk  the  11th  of  April. 

2.  Organization  of  the  raiding  party — 
In   command. — Captain   Wagener,   as- 
sisted by  Lieutenant  Boening,  Assis- 
tant-Surgeon Wisser,  one  bugler  and 
six  stretcher  bearers. 

Patrol  commanders. — L  ieutenants 
Stradtmann,    Freund,    Dumas,    and 
Bohlefeld. 
Raiding  party. — 50  men  of  the  110th 
Reserve  Infantry  Regiment  and  four 
Pioneers  of  the  1st  Reserve  Company, 
13th  Pioneer  Battalion. 
3.     Upon  the  day  fixed,  the  raiding  party 
will  be  assembled  in  Dug-outs  Nos.  1-10,  on 
the  right  wing  of  the  left-hand  battalion. 
Dug-out  No.   9  will  be  used  as   advanced 
regimental  command  post. 

The   assaulting  party   must   not   exceed 

three  officers  and  30  men.     The  remaining 

officers  and  men  will  be  at  Captain  Wage- 

ner's  disposal  for  use  as  supports. 

Captain  Shortly  after  dusk  the  assaulting  party 

Wagener's        will  leave  the  Blaue  Stellung  by  Sap  No.  3 

Orders —  with  the  object  of  breaking  into  the  enemy's 

Appendix    1.   position   in   the  neighborhood  of  the   Siid 


English  of  Military  Communications 


127 


Spion,  from  which  point  the  enemy's 
trenches  will  be  cleared  northwards,  if  pos- 
sible, as  far  as  the  Spion.  Unless  prevented 
by  the  enemy's  fire,  the  raiding  party  will 
return  to  our  Blaue  Stellung  by  the  same 
way. 
Table  of  4.     For  25  minutes  before  the  commence- 

distribution  ment  of  the  raid,  the  artillery  will  prepare 
of  artillery  for  the  assault  by  shelling  the  enemy's 
fire —  trenches  between  Besenhecke  and  the  Wind- 

Appendix  2.  miihle,  and  also  the  Weisse  Steinmauer. 
During  the  raid  the  artillery  will  control 
by  its  fire  all  the  enemy's  trenches  likely 
to  prove  a  source  of  danger  to  the  enter- 
prise. 
Special  5.     In  order  to  draw  the  fire  of  the  ene- 

Orders  for  my's  artillery  away  from  the  spot  to  be 
feint  raided,  a  feint  attack  against  the  enemy's 

attack —  position  just  north  of  La  Boiselle  Cemetery 

Appendix  3.  will  start  15  minutes  after  the  artillery 
Special  opens  fire. 

Orders  for  6.     In  order  that  the  registration  of  the 

this  bom-  objective  by  the  heavy  artillery  and  Minen- 

bardment —     werfer  shall  not  be  apparent,  on  the  morn- 

Appendix    4-  ing  of  the  day  before  the  raid — probably 

the   10th   April — a   feint  bombardment   of 

Target-sectors  76-79  will  be  carried  out, 

combined  with  a  mine  explosion,  with  the 

object  of  misleading  the  enemy.    The  exact 

time  will  be  fixed  beforehand  by  the  artillery 

commander,    Officer    Commanding    Ersatz 

Abeiltung,  76th  Artillery  Regiment. 

7.     The  machine-gun  officer  will  arrange 
that,  during  the  whole  time  of  the  raid,  the 


128  English  of  Military  Communications 

enemy's  rear  trenches  in  Target-sectors  76- 
81  are  kept  under  a  constant  fire,  with  a 
view  to  causing  him  all  possible  loss,  and,  at 
the  same  time,  to  safeguarding  our  patrol 
against  counter-attacks. 

8.  The  Officer  Commanding  1st  Reserve 
Company,  13th  Pioneer  Battalion,  will  ar- 
range for  a  gallery  of  the  left-hand  mine- 
field to  be  ready  charged  by  the  morning  of 
the  day  before  the  raid,  and  for  a  gallery 
of  the  right-hand  minefield  to  be  ready 
charged  by  the  evening  of  the  raid.  The 
former  will  be  sprung  at  the  conclusion  of 
the  feint  bombardment,  the  latter  as  an  in- 
troduction to  the  feint  attack. 

Fjom  today,  the  "earth  mortars"  (Erd- 
morser)  will  systematically  cut  the  enemy's 
wire  opposite  the  Blinddarm.  On  the  day 
before  the  raid,  they  will  cooperate  with  all 
other  close-range  weapons  to  assist  in  the 
,  feint  bombardment  of  Target-sectors  76-78. 

On  the  evening  of  the  raid,  they  will  assist 
in  the  feint  attack  by  bombarding  Target- 
sectors  76  and  77  {see  Appendices  3  and  4). 

Throughout  the  raid,  the  "Alhrecht- 
morser"  in  position  on  the  Lehmgruben- 
hohe,  will  heavily  bombard  the  enemy's 
trenches  in  the  Nordrondell.  Particular 
care  will  be  taken  that  the  enemy's  machine 
guns  do  not  interfere  with  the  raid  from 
that   quarter    {see   Appendix   1). 

9.  The  Officer  Commanding  ^S8th 
Minenwerfer  Company  will  register  the  ene- 
my's wire  at  the  point  of  entry  with  one 
heavy  and  two  medium  Minenwerfer  in  the 


English  of  Military  Communicationg  129 

course  of  the  feint  bombardment  on  the  day 
before  the  raid.  He  will  also  take  part  in 
this  bombardment  and  fire  30  medium 
Minenwerfer  shells  at  the  Weisse  Stein- 
mauer  {see  Appendix  4).  On  the  afternoon 
of  the  same  day,  with  both  medium  Minen- 
werfer mounted  in  the  Minenwerfer  Weg, 
lie  will  cut  the  enemy's  wire  at  76y,  and 
throughout  the  whole  night  and  the  follow- 
ing day  will  keep  up  a  desultory  fire. 

On  the  evening  of  the  raid,  the  wire  in 
tItotA  of  the  point  of  entry  of  the  raiding 
party  will  be  cut  on  a  width  of  50  meters 
by  the  heavy  and  two  medium  Minenwerfer 
{see  Appendix  1).  Meanwhile,  the  two  other 
medium  Minenwerfer  will  take  part  in  the 
feint  attack  against  76y  {see  Appendix  3). 
The  light  Minenwerfer  at  the  disposal  of 
the  228th  Minenwerfer  Company  will  take 
part  in  the  feint  bombardment  and  in  the 
feint  attack,  in  accordance  with  the  orders 
(para.  8)  issued  for  the  close-range  weapons 
of  the  1st  Reserve  Company,  13th  Pioneer 
Battalion  {see  Appendices  3  and  4).  The 
Officer  Commanding  228th  Minenwerfer 
Company  will  receive  further  detailed  in- 
structions from  Captain  Wagener. 

10.  On  the  evening  of  the  raid,  battalions 
will  hold  themselves  in  a  state  of  readiness 
for  an  alarm.  Arrangements  will  be  made 
that,  in  the  event  of  the  enemy  opening  a 
barrage  on  our  trenches,  as  may  well  hap- 
pen, the  number  of  sentries  will  be  reduced 
to  a  minimum.  Gas  masks  and  other  gas 
equipment  must  be  held  ready  for  use. 


130  English  of  Military  Communications 

11.  I  shall  be  at  the  regimental  command 
post  from  the  morning  of  the  day  before 
the  raid.  From  6  p.  m.  of  the  evening  of  the 
raid,  I  shall  be  in  the  advanced  regimental 
command  post  in  Dug-out  No.  9  on  the 
right  wing  of  the  left-hand  battalion.  Cap- 
tain Wagener  will  maintain  constant  com- 
munication with  me.  The  artillery  liaison 
officer  will  also  be  with  me. 

(Signed)  FRHR.  V.  VIETINGHOFF. 

Distribution 

Headquarters    2 

3   Battalions    3 

110th  12  Companies 12 

Reserve      J  Labor  Company 1 

Infantry     ]  1st  Machine-Gun  Company.  .    1 

Regiment       2nd  Machine-Gun  Company.    2 

55th  Machine-Gun  Section.  .    1 

Captain  Wagener 2 

29th  Reserve  Field  Artillery  Regiment.  .    1 
Ersatz  Abeiltung,  176th  Field  Artillery 

Regiment    1 

1st  Abeiltung,  29th  Regiment  Field  Artil- 
lery      1 

1st  Reserve  Company,  13th  Pioneer  Bat- 
talion        1 

228th  Minenwerfer  Company 1 

Division    1 

Brigade     ■ 1 

109th  Reserve  Infantry  Regiment 1 

111th  Reserve  Infantry  Regiment 1 

Spare  copies    5 

37 


APPENDIX  I 

Special  Orders  foe  the  Raid  on  the  Spion 

1.     Organization  of  the  raiding  partif — 
Commander. — Captain  Wagener;  with 

him,  Bugler  Held. 
Stradtmann's  patrol. — L  ieutenant 

Stradtmann  and  10  men. 
Dumas'  patrol. — ^Lieutenant  Bohlefeld 

and  10  men. 
Supports,  at  my  disposal — Lieutenant 
Freund  and  24  men. 
In  addition  to  the  latter  party,  at  my 
disposal — Boening,  and   Assistant-Surgeon 
Wiser  and  six  stretcher  bearers. 

2.  Dress  and  equipment. — Attack  order 
without  greatcoat  or  cap,  belts  to  be  worn 
without  pouches,  gas  masks  to  be  slung  and 
tucked  into  tunic. 

The  Stradtmann,  Dumas,  and  Bohlefeld 
patrols  will  each  be  equipped,  half  with  rifles 
and  half  with  pistols  and  wire-cutters. 

The  supports  will  carry  rifles,  five  men 
will  carry  pistols,  each  man  will  carry  two 
grenades. 

As  a  distinguishing  mark  each  man  will 
wear  a  triangle  of  white  linen  sewn  on  the 
Minutes.  breast  and  back. 

O'  3.     Time  table. — The  artillery  will  open 

The  time  of  fire  with  gas  shells  on  the  enemy's  trenches 
starting  will  on  both  sides  of  the  point  of  entry  and  on 
be   communi-  the  objectives  opposite  the  southwest  corner 


132  English  of  Military  Communications 

cated,  in  of  La  Boisselle,  where  the  feint  attack  is 

good  time,       to  take  place. 

on  the  day  of       For  a  quarter  of  an  hour,  all  the  enemy's 
the  raid.  trenches  likely  to  prove  of  importance  to 

the  raiding  party  will  be  brought  under 
fire.  At  the  same  time,  the  close-range  wea- 
pons of  the  1st  Reserve  Company,  13th 
Pioneer  Battalion,  with  the  two  medium  and 
the  light  Minenwerfer  of  the  ^28th  Minen- 
werfer  Company,  will  fire  with  maximum 
rapidity  on  the  enemy's  trenches  opposite 
the  southwest  corner  of  La  Boisselle. 
7'  The  one  heavy  and  two  medium  Minen- 

werfer of  the  ^^8th  Minenwerfer  Company 
will  open  fire  with  the  object  of  cutting  the 
wire  in  front  of  the  point  of  entry. 
14'45"  On  the  right  flank  of  the  minefield  a  shal- 

low gallery  will  he  fired. 
16'  The  artillery,   which  was  firing  on  the 

southwest  corner  of  La  Boiselle,  will  in- 
crease its  range  and  shell  the  trenches  in 
rear. 

The  close-range  weapons  will  cease  fire. 
The  machine  guns  will  sweep  communica- 
tion trenches  in  this  sector  and  in  the  Gal- 
gen. 
15'30"  In  the  Blinddarm  and  just  south  of  the 

same,  isolated  groups  of  dummies  will  be  ex- 
posed in  order  to  make  the  enemy  think  an 
attack  is  pending.  From  now  on,  artillery 
and  Minenwerfer  fire  will  increase  to  its 
maximum  intensity  on  the  real  objective. 

The     "Albrecht-Morser"     of     the     1st 
Reserve  Company,  13th  Pioneer  Battalion. 


English  of  Military  Communications  188 

in  position  on  the  Lehmgrubenhohe,  will 
bombard  the  Nordrondell  with  the  utmost 
intensity. 

20'  The  patrols  will  leave  their  dug-outs  and 

take  up  their  positions  in  readiness,  in  ac- 
cordance with  direct  orders  received  from 
rae,  in  the  Hohlweg  by  Sap  No.  3. 

23'  Stradtmarm's  patrol  will  leave  the  Hohl- 

weg at  "a"  and  crawl  forward  as  far  as  "6." 
Lieutenant  Boening  will  post  the  stretcher 
hearers  as  connecting  files  between  Stradt- 
mann's  patrol  and  myself. 

26'  The  artillery  will  lift  its  fire  from  the 

objective  between  Besenhecke  and  the  Wind- 
miihle  to  the  targets  in  rear,  and  will  open  a 
barrage  on  those  of  the  enemy's  trenches 
which  may  prove  a  source  of  danger  to  the 
raid. 

Tlie  Minenwerfer  will  cease  fire. 
The  machine-guns  will  open  fire  on  posi- 
tions  in   rear   and   on   the   communication 
trenches  which  lead  to  the  objective  from 
both  sides. 

The  "Albrecht-Morser"  of  the  1st  Re- 
serve Company,  13th  Pioneer  Battalion,  on 
the  liehmgrubenhohe,  will  continue  to  bom- 
bard the  Nordrondell.  All  close-range  wea- 
pons and  the  artillery,  which  from  0'  to  15' 
had  been  bombarding  the  enemy's  position 
opposite  the  southwest  corner  of  La  Bois- 
selle,  will  reopen  fire  on  these  targets  with 
renewed  vigor. 
25'16"  Stradtmann's  patrol  will  break  into  the 

enemy's  trenches  at  the  Sud  Spion  and,  at 


134  English  of  Military  Communications 

point  1  (see  Sketch  No.  1),  will  defend  the 
point  of  entry  from  the  direction  of  the 
enemy. 

On  orders  received  from  me  personally, 
Dumas'  patrol  will  follow  Stradtmann's 
patrol  and  advance  southwards  along  the 
enemy's  trench  as  far  as  point  2. 

On  orders  received  from  me  personally 
also,  Bohlef eld's  patrol  will  follow  Dumas' 
patrol  and,  once  in  the  enemy's  trench,  will 
push  on  towards  the  Spion. 

The  stretcher  hearers  will  act  as  connect- 
ing files  bet\\'een  Stradtmann's  patrol  and 
myself. 

The  supports  will  hold  themselves  in 
readiness  at  4,  so  as  to  be  able  to  push  on 
after  the  other  patrols  immediately  on 
receipt  of  an  order   from  me. 

If  the  enemy  opens  a  barrage  on  our 
position  and  on  the  Hohlweg  before  the 
patrols  come  out  of  their  dug-outs,  I  shall 
either  lead  the  patrol  to  the  enemy's  posi- 
tion by  another  route,  or  cancel  the  raid. 

4.  Duty  of  the  patrols. — As  many  of 
the  enemy  as  possible  must  be  made 
prisoners;  in  addition,  rifles,  machine  guns, 
rifle  grenade  stands,  trench  mortars,  etc.,  as 
well  as  filled  packs  are  to  be  brought  back. 
Should  it  be  found  impossible  to  carry  back 
all  the  booty  owing  to  the  small  numbers  of 
the  raiding  party,  but  if,  as  far  as  regards 
the  enemy's  fire  it  could  be  done,  report  will 
be  passed  on  to  me  by  Stradtmann's  patrol. 


English  of  Military  Communications  185 

5.  Return. — On  a  signal  given  by  Lieu- 
tenant Stradtmann,  or  on  the  "Charge" 
being  blown  by  my  bugler,  the  raiding  party 
will  make  its  way  back  from  the  Sud  Spion 
to  the  Hohlweg  by  the  shortest  way,  and 
immediately  make  for  the  same  dug-outs 
whence  it  started.  In  the  dug-outs,  I  shall 
ascertain  whether  everyone  has  returned. 
Prisoners  and  booty  will  be  taken  into  the 
dug-outs. 

During  the  raid,  if  the  enemy  should  open 
a  heavy  barrage  on  the  trenches  on  the 
Schwabenhohe  and  on  the  Hohlweg,  the 
raiding  party  will  remain  in  the  enemy's 
trench  and  acquaint  me  of  the  fact  by  firing 
a  red  flare.  I  shall  then  endeavor  to  reach 
the  party  and  lead  them  back  by  some  other 
way.  Should  I  not  arrive,  the  senior  officer 
present  will  lead  the  entire  party. 

6.  Assistant-Surgeon  Wisser  will  or- 
ganize No.  1  Dug-out  as  a  first  aid  post  and 
will  remain  there  until  the  conclusion  of  the 
raid. 

7.  Until  the  15th  minute  I  ^hall  be  in 
the  advanced  regimental  command  post ; 
after  that  time  in  the  Hohlweg,  which  will 
be  connected  by  telephone  with  the  advanced 
regimental  command  post. 

(Signed)     WAGENER, 
Captain  and  Company  Commander. 
Verbally  and  in  writing  to 
participants  in  the  raid. 
Copy  to  the  regiment. 
W. 


IS6  English  of  Military  Communications 

To  quote  Appendices  2,  3,  and  4  would  take  up  too 
much  space  and  would  add  very  little  to  the  purpose  of  the 
example.  Number  2  consists  of  a  five-page  table  of  the 
kinds  and  time  of  fire,  the  batteries  of  fire,  and  the  targets ; 
number  3,  of  detailed  orders  for  a  feint  attack;  and  num- 
ber 4,  for  a  feint  bombardment. 

The  object  of  the  quotation  is  to  show  the  accuracy  and 
detail  of  an  operation  order.  Since  the  German  subject 
matter  and  treatment  are  about  the  same  as  our  own,  we 
ought  to  gain  from  it  a  conception  of  the  requirements  of 
framing  an  operation  order. 

Note. — The  meager  space  devoted  to  the  Operation 
Order  in  this  course  of  lessons  should  in  no  way  reflect  on 
its  relative  importance  among  military  communications. 
Only  because  the  treatment  of  our  own  examples  is  for- 
bidden and  because  our  experience  is  slight,  do  we  leave 
it  without  further  practice.  Those  who  are  armed  with 
the  confidential  documents  of  the  War  Department  may 
look  into  our  own  operation  order  more  closely ;  and  those 
who  have  conscientiously  applied  themselves  to  the  work 
of  the  preceding  lessons  ought  to  have  no  trouble  with  its 
composition. 

THE  ORDER 

Our  Field  Service  Regulations  state*  that  "orders  in 
contra-distinction  to  field,  general,  and  special  orders,  are 
used  by  commanders  of  divisions  and  separate  brigades  for 
regulating  the  movements  and  resupply  of  the  field  trains, 
fixing  the  position  of  distributing  points  (rations  and 
forage),  authorizing  the  use  of  reserve  rations,  providing 
for  the  refilling  of  combat  trains  after  combat  or  a  march, 
providing  for  ambulance  or  hospital  service  in  camps,  and 
for  furnishing  such  other  similar  information  or  instruc- 
tions as  it  is  desired  to  communicate  to  troops.     They  also 

♦Par.  87. 


English  of  Military  Communicationt  187 

include  such  instructions  as  may  be  sent  to  the  commander 
of  trains,  relative  to  the  movements  and  disposition  of  the 
trains  and  information  with  regard  to  the  arrangements 
made  with  the  line  of  communication  relative  to  the  posi- 
tions of  refilling,  rendezvous,  and  evacuation  points." 

Thus,  when  separate  orders  are  necessary  for  such  con- 
ditions as  cited,  they  are  called  simply  orders.  They  may 
be  transmitted  as  field  messages  between  commanders  or  as 
more  formal  documents.  In  either  case  they  are  usually 
addressed  to  the  person  concerned. 
Examples  of  orders  follow: 

61st  Division,  9th  Corps, 
Gettysburg, 
3  June  '19,  6-30  p.  m. 
To  Commander  of  Trains: 

Have  one  wagon  company  small  arms  ammunition  at 
cross-roads  near  EPPLEY  at  8  p.  m. 

Have  one  wagon  company  artillery  ammunition  at  north 
edge  of  McPHERSON  RIDGE  at  8  p.  m. 

Have  1st  Section,  supply,  ready  to  issue  at  Central 
Square  in  GETTYSBURG  at  8  p.  m. 

Have  empty  wagons  return  to  LITTLESTOWN  to- 
night to  refill ;  have  them  report  en  route  to  Field  Hospital 
No.  1  at  the  crossing  of  ROCK  CREEK  to  carry  back 
wounded.    Have  them  well  filled  with  straw  or  hay. 

MABIE, 
Chief  of  Staff. 
Telegraphed  to  Commander  of  Trains. 
Copies  to  Regimental  Commanders. 

19th  Division, 
Marysville, 
6  Oct.  '22,  6-46  p.  m. 
To  Officer  in  Charge  of  Trains: 

You  will  move  with  your  trains  at  3-45  a.  m.,  by  cordu- 
roy road  JEPSOM-SMALLEY-SAINT  MARYS. 


138  English  of  Military  Communications 

Arrange  your  columns  as  follows:  one  section  artillery 
ammunition,  one  section  small  arms  ammunition,  bridge 
train,  supply  column,  field  hospitals,  remainder  of  ammuni- 
tion column. 

On  reaching  SAINT  MARYS  have  the  two  sections 
ammunition  turn  north  and,  when  they  have  cleared  the 
road,  halt  and  await  orders. 

Have  the  remainder  of  the  ammunition  columns  halt 
beside  the  road  between  SAINT  MARYS  and  ALEX- 
ANDER and  await  orders.  Have  the  field  hospitals  park 
off  the  road  near  HILLIS. 

On  the  march,  as  you  overtake,  or  are  joined  by,  the 
field  trains  of  the  troops,  you  will  assume  command. 

Hasten  your  march  until  you  are  clear  of  JEPSO^M. 

SMITH, 
Copies  to  all  Commanders.  Chief  of  Staff. 

By  Lieut.  Jones  to  officer  in  charge  of  trains. 

Birmingham, 
8  Sept.  '25,  9-50  a.  m. 
To  Captain  Mott,  commanding  trains: 

Our  advance  guard  met  at  9-30  a.  m.  two  battalions 
hostile  infantry  at  GARLINGTON. 

Have  trains  keep  well  closed  and  follow  main  body  with- 
out distance. 

NORTON, 
Colonel,  commanding. 
The  first  two  examples  are  of  the  formal  type.     The 
third  one  is  less  so. 

Verbal  orders  are  usually  transmitted  by  officers.  How- 
ever, if  the  order  consists  of  a  single  sentence  such  as,  "The 
trains  will  halt  two  hours  at  Bingham,"  it  may  be  trans- 
mitted by  an  enlisted  man. 

Although  there  is  more  latitude  in  the  form  of  written 
order  than  in  that  of  the  field  order,  the  one  should  be  as 


English  of  Military  Communications  IS*} 

brief  and  unmistakable  in  its  construction  as  the  other. 
The  paragraph  structure  and  sequence  should  be  as  logical 
and  unified  as  English  composition  can  make  them. 

With  your  book  open  at  the  extract  from  Field  Service 
Regulations  in  regard  to  the  order,  compose  enough  imagi- 
nai-y  orders  to  cover  all  the  instances  therein  given. 

LETTERS  OF  INSTRUCTION 

Letters  of  Instruction  chiefly  differ  from  orders,  opera- 
tion orders,  and  field  orders  in  their  lack  of  definition  of 
specific  tactical  duties.  They  are  truly  instructions. 
They  deal  mainly  with  strategic  considerations  and  general 
plans,  because  the  writer  is  usually  far  away  from,  or  not 
in  direct  command  of,  the  units  which  are  going  to  carry 
out  the  general  plans. 

At  the  beginning  of  campaigns  letters  of  instruction 
enumerate  the  troops  of  the  various  commands  and  the 
corresponding  leaders. 

"In  armies,  combat  orders  will  often  be  in  the  form  of, 
or  a  part  of,  letters  of  instruction  to  the  commanding 
generals  in  the  field  armies  composing  the  army.  But 
where  the  field  armies  are  within  supporting  distance  of 
each  other  and  can  mutually  cooperate  in  the  task  assigned 
them,  formal  combat  orders  may  be  issued.  Such  orders 
are  necessarily  general  in  character  and  consist  of  a  state- 
ment of  the  objective  sought  by  the  army  commander,  and 
of  the  part  he  expects  each  field  army  to  play  in  attaining 
this  objective.  The  army  commander,  either  by  means  of 
letters  of  instruction  or  by  personal  conferences  with  his 
field  army  commanders,  fully  acquaints  them  not  only  with 
the  immediate  end  in  view,  but  also  with  so  much  of  his 
future  plans  as  may  be  necessary  to  insure  thorough  co- 
operation on  their  part."* 

*  Par.  143,  F.  S.  R. 


14i§  Englith  of  Military  Communication* 

In  the  illustration  which  follows,  President  Lincoln  out- 
lines a  general  offensive  to  the  various  armies.  As  com- 
mander-in-chief he  issues  the  substance  of  a  letter  of 
instructions  in  the  form  of  an  executive  order.  In  it  we 
shall  notice  that  he  does  not  prescribe  any  specific  move- 
ment of  troops. 

Executive  Mansion,  Washington,  Jan.  27,  1862. 
President's  General  War  Order,  No.  1. 

Ordered:  That  the  22d  day  of  February,  1862,  be  the 
day  for  a  general  movement  of  the  land  and  naval  forces 
of  the  United  States  against  the  insurgent  forces. 

That,  especially. 

The  army  at  and  about  Fortress  Monroe, 

The  army  of  the  Potomac, 

The  army  of  West  Virginia, 

The  army  near  Mumfordsville,  Kentucky, 

The  army  and  flotilla  at  Cairo, 

And  a  naval  force  in  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  be  ready  to 
move  on  that  day. 

That  all  other  forces,  both  land  and  naval,  with  their 
respective  commanders,  obey  existing  orders  for  the  time, 
and  be  ready  to  obey  additional  orders  when  duly  given. 

That  the  heads  of  departments,  and  especially  the  Sec- 
retaries of  War  and  of  the  Navy,  with  aU  their  subordi- 
nates, and  the  General-in-Chief,  with  all  other  commanders 
and  subordinates  of  land  and  naval  forces,  will  severally 
be  held  to  their  strict  and  full  responsibilities  for  prompt 
execution  of  this  order. 

ABRAHAM  LINCOLN. 

The  following  is  a  more  usual  form  of  letter  of  instruc- 
tions. This  time  it  goes  directly  from  the  commander-in- 
chief  to  the  general-in-chief : 


Englith  of  Military  Communications  141 

May  24, 1862. 
From  Washington,  24th. 
Maj.-Gen.  G.  B.  McClellan, — 

I  left  General  McDowell's  camp  at  dark  last  evening. 
Shield's  command  is  there,  but  it  is  so  worn  that  he  cannot 
move  before  Monday  morning,  the  twenty-sixth  (26th). 
We  have  so  thinned  our  line  to  get  troops  for  other  places, 
that  it  was  broken  yesterday  at  Front  Royal,  with  a  prob- 
able loss  to  us  of  one  (1)  regiment  infantry,  two  (2)  com- 
panies cavalry,  putting  General  Banks  in  some  peril. 

The  enemy's  forces  under  General  Anderson,  now  oppos- 
ing General  McDowell's  advance,  have  as  their  line  of 
supply  and  retreat  the  road  to  Richmond. 

If,  in  conjunction  with  McDowell's  movement  against 
Anderson,  you  could  send  a  force  from  your  right  to  cut 
off  the  enemy's  supplies  from  Richmond,  preserve  the  rail- 
road bridges  across  the  two  (2)  forks  of  the  Pamunkey, 
and  intercept  the  enemy's  retreat,  you  will  prevent  the 
army  now  opposed  to  you  from  receiving  an  accession  of 
numbers  of  nearly  fifteen  thousand  (15,000)  men,  and  if 
you  succeed  in  saving  the  bridges,  you  will  secure  a  line  of 
railroad  for  supplies  in  addition  to  the  one  you  now  have. 
Can  you  not  do  this  almost  as  well  as  not,  while  you  are 
building  the  Chickahominy  bridges?  McDowell  and 
Shields  both  say  you  can,  and  positively  will,  move  Monday 
morning.     I  wish  you  to  march  cautiously  and  safely. 

You  will  have  command  of  McDowell  after  he  joins  you, 
precisely  as  you  indicated  in  your  long  dispatch  to  us  of 
the  twenty-first  (21st). 

A.  LINCOLN, 

President. 

As  you  see,  the  above  example  does  no  more  than  suggest 
to  General  McClellan  from  a  strate|^c  standpoint  certain 


142  English  of  Military  Communicationg 

courses  open  to  him.     The  general-in-chief  on  the  spot  is 
the  one  to  make  the  decision. 

To  progress  in  our  examples,  let  us  take  one  issued  bj' 
the  general-in-chief  to  one  of  his  subordinate  generals. 

Headquarters  of  the  Army, 
Washington,  Feb.  23,  1862. 
Maj.-Gen.  B.  F.  Butler, 
U.  S.  Volunteers, — 

General: — You  are  assigned  to  the  command  of  the  land 
forces  destined  to  cooperate  with  the  navy,  in  the  attack 
upon  New  Orleans.  You  will  use  every  means  to  keep  your 
destination  a  profound  secret,  even  from  your  staff  offi- 
cers, with  the  exception  of  your  chief-of-staff,  and  Lieut. 
Weitzel,  of  the  engineers.  The  force  at  your  disposal  will 
consist  of  the  first  13  regiments  named  in  your  memoran- 
dum handed  to  me  in  person,  the  21st  Indiana,  4th  Wiscon- 
sin, and  6th  Michigan  (old  and  good  regiments  from 
Baltimore). 

The  21st  Indiana,  4th  Wisconsin,  and  the  6th  Michi- 
gan, will  await  your  orders  at  Fort  Monroe. 

Two  companies  of  the  21st  Indiana,  are  well-drilled  as 
heavy  artillery.  The  cavalry  force  already  en  route  for 
Ship  Island,  will  be  sufficient  for  your  purposes. 

After  full  consultation  with  officers  well  acquainted  with 
the  country  in  which  it  is  proposed  to  operate,  I  have 
arrived  at  the  conclusion  that  (2)  two  light  batteries  fully 
equipped  and  (1)  one  without  horses,  will  be  all  that  are 
necessary. 

This  will  make  your  force  about  14,400  infantry,  275 
cavalry,  680  artillery;  total  15,255  men. 

The  commanding  general  of  the  Department  of  Key 
West,  is  authorized  to  loan  you,  temporarily,  2  regiments ; 
Fort  Pickens  can  probably  give  you  another,  which  will 
bring  your  force  to  nearly  18,000. 


English  of  Military  Communications  14S 

The  object  of  your  expedition  is  one  of  vital  impor- 
tance, the  capture  of  New  Orleans.  The  route  selected  is 
up  the  Mississippi  River,  and  the  first  obstacle  to  be 
encountered  (perhaps  the  only  one)  is  in  the  resistance 
of  Forts  St.  Philip  and  Jackson.  It  is  expected  that  the 
navy  can  reduce  these  works ;  in  that  case,  you  will,  after 
their  capture,  leave  a  sufficient  garrison  in  them  to  render 
them  perfectly  secure;  and  it  is  recommended,  that  on  the 
upward  passage,  a  few  heavy  guns,  and  some  troops,  be 
left  at  Pilot  Station  (at  the  forks  of  the  river),  to  cover 
a  retreat  in  the  event  of  disaster.  These  troops  and  guns, 
will,  of  course,  be  removed  as  soon  as  the  forts  are  cap- 
tured. 

Should  the  navy  fail  to  reduce  the  works,  you  will  land 
your  forces  and  siege  train,  and  endeavor  to  breach  the 
works,  silence  their  fire,  and  carry  them  by  assault. 

The  next  resistance  will  be  near  the  English  Bend,  where 
there  are  some  earthen  batteries ;  here  it  may  be  necessary 
for  you  to  land  your  troops  and  cooperate  with  the  naval 
attack,  although  it  is  more  than  probable,  that  the  navy, 
unassisted,  can  accomplish  the  result.  If  these  works  are 
taken,  the  city  of  New  Orleans  necessarily  falls.  In  that 
event,  it  will  probably  be  best  to  occupy  Algiers  with  the 
mass  of  your  troops,  also,  the  eastern  bank  of  the  river 
above  the  city ;  it  may  be  necessary  to  place  some  troops  in 
the  city  to  preserve  order,  but  if  there  appears  sufficient 
Union  sentiment  to  control  the  city,  it  may  be  best  for 
purposes  of  discipline  to  keep  your  men  out  of  the  city. 

After  obtaining  possession  of  New  Orleans,  it  will  be 
necessary  to  reduce  all  the  works  guarding  its  approaches 
from  the  east,  and  particularly  to  gain  the  Manchac  Pass. 
Baton  Rouge,  Berwick  Bay,  and  Fort  Livingston  will  next 
claim  your  attention. 


144  English  of  Military  Communications 

A  feint  at  Galveston  may  facilitate  the  objects  we  have 
in  view.  I  need  not  call  your  attention  to  the  necessity  of 
gaining  possession  of  all  the  rolling  stock  you  can  on  the 
different  railways,  and  of  obtaining  control  of  the  roads 
themselves.  The  occupation  of  Baton  Rouge  by  a  com- 
bined naval  and  land  force,  should  be  accomplished  as  soon 
as  possible  after  you  have  gained  New  Orleans.  Then 
endeavor  to  open  your  communication  with  the  northern 
column  by  the  Mississippi,  always  bearing  in  mind  the 
necessity  of  occupying  Jackson,  Mississippi,  as  soon  as 
you  can  safely  do  so,  either  after,  or  before  you  have 
effected  the  junction.  Allow  nothing  to  divert  you  from 
obtaining  possession  of  all  the  approaches  to  New  Orleans. 
When  that  object  is  accomplished  to  its  fullest  extent,  it 
will  be  necessary  to  make  a  combined  attack  on  Mobile,  in 
order  to  gain  possession  of  the  harbor  and  works,  as  well 
as  to  control  the  railway  terminus  at  the  city. 

In  regard  to  this,  I  will  send  more  detailed  instructions 
as  the  operations  of  the  northern  column  develop  them- 
selves. 

I  may  briefly  state  that  the  general  objects  of  the  expe- 
dition are :  First,  The  reduction  of  New  Orleans  and  all  its 
approaches :  then  Mobile  and  its  defenses :  then  Pensacola, 
Galveston,  etc.  It  is  probable  that  by  the  time  New 
Orleans  has  been  reduced  it  will  be  in  the  power  of  the 
government  to  reinforce  the  land  forces  sufficiently  to 
accomplish  all  these  objects;  in  the  meantime  you  will 
please  give  all  the  assistance  in  your  power  to  the  army 
and  navy  commanders  in  your  vicinity,  never  losing  sight 
of  the  fact,  that  the  great  object  to  be  achieved  is  the 
capture  and  firm  retention  of  New  Orleans. 
I  am,  etc., 

GEO.  B.  McCLELLAN, 
Maj.-'Oen.  Com*gf  U.  S.  A. 


English  of  Military  Communications  14fi 

General  McClellan  goes  more  into  detail  than  does  the 
President.  He  is  considering  the  situation  on  more  tech- 
nical lines.  Yet  he  does  not  go  beyond  the  limits  of 
strategy  in  outlining  the  general  plan.  He  still  conforms 
to  the  principles  of  letters  of  instruction.  If  we  were  to 
follow  General  Butler  in  his  journey  to  the  Gulf,  we  should 
perceive  in  his  orders  the  disappearance  of  the  strategic 
and  the  appearance  of  the  tactical  idea.  Later  we  should 
discover  one  of  his  brigade  commanders  actually  issuing  a 
field  order. 

Notice  in  the  last  example  how,  on  account  of  its  length, 
General  McClellan  has  made  a  neat  summary  of  the  whole. 
Notice  that  in  all  of  these  letters  the  writers  have  adhered 
to  the  principles  of  rhetoric ;  and  that  they  have  given  to 
the  recipient  a  unified  and  coherent  production.  Why? 
Because  the  will  of  the  commander  is  transmitted  more 
quickly  in  that  way. 

We  have  now  completed  the  consideration  of  the  expres- 
sion which  directly  affects  troops  in  the  field.  We  have 
written  the  field  message  which  brings  information  to  com- 
manders and  which  helps  them  to  make  an  estimate  of  a 
situation.  We  have  framed  the  field  order  which  grows 
out  of  that  estimate  and  which  transforms  the  decision  into 
action.  We  have  viewed  the  operation  order  which  is  no 
more  than  a  field  order  made  to  fit  trench  warfare.  We 
have  seen  orders  which  are  issued  in  connection  with  com- 
bat so  as  to  govern  the  movement  of  trains.  We  have 
read  letters  of  Instruction  which  are  written  by  higher  com- 
manders in  order  to  regulate  in  a  general  way  extensive 
movements.  All  of  these  communications  bear  specifically 
upon  the  effort  of  troops  toward  success  in  battle — the 
ultimate  object  of  all  military  training. 

In  leaving  this  most  important  part  of  our  professional 
work,  we  might  fake  wffh  us  tliis  one  iflea.     We  can  Wist 


146  English  of  Military  Communications 

express  ourselves  in  any  of  the  communications  we  have 
studied  by  having  all  the  thoughts  of  one  kind  together 
and  the  different  kinds  in  an  orderly  arrangement.  When- 
ever it  is  possible  we  should  keep  the  paragraph  sequence, 

(a)  Enemy. 

(b)  Own  troops. 

(c)  Plan. 


CHAPTER  XI 

THE  WAR  DIARY— THE  REPORT- 
ROUTINE  ORDERS 

We  have  heretofore  considered  those  communications 
which  aid  combat.  We  now  take  up  those  which  have  no 
direct  bearing  upon  the  outcome  of  an  engagement.  We 
have  seen  how  the  field  message  makes  possible  by  its  fresh 
information  the  plan  for  battle,  how  the  field  and  operation 
orders  frame  that  plan  for  battle,  how  the  order  maneu- 
vers the  trains  in  connection  with  battle,  and  how  letters 
of  instruction  issue  general  directions  for  a  campaign  of 
many  battles.  We  now  come  to  the  place  where  the 
maneuver,  enterprise,  or  undertaking  is  over.  For  a 
variety  of  future  benefits  we  must  have  a  record  of  those 
occurrences.  The  War  Diary  and  The  Report  are  the 
communications  which  perform  that  office. 

THE  WAR  DIARY 

Just  as  certain  individuals  keep  journals  of  their  lives, 
so  the  higher  military  units  keep  diaries  of  their  existences. 
"The  War  Diary  is  a  record  of  events  kept  in  campaign 
by  each  battalion  and  higher  organization  and  by  each 
ammunition,  supply,  engineer,  and  sanitary  train.  Entries 
are  made  daily  and  should  form  a  concise  history  of  the 
military  operations.  A  day  comprises  24  hours  covered 
by  the  date. 

Each  day's  record  will  commence  with  a  march  table,  or 
statement  of  the  operations  or  location  of  the  organiza- 
tion, including  an  account  of  weather,  roads,  camp,  health 
of  troops,  etc.,  and  a  statement  of  the  supply  of  ammuni- 


148  English  of  Military  Communications 

tion,  rations,  and  forage.  This  will  be  followed  by  a 
chronological  record  of  events,  including  time  and  place  of 
issue  and  receipt  of  orders  and  messages,  with  a  copy  or  a 
synopsis  of  contents. 

It  is  of  especial  importance  that  the  exact  hour  and 
place  at  which  movements  are  begun  and  ended,  and  orders 
or  important  messages  sent  or  received  be  noted.  After 
an  engagement,  the  war  diary  will  contain  a  report  of 
losses  and  captures  and  will  be  accompanied  by  a  sketch 
showing  the  positions  of  the  command  at  the  most  impor- 
tant phases. 

Each  day's  record  will  be  attested  by  the  commander 
or  by  the  adjutant;  and,  with  attached  copies  of  orders 
and  messages  sent  and  received,  will  be  forwarded  daily  to 
the  next  higher  commander,  who  as  soon  as  practicable, 
after  the  receipt  thereof,  will  forward  the  war  diary  direct 
to  the  War  Department. 

Commanders  of  armies,  or  of  units  not  components  of  a 
higher  command,  will  forward  their  war  diaries  direct  to 
the  War  Department."*  Thus  these  documents  become 
the  authentic  material  for  our  military  history. 

To  go  into  the  War  Diary  more  specifically,  let  us  tabu- 
late what  we  might  actually  state  therein.  We  should 
start  with  the  heading: 

War  Diary, 

8d  BattaUon,  72d  Infantry, 

3  May,  1920. 

The  date  in  this  case  would  cover  the  whole  period  from 
midnight  May  2/3  to  midnight  May  3/4. 

Since  a  march  would  most  likely  be  the  first  happening 
of  any  note  after  midnight  May  2/3,  the  diary  would  start 
with  a  march  table. 

•  Par.  85,  F.  S.  R. 


English  of  Militarif  Communications  149 

Reveille,  8-30  a.  m. 

Breakfast,  3-45  a.  m. 

First  call,  4-10  a.  m. 

Assembly,  4-15  a.  m. 

Head  of  column  moved  out,  4-17  a.  m. 

First  Halt  at  SQUARE  CORNERS,  6-02  a.  m. 

Second  Halt  at  LIBERTY,  6-51  a.  m. 

Third  Halt  at  MILES  RIVER,  6-41  a.  m. 

Fourth  Halt  at  SMITH'S  FARM,  7-47  a.  m. 

Message  from  C.  O.,  72d  Infantry;  received  400  yards 

west  HOPE  FARM,  8-40  a.  m. 
Fifth  Halt  at  Orchard  near  HOPE  FARM,  8-47  a.  m. 
Extent  of  march:     13-2  miles. 
Went  into  defensive  position  on  SILERS  RIDGE  at  9-16  a.  m. 
Right  of  I  Company  at  SILERS  FARM— Left  of  M  Company  at  raU 
fence  corner.    Began  building  standing  trench  at  9-26  a.  m.    Dinner, 
cooked  ration,  11  a.  m.     Finished  trenches,  saps,  and  entanglements 
4  p.  m.  Supper,  4-30  p.  m.  Bivouacked  800  yds.  in  rear  of  trenches 
at   8   p.   m.     Enemy's   harassing   patrol   wakened    command    at    11 
p.  m.;  otherwise  no  activity. 

Weather:  clear  and  cool.  Slight  rain  between  second  and  third 
halts. 

Roads:    good  metal  roads  entire  march. 
Camp:     Bivouac  grassy  gentle  slope — dry  ground. 
Water:     Spring  200  yds.  rear  of  center  of  position — capacity  for 
regiment. 

Health:  Command  generally  exhausted  after  march  with  full 
packs  and  with  60  rounds  per  man,  and  especially  after  digging.  On 
sick  report — 16;  absent  sick — 8. 

Ammunition:  On  hand,  including  amount  on  persons  of  men — 
118,200  rounds.  1  ammunition  wagon  returned  to  LIBERTY  at  12, 
noon,  for  refilling. 

Rations:    4  days'  supply  on  hand. 

Forage:  1  day's  forage  on  hand.  1  wagon  returned  to  LIBERTY 
at  2  p.  m.  to  refill. 

Losses:  1  private,  K  Company,  killed  by  enemy's  harassing 
patrol. 

Captures:    none. 

Road  and  Position  sketches  covering  day's  operations  enclosed. 
Copies  of  battalion  conunander's  march  and  defense  orders,  also 
copies  of  one  message  from  regimental  commander,  enclosed. 
By  order  of  Major  Jenkins: 

H.  E.  BOTTOMLY, 
Ist  Lieut.,  Bn,  Adj.  3d  Bn. 


150  English  of  Military  Communications 

The  original  of  the  above  is  sent  to  the  regimental  com- 
mander and  a  copy  is  retained  by  the  battalion. 

The  above  data,  supplemented  with  the  sketches,  mes- 
sages, and  orders  enclosed,  furnish  a  complete  history  of 
the  battalion's  doings  for  the  day. 

Blanks  are  furnished  from  the  War  Department  from 
time  to  time  to  enable  Adjutants  (whose  duty  it  is  to  keep 
the  War  Diary)  to  fill  in  the  data  more  quickly. 

REPORTS 

Reports  cover  a  wide  range  of  subjects.  When  a  leader 
is  in  doubt  as  to  whether  an  event  is  important  enough  to 
report,  he  had  better  take  the  wise  course  and  send  in  his 
description  of  what  has  happened.  Very  few  occurrences 
in  the  military  service  are  so  unessential  as  to  be  right- 
fully ignored. 

They  may  take  either  one  of  two  forms :  either  they  may 
be  dated,  headed  "Report  on  so-and-so"  (see  example  on 
following),  and  inclosed  with  a  letter  of  transmittal;  or 
they  may  themselves  be  in  the  form  of  letters  addressed 
directly  to  the  person  or  office  for  whom  they  are  destined. 

Reports  may  consist  of  expository  description  on  the 
one  hand  or  of  a  narration  on  the  other,  but  they  usually 
consist  of  a  combination  of  the  two. 

Here  is  an  example  of  highly  expository  description. 
It  is  the  report  upon  the  German  raid  which  was  given  us 
under  Operation  Orders. 

In  the  field,  12th  April,  1916. 

Captain  Wageker's  Report  on  the  Raid  on  the  Evening  of  11th 

April,  1916 
At  4  p.  m.  the  raiding  party  marched  from  Martinpuich  through 
Pozieres,    then    by    the    I.attorf    Graben — Regimentstrichter — Krebs 
Graben  to  the  Appointed  dug-outs  on  the  left  of  Sap  No.  3,  where 
the  evening  meal  was  found  ready  prepared. 


English  of  Military  Communications  161 

At  8  p.  m.  the  artillery  preparation  commenced  as  prearranged. 
Shortly  after  fire  was  opened,  the  whole  of  the  enemy's  position  from 
Windmiihle  to  Besenhecke  was  wrapped  in  greyish- white  smoke,  which 
the  wind  drove  back  over  Sap  No.  3  into  our  lines. 

By  8.10  p.  m.  it  was  impossible  to  remain  in  our  trench  east  of 
Sap  No.  3  without  wearing  a  gas  mask.  This  was  still  the  case  at 
8.20  p.  m.,  when  the  patrols  moved  forward  from  their  dug-outs  to 
the  Hohlweg,  in  the  order  Stradtmann,  Dumas,  Bohlefeld,  and 
Freund.  Lieutenant  Boenig  followed  close  behind  Lieutenant  Stradt- 
mann. 

By  8.26  p.  m.  the  party  was  posted  ready  in  the  Hohlweg.  The 
clouds  of  gas  and  smoke,  however,  still  hung  so  thick  over  the  enemy's 
trenches  that  it  was  impossible  to  distinguish  whether  our  own  shells 
were  still  falling  on  the  point  of  entry  or  whether  our  artillery  had 
already  lengthened  their  range. 

At  8.27  p.  m.  Lieutenant  Stradtmann  received  the  order  to  ad- 
vance to  the  attack  with  his  patrol.  Lieutenant  Boenig,  with  the  six 
stretcher  bearers,  left  the  Hohlweg  simultaneously  and  in  rear  of 
Stradtmann's  patrol,  and  posted  connecting  files,  whose  positions 
were  marked  by  red  signal  lamps  shaded  to  the  front  and  to  the  sides. 

At  8.28  p.  m.  Dumas'  and  Bohlefeld's  patrols  advanced.  FoUowing 
the  line  of  connecting  files,  they  reached  the  point  of  entry,  to  find 
that  Stradtmann's  patrol  was  already  in  possession  of  16  yards  of 
trench,  and  had  captured  three  prisoners.  The  latter  had  come  out  of 
their  dug-outs  just  as  Lieutenant  Stradtmann  appeared  in  front  of 
the  enemy's  trench.  They  carried  hand  grenades  and  rifles  with 
bayonets  fixed,  but  were  immediately  disarmed  by  Lieutenants 
Boenig  and  Stradtmann. 

Dumas'  patrol  immediately  turned  to  the  left  down  the  trench, 
and,  in  a  few  steps,  came  upon  a  half-destroyed  machine-gun  em- 
placement. Reservist  Nadolny,  of  Stradtmann's  patrol,  was  already 
occupied  in  digging  out  the  buried  machine  gun.  Lieutenant  Dumas 
penetrated  further  along  the  enemy's  trench,  and  soon  reached  the 
communication  trench  which  runs,  roughly  along  the  dividing  line 
between  Target  Sectors  79  and  80,  towards  the  Weisse  Steinmauer. 
At  this  point  a  large  dug-out  had  been  wrecked,  apparently  by  a 
direct  hit.  Lieutenant  Dumas  had  previously  sent  three  men  of  his 
patrol  along  behind  the  enemy's  trench;  they  reached  the  com- 
munication trench  about  11  yards  behind  the  front  line  trench.  A 
few  Englishmen,  who  came  out  of  this  communication  trench,  en- 
deavored to  reach  the  parados  of  the  front  line  trench,  whence  they 
evidently  intended  to  defend  it.  They  were,  however,  surprised  by  our 
three  men  and  bayoneted. 

Meanwhile,  Lieutenant  Dumas,  with  the  rest  of  his  men,  forced  his 
way  further  along  the  trench,  and  just  north  of  Besenhecke  reached 
the  communication  trench  which  leads  to  the  brown  prolongation  of 


152  English  of  Military  Communicationt 

the  Weisse  Steinmauer  (white  stone  wall).  They  passed  another 
wrecked  dug-out,  in  which  dead  bodies  were  seen.  Adjoining  the 
above-mentioned  communication  trench,  another  large  dug-out  was 
found,  which  the  patrol  intended  to  clear.  As,  however,  a  number 
of  Englishmen  advanced  upon  Dumas'  patrol  from  the  communica- 
tion trench  and  alongside  it,  a  melee  ensued  with  grenades,  rifles  and 
pistols,  in  the  course  of  which  the  enemy,  after  suffering  evident  loss, 
either  retreated  or  surrendered,  while  none  of  Dumas'  patrol  received 
wounds  of  any  account. 

Meanwhile,  Lieutenant  Bohlefeld  advanced  along  the  enemy's 
trench  to  the  right  of  the  point  of  entry,  and,  in  a  few  yards,  came 
to  three  large  dug-outs,  of  which  one  was  wrecked  and  full  of  dead 
and  wounded.  At  his  summons,  the  enemy  came  out  of  the  others 
and  surrendered  without  more  ado.  Lieutenant  Bohlefeld  sent  back 
the  prisoners  and  asked  for  reinforcements  in  order  to  clear  the  dug- 
outs, undertaking,  meanwhile,  to  hold  the  enemy's  trench  with  two 
men. 

At  8.30  p.  m.,  as  no  noise  came  from  the  point  of  entry,  or  from 
the  right  of  the  same,  while  from  a  point  some  65  yards  to  the  left 
shots  and  reports  of  grenades  could  be  heard,  I  ordered  Vice  Sergeant 
Major  Elb  to  advance  with  five  men  and  reinforce  Dumas'  patrol. 
Lieutenant  Erb,  the  regimental  adjutant,  attached  himself  to  this 
party.  He  was  wearing  an  oxygen-breathing  apparatus  and  had  been 
waiting  in  the  Hohlweg.  Shortly  after,  the  sounds  of  fighting  ceased 
on  the  left,  and  the  first  batch  of  prisoners  was  brought  back  from 
the  enemy's  trench.  I  had  come  to  the  conclusion  that  we  had  the 
upper  hand  everywhere,  especially  on  the  right,  and  with  a  view  to 
exploiting  fully  our  success,  I  ordered  Lieutenant  Freund  to  cross  the 
enemy's  trench  at  the  point  of  entry  with  15  men  of  the  supports, 
and  to  attack  the  Spion  from  the  rear.  At  the  same  time,  I  sent  for- 
ward Vice-Sergeant  Major  Wolfle  with  4  men  to  reinforce  Lieutenant 
Bohlefeld. 

In  order  to  have  a  reserve  in  hand  for  meeting  all  eventualities,  I 
ordered  up  the  commanders  of  the  two  groups  on  the  flank  of  the  12th 
Company,  which  was  stationed  immediately  to  the  right  of  Sap  No.  3. 
The  groups  had  been  warned  in  the  afternoon  and  given  the  necessary 
instructions.  Whilst  Vice-Sergeant  Majors  Elb  and  Wolfle,  with  their 
men,  went  in  search  of  Dumas'  and  Bohlefeld's  patrols.  Lieutenant 
Freund  dashed  across  the  enemy's  trench  at  the  point  of  entry  and 
followed  it  along  to  the  right  as  far  as  the  communication  trench 
which  leads  into  the  front  line  trench  near  the  Spion.  Freund's  patrol 
leapt  into  the  enemy's  front  line  trench  on  both  sides  of  the  com- 
munication trench,  captured  10  men  almost  without  a  struggle,  and 
secured  several  rifles  and  articles  of  equipment.  A  few  Englishmen 
who  offered  resistance  were  bayoneted;  Volunteer  Herrmann,  of  the 


"■  English  of  Military  Communicationt  153 

7th  Company,  and  Lance  Corporal  Haufler,  of  the  4th  Company,  par- 
ticularly distinguished  themselves.  A  few  Englishmen  attempted  to 
get  away,  but  were  shot  dead. 

Volunteer  Herrmann  further  discovered  an  extemporized  trench 
mortar.  The  latter  could  not  be  carried  oflP,  however,  as  it  was  secure- 
ly built  in.  Vice-Sergeant  Major  Wolfle,  who  arrived  on  the  scene 
shortly  after,  destroyed  the  trench  mortar  as  well  as  he  could  with 
hand  grenades  and  pistol  shots. 

Bohlefeld's  reinforced  patrol  had  accompanied  the  advance  of 
Freund's  patrol  along  the  trench,  and  came  across  three  or  four 
more  wrecked  dug-outs,  which  were  filled  with  dead.  Individuals 
standing  about  in  the  trench  were  killed  by  the  patrol  or  made 
prisoner.  During  this  affair.  Under  Officer  Nossler,  of  the  11th 
Company,  repeatedly  distinguished  himself. 

Whilst  our  party  was  breaking  into  the  enemy's  trenches  or 
perhaps  even  before,  a  party  of  the  enemy,  approximately  25  to  30 
strong,  succeeded  in  getting  away  from  the  front  line  trench  and 
making  their  way  back  to  the  Weisse  Steinmauer,  but  were  again 
driven  back  by  our  artillery  fire,  and  now  came  running  towards 
Stradtmann's  patrol.  The  latter,  apprehending  a  counter-attack, 
opened  fire.  Ersatz  Reservist  Walzer,  of  the  11th  Company,  followed 
by  Under  Officer  Staiger,  of  the  10th  Company  and  others,  raised  a 
cheer  and  charged  the  Englishmen,  bayoneting  two  of  them.  Those 
who  did  not  put  up  their  hands  and  surrender,  were  killed. 

Lieutenant  Erb  had  soon  caught  up  Dumas'  patrol  and  took  part 
in  the  subsequent  fighting,  which  was  practically  continuous,  for 
almost  every  one  of  the  enemy  ofi'ered  resistance.  With  hand  grenade 
and  pistol,  Dumas'  patrol  killed  more  than  20  of  the  enemy,  besides 
wounding  a  large  number.  In  this  fighting  Volunteer  Hees,  of  the 
6th  Company,  particularly  distinguished  himself.  Always  to  the 
fore,  he  alone  accounted  for  several  Englishmen.  On  our  side  only 
one  man  was  slightly  wounded. 

In  consequence  of  the  events  described  above,  Dumas'  patrol 
remained  in  the  enemy's  trench  considerably  longer  than  intended. 
When  all  the  other  patrols  had  returned  to  the  Hohlweg,  the  Dumas- 
Erb  patrol  was  still  missing. 

Hereupon,  Lieutenants  Boenig  and  Stradtmann,  with  several  non- 
commissioned officers  and  men,  went  back  to  the  enemy's  lines  and 
searched  the  trench  to  the  left  until  they  met  the  Dumas-Erb  patrol 
on  its  way  back.  Here  again  Under  Officer  Nossler,  of  the  11th 
Company,  110th  Reserve  Infantry  Regiment,  distinguished  himself. 

At  8.50  p.  m.,  the  last  men  of  the  entire  party  had  returned  to  the 
Hohlweg  and  went  back  to  their  dug-outs. 

At  8.61  p.  m.,  the  first  shell  fell  on  the  front  line  trenches  east  of 
Sap  No.  8. 


154  English  of  Military  Communications 

At  8.57  p.  m.,  the  artillery  commander  was  informed  that  the 
artillery  fire  could  be  gradually  broken  off. 

At  9  p.  m.,  a  heavy  battery  near  Albert  dropped  a  few  shells 
near  Sap  No.  3. 

At  9.05  p.  m.,  the  conclusion  of  the  operation  was  reported. 
The  following  were  captured:     24  unwounded   and  5   wounded 
prisoners,  1  Lewis  gun,  1   rifle  with  telescopic  sights,  20  ordinary 
rifles,  and  a  large  number  of  steel  helmets,  belts  with  ammunition 
pouches,  packs,  haversacks,  and  gas  helmets. 

Our  casualties  consisted  of  one  man  slightly  wounded  in  the  fore- 
head by  a  splinter  from  a  hand  grenade.  He  was  bandaged  in  the 
advanced  dressing-station  and  immediately  returned  to  the  patrol. 

(Signed)  WAGENER, 

Captain  and  Company  ComTnander, 
40  copies,  as  appendices  to  the  Report  of  the 
110th  Reserve  Infantry  Regiment  on  the  raid  of 
the  11th  April,  1916. 

A  more  narrative  form  of  report  is  represented  by  the 
following  extract  from  Gen.  Bragg's  report  during  the 
Civil  War: 

"To  meet  our  successful  advance  and  retrieve  his  losses  in  the  front 
of  his  left,  the  enemy  early  transferred  a  portion  of  his  reserve  from 
his  left  to  that  flank,  and  by  2  o'clock  had  succeeded  in  concentrating 
such  a  force  on  Lieutenant  General  Hardee's  front  as  to  check  his 
further  progress.  Our  two  lines  had,  by  this  time,  become  almost 
blended,  so  weak  were  they  by  losses,  exhaustion,  and  extension  to 
cover  the  enemy's  whole  front.  As  early  as  10  a.  m.  Major-General 
Breckinridge  was  called  on  for  one  brigade,  and  soon  after  for  a 
second,  to  reinforce  or  act  as  a  reserve  to  General  Hardee.  His 
reply  to  the  first  call  represented  the  enemy  as  crossing  Stone's  River 
in  heavy  force  in  his  immediate  front;  and  on  receiving  the  second 
order  he  informed  me  they  had  already  crossed  in  heavy  force  and 
were  advancing  on  him  in  two  lines.  He  was  immediately  ordered  not 
to  wait  attack  but  to  advance  and  meet  them.  About  this  same  time 
a  report  reached  me  that  a  heavy  force  of  the  enemy's  infantry  was 
advancing  on  the  Lebanon  Road  about  five  miles  in  Breckinridge's 
front.  Brigadier-General  Pegram,  who  had  been  sent  to  that  road 
to  cover  the  flank  of  the  infantry  with  the  cavalry  brigade  (save  two 
regiments,  detached  with  Wheeler  and  Wharton),  was  ordered  for- 
ward immediately  to  develop  such  movement.  The  orders  for  the 
two  brigades  from  Breckinridge  were  countermanded,  whilst  dis- 
positions were  made  at  his  request  to  reinforce  him.  Before  they 
could  be  carried  out,  the  movements  ordered  disclosed  the  facts  that 


Englith  of  Military  Communication*  155 

no  force  had  crossed  Stone's  River;  that  the  only  enemy  in  our  im- 
mediate front  there  was  a  small  body  of  sharpshooters,  and  that 
there  was  no  advance  on  the  Lebanon  Road. 

"These  unfortunate  misapprehensions  on  that  part  of  the  field 
(which,  with  proper  precaution,  could  not  have  existed)  withheld 
from  active  operation  three  fine  brigades  until  the  enemy  had  suc- 
ceeded in  chedun^  our  progress,  had  reestablished  his  lines,  and  had 
collected  many  of  his  broken  battalions." 

The  above  example,  in  addition  to  its  value  as  a  narra- 
tive report,  illustrates  the  dependence  of  a  commander 
upon  proper  information. 

ROUTINE  ORDERS 

Routine  Orders  preserve  their  normal  tenor  in  peace  or 
war.  They  have  to  do  with  the  administration  of  the 
military  service,  so  that  a  state  of  campaign  has  very  little 
influence  upon  their  character. 

General  Orders. 

Special  Orders. 

Circulars. 

Bulletins. 

Memoranda. 

General  Orders  "include  generally,  (1)  all  detailed 
instructions  necessary  in  carrying  out  certain  general 
regulations  or  orders  issued  from  superior  headquarters; 
(2)  all  standing  instructions,  to  the  end  that  frequent 
repetitions  may  be  avoided;  and  (3)  proceedings  of  general 
and  special  courts-martial." 

General  Orders  are  issued  by  commanders  of  armies, 
field  armies,  corps,  divisions,  brigades,  regiments,  separate 
battalions,  posts,  departments,  and  districts. 

"When  necessary,  orders  are  used  by  commanders  of 
battalions  forming  parts  of  regiments,  and  for  smaller 
units  and  detachments,  for  the  same  class  of  instructions 
as  are  promulgated  by  higher   commanders   in   general 


They  consist  of    < 


156  English  of  Military  Communications 

orders."  In  other  words  orders  is  a  term  used  to  designate 
those  instructions  issued  by  commanders  of  divisions  and  of 
separate  brigades  in  regard  to  trains,  and  also  a  term  used 
by  battalions  and  smaller  units  to  designate  those  instruc- 
tions corresponding  to  general  orders  for  higher  units. 

Here  is  an  example  of  a  General  Order  from  the  War 
Department. 

GENERAL  ORDERS,  WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

No.  2  Washington,  January  4,  1917. 

1.  An  examination  of  majors,  captains,  and  first  lieutenants  of 
the  Regular  Army,  with  a  view  to  their  selection  for  appointment  to 
fill  vacancies  in  the  grade  of  major  in  the  Judge  Advocate  General's 
Department,  will  be  held  at  the  headquarters  of  the  Eastern,  Central, 
Western,  Southern,  Hawaiian  Departments,  the  headquarters  of  the 
United  States  troops  in  the  Panama  Canal  Zone,  the  headquarters  of 
the  Philippine  Department,  and  the  headquarters  of  the  16th  infantry, 
Tientsin,  China,  beginning  at  8  a.  m.,  on  May  10,  1917,  or  as  soon 
thereafter  as  practicable.  No  oflBcer  who  has  not  served  as  a  com- 
missioned officer  of  the  Regular  Army  for  at  least  eight  years  will  be 
regarded  as  eligible  to  take  the  examination. 

2.  Eligible  officers  who  desire  to  take  the  examination  will  make 
application  to  the  commanding  officer  of  that  one  of  the  commands 
mentioned  in  the  preceding  paragraph  in  which  they  are  stationed, 
and  each  of  such  commanding  officers  is  authorized  to  issue  the  neces- 
sary orders  to  assemble  applicants  at  his  headquarters  on  the  date 
set  for  the  examination.        •        •        •        * 

8.  The  examination  will  be  supervised  at  each  headquarters  by 
the  judge  advocate  or  the  officer  acting  as  such.  If  the  acting  judge 
advocate  shall  apply  to  take  the  examination  and  is  the  only  judge 
advocate  present  at  such  headquarters,  the  commanding  officer  of  the 
command  will  detail  some  other  suitable  officer  to  supervise  the 
examination. 

4.  On  the  day  and  hour  set  for  the  beginning  of  the  examination, 
each  candidate  will  deliver  to  the  officer  supervising  the  examination  a 
signed  statement  including: 

(a)  A  brief  statement  concerning  the  candidate's  education  and 
experience  both  legal  and  general; 

(b)  A  list  of  persons  who  are  familiar  with  the  candidate's  quali- 
fications along  legal  lines,  with  the  address  of  each  person; 

(c)  One  or  more  briefs  or  other  law  memoranda,  not  exceeding 
ten,  prepared  by  the  candidate  and  made  use  of  by  him  in  the  solu- 
tion of  legal  questions,  whether  moot  or  practical; 


English  of  Military  Communicationi  157 

(d)  A  specific  list,  as  complete  as  practicable,  of  general  court- 
martial  or  civil  court  trials  in  which  the  candidate  has  participated 
either  as  prosecutor  or  counsel; 

(e)  Copies  of  or  specific  references  to  the  applicant's  published 
writings,  whether  of  legal  or  other  character,  which  he  may  desire  to 
have  considered; 

(f)  Outline  of  service  of  candidate  since  his  entry  into  the  mili- 
tary establishment; 

(g)  Any  other  matter  the  candidate  may  desire  to  present  for 
consideration. 

(2607125,  A.  G.  O.) 
By  order  of  The  Secretary  of  War: 

H.  L.  SCOTT, 
OflScial:  Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 

H.  P.  McCain, 

The  Adjutant  General. 

Here  is  an  example  of  a  General  Order  publishing  the 

result  of  a  General  Court-Martial. 

GENERAL  ORDERS,  WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

No.  3  Washington,  January  6,  1917. 

Before  a  general  court-martial  which  convened  at  Nogales,  Ariz., 
October  26,  1916,  pursuant  to  Special  Orders,  No.  268,  October  14, 
1916,  as  amended  in  Special  Orders,  No.  273,  October  19,  1916, 
Southern  Department,  and  of  which  Lieut.  Col.  George  A.  Skinner, 
Medical  Corps,  was  president,  and  Capt.  Sherman  A.  White,  12th 
Infantry,  judge  advocate,  was  arraigned  and  tried — 

Capt.  John  Smith,  U.  S.  Infantry. 

Charge  I. — "Conduct  to  the  prejudice  of  good  order  and  military 
discipline  in  violation  of  the  62d  Article  of  War." 

One  specification. 

Charge  II. — "Conduct  unbecoming  an  officer  and  a  gentleman  in 
violation  of  the  61st  Article  of  War." 

Two  specifications. 

To  which  charges  and  specifications  the  accused  pleaded  "Not 
Guilty." 

FINDINGS 

Of  the  Specification,  1st  Charge,  and  of  the  1st  Charge,  "Not 
Guilty." 

Of  the  Specifications,  2d  Charge,  and  of  the  2d  Charge,  "Guilty." 
SENTENCE 

"To  be  dismissed  the  service  of  the  United  States." 

The  sentence  having  been  approved  by  the  convening  authority 
and  the  record  of  trial  forwarded  for  the  action  of  the  President 
under  the  106th  Article  of  War,  the  following  are  his  orders  thereon: 


158  English  of  Military  Communicationt 

The  sentence  of  dismissal  imposed  by  the  general  court-martial  in 
the  foregoing  case  of  Captain  John  Smith,  U.  S.  Infantry,  is  hereby 
confirmed  and  will  be  carried  into  execution. 

Woodrow  Wilson. 
The  White  House, 
8  January,  1917. 
Capt.  John  Smith,  U.  S.  Infantry,  ceases  to  be  an  officer  of  the 
Army  from  January  6,  1917. 
(2495592,  A.  G.  O.) 
By  Order  of  The  Secretary  of  War: 

H.  L.  SCOTT. 
Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 
OFFICIAL: 
H.  P.  McCAIN, 

The  Adjutant  General. 

Here  is  an  example  of  a  General  Order  of  a  Territorial 
Department. 

GENERAL  ORDERS,     |  HEADQUARTERS  EASTERN 

No.  1.  ]  DEPARTMENT, 

Governors  Island,  N.  Y.,  January  1,  1916. 
This    order    supersedes    General    Orders,    No.    1,    Headquarters 
Eastern   Department,   dated  January    1,    1915,   and   all   amendatory 
orders  thereto,  together  with  all  bulletins  published  heretofore. 
BY  COMMAND  OF  MAJOR  GENERAL  WOOD: 

EDWIN  F.  GLENN, 
Colonel,  General  Staff, 
Official:  .  Chief  of  Staff. 

W.  A.  SIMPSON, 
Adjutant  General, 
Adjutant. 

The  above  order  is  the  first  page  of  an  alphabetical  list 
of  general  orders  in  force  in  the  Department.  Some  of 
them  have  been  originated  by  the  Department  Commander 
and  some  have  been  made  to  comply  with  War  Department 
instructions. 

The  general  order  of  a  Department  covering  court- 
martial  cases  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  War  Department, 
with  the  exception  of  the  caption  which  is  given  below. 


English  of  Military  Communications  159 

General  Court-Martial     |  HEADQUARTERS  EASTERN 

Orders,  No.  «.  j  DEPARTMENT. 

Governors  Island,  N.  Y.,  Jan.  22,  191(1. 
Here  is  an  example  of  a  Post  General  Order. 

Headquarters  United  States  Military  Academy, 

West  Point,  N.  Y.,  February  27,  1917. 
General    Orders,  | 
No.  7.  y 

1.  A  vertical  filing  system  (the  War  Department  Correspondence 
File,  a  subjective  decimal  classification  for  arranging  and  filing  War 
Department  correspondence)  will  be  used  exclusively  in  recording 
and  filing  correspondence  at  these  headquarters  and  also  in  the 
offices  of  the  Quartermaster  and  of  the  Treasurer  on  and  after  March 
1,  1917. 

2.  The  operation  of  General  Orders,  No.  92,  War  Department, 
1909,  as  modified  by  subsequent  orders,  prescribing  the  card  record 
system  now  in  use  generally  at  administrative  headquarters,  has  been 
suspended  by  the  War  Department  as  far  as  these  headquarters  is 
concerned. 

8.  The  name  of  the  writer  signing  an  original  paper  will  be  In- 
serted on  carbon  copies  that  are  forwarded.  One  carbon  copy  of 
all  typewritten  reports,  letters,  and  indorsements  (except  short, 
routine  indorsements),  will  be  made  on  standard  letter  size  paper  (not 
perforated)  for  use  in  the  records  at  these  headquarters.  Such  copy 
will  be  distinctly  marked  "For  Headquarters  Records,"  and  will  not 
be  withdrawn  at  subordinate  offices. 

4.  Copies  of  the  publication  entitled  "War  Department  Corres- 
pondence File"  and  Circular  No.  1,  War  Department,  March  24,  1914, 
explaining  and  giving  instructions  as  to  the  operation  of  this  system, 
will  be  supplied  by  The  Adjutant  General  of  the  Army  upon  applica- 
tion direct. 

By  order  of  Colonel  Biddle: 

C.  C.  CARTER, 
Major,  C.  A.  C, 
A  djutant. 

If  a  Post  General  Order  covers  a  court-martial  case 
tried  by  a  general  court,  the  order  number  will  appear 
thus: 

General   Court-Martial  | 
Orders,  No.  4.         ] 

If  it  covers  one  tried  by  a  special  court,  it  will  appear 
thus: 


l60  English  of  Military  Communications 

Special     Court-Martial  ( 
Orders,  No.  4.         ^ 
The  separate  battalion  or  company  would  Issue  orders 
on  the  same  general  plan  as  post  general  orders.     The 
6rder  number  would  appear  thus : 
Orders:       | 
No.  6.        I 

SPECIAL  ORDERS  differ  from  General  Orders  In  that 
the  former  refer  to  Individuals. 

Here  Is  an  example  of  a  War  Department  Special  Order. 

SPECIAL     ORDERS  |  WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

No.   289.  5  Washington,  December  11,  1916. 

1.  The  leave  of  absence  on  account  of  sickness  granted  John  J. 
Nobbo,  First  Lieutenant,  13th  Cavalry,  in  Special  Orders,  No.  196, 
War  Department,  August  22,  1916,  is  extended  three  months  on 
surgeon's  certificate  of  disability,  and  upon  the  expiration  of  this 
leave  Lieut.  Nobbo  will  report  to  the  commanding  officer.  Fort  Riley, 
Kan.,  for  examination  as  to  his  physical  condition  by  the  surgeon  at 

the  post. 

•  •  *  •  * 

These   Special  Orders   then  take   up   twenty  different 

individuals  in  twenty  paragraphs  and  end  with, — 

22.  Capt.  Alfred  W.  Perkins,  Infantry,  Detached  Officers'  List, 
will  repair  to  this  city  and  report  in  person  to  the  Chief  of  StaflF  for 
duty  in  connection  with  the  Reserve  Officers'  Training  Corps,  and 
upon  completion  of  this  duty  will  return  to  his  proper  station.  The 
travel  directed  is  necessary  in  the  military  service. 
(2503282,  A.  G.  O.) 
By  Order  of  The  Secretary  of  War: 

H.  L.  SCOTT, 
OFFICIAL:  Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 

H.    P.   McCAIN, 
The  Adjutant  General. 

The  separate  paragraphs  are  also  made  up  into  extract 
copies  as  follows: 
SPECIAL    ORDERS,  I 
No.  289.  J 

WAR   DEPARTMENT, 
Washington,  December  11,  1916. 

Extract 

•  *  *  »  • 

8.     Private  Clifford  H.  Worthington,  Military  Academy  Detach- 
ment of  Field  Artillery,  West  Point,  N.  Y.,  is  transferred  as  private 


English  of  Military  Communications  l6l 

second  class  to  the  Ordnance  Department  and  is  assigned  to  duty  at 
that  post. 


BY  ORDER  OF  THE  SECRETARY  OF  WAR: 

H.  L.  SCOTT, 
OFFICIAL:  Major  General,  Acting  Chief  of  Staff. 

H.  P.  McCAIN, 
The  Adjutant  General. 

Departments,  Posts,  Regiments,  Brigades,  Divisions, 
Corps,  Field  Armies,  and  Armies  follow  the  same  scheme  as 
above  for  their  Special  Orders. 

CIRCULARS  are  issued  seldom  but  have  great  force. 
They  are  signed  directly  by  the  heads  of  the  War  Depart- 
ment, Quartermaster  Corps,  Ordnance  Department  or  of 
whatever  bureau  prints  the  circular. 

Here  is  an  example  of  a  Circular  issued  by  the  War  De- 
partment. 

WAR  DEPARTMENT, 
Washington,  January  24,  1917. 
CIRCULAR: 

The  following  resolution  was  adopted  by  the  Senate  on  January 
16,  1908,  and  is  now  one  of  its  standing  rules: 

Resolved,  That  no  communications  from  heads  of  departments, 
commissioners,  chiefs  of  bureaus,  or  other  executive  officers,  except 
when  authorized  or  required  by  law,  or  when  made  in  response  to  a 
resolution  of  the  Senate,  wiU  be  received  by  the  Senate  unless  such 
communications  shall  be  transmitted  to  the  Senate  by  the  President. 

•  •••.* 

Chiefs  of  bureaus  and  others,  in  preparing  communications  for 
the  signature  of  the  Secretary  of  War,  will  please  conform  to  the 
foregoing  rules  and  instructions. 

NEWTON  D.  BAKER, 

Secretary  of  War. 

Here  is  a  Circular  issued  by  the  Quartermaster  Corps. 

WAR  DEPARTMENT, 
Office  of  the  Quartermaster  General,  U.  S.  Army, 
Washington,  D.  C,  August  27,  1917. 


l69  English  of  Military  Communication* 

Circular,  | 

No.  9.  ; 

Purchases  of  Supplies 
1.    During  the  continuance  of  the  present  emergency  the  following 
regulations  are  prescribed  under  the  authority  contained  in  the  act 
of  March  4,  1915: 

(a)  Where  the  time  for  delivery  is  not  to  exceed  30  days  from 

date  of  acceptance  of  the  award,  irrespective  of  the 
amount  involved,  supplies  may  be  procured  by  contract  of 
brief  form  after  the  manner  of  proposal  and  acceptance 
agreement,  in  accordance  with  form  to  be  authorized  there- 
for. 

(b)  The  regulations  prescribed  by  Circular  No.  7,  OfiBce  of  the 

Quartermaster  General,  March  23,  1916,  so  far  as  in 
conflict  with  the  foregoing,  are  hereby  suspended  during 
the  continuance  of  the  present  emergency. 

HENRY  G.  SHARPE, 
10916 — 17  Quartermaster  General,  U.  S.  Army. 

BULLETINS  are  issued  by  the  War  Department  and 
territorial  Departments.  Their  purpose  is  the  publica- 
tion of  information.  They  are  more  numerous  than  Cir- 
culars. 

Here  is  the  first  page  of  a  Bulletin  of  the  War  Depart- 
ment. 

BULLETIN     [  WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

No.   18.  J  Washington,  April  6,  1917. 

The  following  digest  of  opinions  of  the  Judge  Advocate  General 
of  the  Army,  for  the  month  of  March,  1917,  and  of  certain  decisions 
of  the  Comptroller  of  the  Treasury  and  of  courts,  together  with  notes 
on  military  justice  prepared  under  the  direction  of  the  Judge  Ad- 
vocate General,  and  a  compilation  of  Federal  and  State  laws  pro- 
hibiting discrimination  against  the  uniform,  is  published  for  the 
information  of  the  service  in  general. 
(2626413  B-A.  G.  O.) 
BY  ORDER  OF  THE  SECRETARY  OF  WAR: 

H.  L.  SCOTT, 
OFFICIAL:  Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 

H.  P.  McCAIN, 
The  Adjutant  General. 
89793-17—1 

Then  follow  twenty-three  pages  of  the  opinions  of  the 
Judge  Advocate  General. 


English  of  Military  Communications  16$ 

Here  is  another  first  page  of  a  War  Department  Bul- 
letin. 

BULLETIN  I  WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

No.  14.       y  Washington,  March  12,  1917. 

The  accompanying  tabulated  statement  shows  the  standing  of 
organizations  of  the  Coast  Artillery  Corps  based  on  figures  of  merit 
attained  at  target  practice  during  the  year  1916,  and  the  hits  by 
calibers  at  various  ranges  in  1916. 

Slight  errors  in  the  figures  of  merit  have  been  corrected  without 
returning  the  reports  to  the  organizations  concerned. 
(2537101,  A.  G.  O.) 
BY  ORDER  OF  THE  SECRETARY  OF  WAR: 

H.  L.  SCOTT, 
OFFICIAL:  Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 

H.  P.  McCAIN, 

The  Adjutant  GeneraL 
83601-17—1 

What  follows  for  nine  pages  is  a  table  of  statistics  on 
Coast  Artillery  firing  records. 

Territorial  Departments  issues  Bulletins  seldom.  The 
pamphlets  when  they  do  appear,  follow  the  same  plan  as 
those  of  the  War  Department. 

MEMORANDA,  are  issued  by  posts,  regiments,  and 
separate  battalions — ^by  the  smaller  units.  Memora/nda 
deal  with  subjects  which  are  not  so  important  in  a  military 
way  as  the  foregoing  orders.  They  may  be  numbered,  as 
in  the  following  case,  when  they  are  of  a  permanent  nature. 
HEADQUARTERS  UNITED  STATES  MILITARY  ACADEMY, 

West  Point,  N.  Y.,  October  8,  1917. 
Memorandum,     | 
No.  34.  ] 

To  prevent  damage  and  danger  from  fires,  parents  and  others  will 
exercise  great  care  in  allowing  children  under  age  of  discretion  to 
have  access  to,  or  to  handle  matches,  or  in  allowing  them  to  burn 
leaves  or  other  combustibles  in  any  part  of  the  Post. 
(680.23) 
By  order  of  Colonel  Tillman: 

D.  H.  TORREY, 
Captain  of  Infantry, 
Adjutant. 


164  English  of  Military  Communications 

They  may  be  unnumbered,  as  in  the  following  case,  when 
they  are  of  a  temporary  nature. 

West  Point,  N.  Y.,  February  27,  1917. 
MEMORANDUM: 

Residents  of  the  Post  are  informed  that  a  case  of  chicken  pox 
exists  at  the  Hotel. 

The  usual  precautions  against  spreading  the  disease  are  enjoined. 

(Tel.  memo.  Surgeon.) 
By  order  of  Colonel  Biddle: 

C.  C.  CARTER, 
Major,  C.  A.  C, 
Adjutant. 

NOTE. — The  War  Department  issues  also  certain 
Special  Regulations  for  particular  General  Orders  to 
which  it  wishes  to  call  attention,  and  puts  out  in  pamphlet 
form  Changes  to  Regulations.  Both  Special  Regulations 
and  Changes  belong  to  the  class  of  the  General  Order,  and, 
therefore,  are  not  taken  up  separately  here. 


CHAPTER  XII 

OFFICIAL  CORRESPONDENCE— EX- 
PLANATIONS—LECTURES 

Official  Correspondence  includes  official  letters,  rolls, 
returns,  estimates,  requisitions,  and  routine  reports. 

The  Official  Letter  includes  (1)  letters  to  persons  in  the 
military  service,  (2)  letters  to  persons  outside  the  military 
service,  and  (3)  official  telegrams. 

Number  1  has  its  particular  military  form  which  must 
be  precisely  followed.    It  consists  of 
r  The  Brief 
The  Body 
The  Ending 
Indorsements 
Enclosures 
The  Brief  consists  of  the  following  in  the  order 
The  Heading 
From  Whom  Sent 
To  Whom  Sent 
The  Subject 
An  example  of  a  Brief  would  be: 

Hq.  Eastern  Department, 
Governors  Island,  N.  Y.,  May  21,  1940. 
From:     The  Adjutant. 
To:         Captain  James  L.  Douglas,  99th  Inf. 

(Through  C.  O.  Madison  Barracks,  N.  Y.) 
Subject:     Delay  in  submitting  report. 
Another  example  would  be: 

Company  A,  99th  Infantry, 
Madison  Barracks,  N.  Y.,  Jan.  9,  1940. 
From:     Commanding  Officer,  Co.  A,  99th  Inf. 
To:  The  Commanding  Officer. 

Subject:  Insufficiency  of  shoes. 


given 


166  English  of  Military  Communications 

Another  example  of  a  Brief  would  be : 

Madison  Barracks,  N.  Y., 

Jan.  10,  1940. 
From:     Captain  James  L.  Douglas,  99th  Inf. 
To:  The  Adjutant  General  of  the  Army 

(Through  C.  O.  Madison  Barracks,  N.  Y.) 
Subject:  Request  for  leave  of  absence. 

The  heading  consists  of  the  name  of  the  office,  place,  and 
date.  In  the  first  example  the  name  of  the  office  was 
"Headquarters,  Eastern  Department."  In  the  second, 
"Company  A,  99th  Infantry."  In  the  third,  there  was  no 
office  named  because  the  letter  was  written  by  an  officer  as 
an  individual  and  not  as  an  executive  of  an  organization. 
The  place  is  the  post-office  address  of  an  officer's  station  in 
any  case.  "Indefinite  expressions  of  locality,  which  do 
not  indicate  where  the  letter  was  written,"*  should  never 
be  used.  The  date  is  written  on  the  same  line  as  the  place, 
except  where  no  office  is  designated;  and  it  is  written  not 
as  in  communications  dealing  with  combat,  but  in  the 
ordinary  way. 

The  "From"  in  the  From  Whom  Sent  begins  one  line  (if 
typed,  two  lines)  below  the  heading  and  at  the  left-hand 
margin.  It  is  followed  by.  the  official  designation  of  the 
writer,  or  in  the  absence  of  any  official  designation,  the 
name  of  writer  with  his  rank  and  regiment,  corps,  or 
department.  The  rank  is  written  before  the  name;  and 
the  regiment,  corps,  or  department  after  the  name. 

Directly  below  the  "From"  is  placed  the  "To"  in  To 
WhoTn  Sent,  followed  by  the  official  designation  or  name 
of  the  person  addressed.  What  follows  "To"  is  written 
in  the  same  manner  as  what  follows  "From." 

*  Par.  777.  A.  R. 


English  of  Military  Communicationt  l67 

Directly  below  the  "To"  comes  the  word  "Subject" 
which  is  followed  hy  an  expression  which  will  give  the  gist 
of  the  Body  of  the  letter.  This  expression  wjll  be  boiled 
to  a  minimum  and  will  not  exceed  ten  words. 

The  words  "From,"  "To,"  and  "Subject"  will  be  imme- 
diately followed  by  colons,  and  the  "F,"  "T,"  and  "S"  wiU 
be  on  the  same  vertical  line. 

The  Body  of  the  letter  will  comprise  one  subject  only. 
A  leave  of  absence  and  a  decision,  for  instance,  will  not  be 
requested  in  the  same  letter.  Two  separate  communi- 
cations will  be  written.  This  procedure  is  merely  that  of 
carrying  out  the  principle  of  unity  in  the  whole  composi- 
tion. A  violation  in  this  regard  causes  endless  worry  to 
the  receiving  office  and  a  deserved  rebuke  for  the  writer. 

When  typewritten,  the  body  of  the  letter  will  be  single- 
spaced.  Double  spaces  will  be  used  between  paragraphs. 
The  body  should  begin  on  the  second  fold  of  the  paper. 

The  paragraphs  will  be  numbered,  will  each  contain  one 
topic,  and  will  be  arranged  in  a  logical  sequence  of  topics. 

Thus  if  we  were  to  write  out  the  Body  of  the  letter  for 
the  last  illustration  of  the  Brief y  we  should  have  it  appear 
about  as  follows: 

1. — I  request  a  leave  of  absence  for  five  months  to  take 
effect  on  or  about  February  1,  1940. 

2. — My  reasons  for  this  request  are  very  urgent  at  this 
time.  I  have  had  ten  years  of  continuous  service  without 
a  leave  of  any  kind,  and  I  feel  the  need  of  more  than  an 
ordinary  rest.  Besides,  my  private  affairs  are  in  such 
shape  that  the  matter  of  straightening  them  out  will 
require  at  least  all  of  the  period  requested. 

3. — My  address  while  on  leave  will  be  care  of  Astor 
Hotel,  New  York  City. 


168  English  of  Military  Communicationt 

The  Ending 
The  Signature, 
consists  of       The  Rank. 

The  Regiment,  Corps,  or  ) 

Department  C 

"Official  communications  will  be  signed  or  authenticated 
with  the  pen  and  not  by  facsimiles,  and  if  written  by  order, 
it  will  be  stated  by  whose  order.  Signatures  will  be 
plainly  and  legibly  written.  By  virtue  of  the  commission 
and  assignment  to  duty,  the  adjutant  of  any  command 
transacts  the  business  or  correspondence  of  that  command 
over  his  signature ;  but  when  orders  or  instructions  of  any 
kind  are  given,  the  authority  by  which  he  gives  the  order 
must  be  stated."* 

"The  Body  of  the  letter  will  be  followed  by  the  Signa- 
ture. If  the  Rank  and  the  Regiment,  Corps  or  Depart- 
ment of  the  writer  appear  at  the  beginning  of  the  letter, 
they  will  not  appear  after  his  name;  but  if  they  do  not 
appear  at  the  beginning  of  the  letter,  they  will  follow  under 
his  name."f 

To  illustrate  fully  what  we  have  said,  let  us  write  the 
Body  and  Ending  of  the  first  illustration  of  the  Brief : 

The  Department  Commander  directs  that  you  submit 
without  delay  the  report  of  your  recent  inspection  of  the 
Organized  Militia  of  the  State  of  New  York,  and  that  you 
also  submit  an  explanation  of  your  failure  to  comply  with 
par.  6,  S.  O.  25,  c.  s.,  these  headquarters. 

J.  L.  Thurst, 
Lieut.  Col.,  24th  Cav. 

One-half  inch  below  the  Ending  of  the  letter  comes  the 
first  of  the  Indorsements,  and  the  succeeding  Indorsements 

*  779,  A.  R. 

t  G.  O.,  23,  W.  D.,  1912. 


English  of  Military  Communicationt  169 

follow  one  another  serially,  with  a  space  of  about  one-half 
inch  between  Indorsements. 

Letters  in  the  military  service  are  not  answered  in  the 
sense  in  which  we  use  the  term  in  civilian  life.  In  other 
words,  the  person  who  receives  a  letter  does  not  retain  it 
and  reply  thereto  by  another.  Instead  he  states  what  he 
has  to  say  in  an  Indorsement^  which  is  put  down  in  con- 
tinuation of  the  original  letter.  Thus  everything  which 
has  been  written  in  regard  to  the  contents  of  a  letter  ap- 
pears as  a  part  of  the  letter  when  it  is  finally  filed. 

When  Captain  Douglas'  request  for  leave  of  absence, 
for  example,  reaches  the  headquarters  of  his  regiment,  it 
has  added  to  it  the  Colonel's  indorsement  which  appears 
as  follows,  provided  the  Colonel  wishes  the  Captain  to  ob- 
tain the  leave : 

1st  Ind. 
Hq.  99th  Inf.,  Madison  Barracks,  N.  Y.,  Jan.  11,  1940— 
To  the  Comdg.  Gen.,  Dept.  of  the  East. 

Approved  recommended. 

E.  F.  Hush, 
Colonel,  99th  Inf.,  Comdg. 

The  serial  number  of  indorsements,  the  place,  the  date, 
and  to  whom  written,  will  be  written  as  shown  above.  When 
typewritten,  they  will  be  written  single-spaced,  with  a 
double  space  between  paragraphs. 

Should  one  or  more  additional  sheets  be  necessary  for 
the  Body  or  Indorsements,  sheets  of  the  same  size  as  the 
first  will  be  added.  Only  one  side  of  the  paper  will  be  used 
for  writing. 

Indorsements  of  a  routine  nature  such  as  referring, 
transmitting,  forwarding,  and  returning  papers,  will  not 
be  signed  with  the  full  name,  but  with  initials. 

When  the  letter  of  the  Department  Commander  to  Cap- 
tain Douglas  reaches  the  Commanding  Officer,  Madison 


170  English  of  Military  Communications 

Barracks,  N.  Y.,  who  is  also  Commanding  Officer,  99th  In- 
fantry, the  latter  may  do  either  of  two  things.  He  may 
simply  forward  the  letter  to  Captain  Douglas  without  com- 
ment, because  he  deems  the  letter  sufficient  for  the  purpose ; 
or  he  may  add  a  disciplinary  word  also. 

In  the  first  case  the  indorsement  would  appear  as  fol- 
lows: 

1st  Ind. 
Hq.  99th  Inf.,  Madison  Barracks,  N.  Y.,  May  23,  1940— 
To  Captain  James  L.   Douglas,  99th  Inf.,  Forwarded, 
A.  D.  T. 

In  the  second  case  the  indorsement  would  appear  as 
follows : 

1st  Ind. 
Hq.  99th  Inf.,  Madison  Bks.,  N.  Y.,  May  23,  1940— To 
Captain  James  L.  Douglas,  99th  Inf. 

For  compliance. 

By  order  of  Colonel  Maish, 

A.  D.  Thomas, 
Capt.  99th  Inf., 

Adjutant. 

The  Body  and  Indorsements  of  letters  are  signed  by  the 
Adjutant  when  the  letters  are  addressed  to  those  lower  in 
rank  than  the  Commanding  Officer.  They  are  signed  by 
the  Commanding  Officer  himself  when  addressed  to  those 
higher  in  rank  than  the  Commanding  Officer.  Letters  are 
never  addressed  to  adjutants. 

In  connection  with  indorsements  it  might  be  well  to 
quote  what  Army  Regulations  say  in  their  regard. 

"Communications,  whether  from  a  subordinate  to  a 
•uperior,  or  vice  versa,  will  pass  through  intermediate 
commanders.  This  rule  will  not  be  interpreted  as  includ- 
ing matters  in  relation  to  which  intermediate  commanders 


English  of  Military  Qommunication*  171 

can  have  no  knowledge,  and  over  which  they  are  not  ex- 
pected to  exercise  control.  Cliiefs  of  War  Department 
bureaus  are  intermediate  conuuanders  between  higher 
authority  and  the  officers  and  enlisted  men  of  their  respec- 
tive corps  or  departments,  who  are  serving  under  the  ex- 
clusive control  of  themselves  and  their  subordinates.  Verbal 
communications  will  be  governed  by  the  same  rules  as 
to  channels  as  written  communications.  When  necessity 
requires  communications  to  be  sent  through  other  than  the 
prescribed  channel,  the  necessity  therefor  will  be  stated. 

Communications  from  superiors  to  subordinates  will  be 
answered  through  the  same  channels  as  received. 

Except  as  provided  above,  all  communications,  reports, 
and  estimates  from  officers  serving  at  a  military  post,  and 
communications  of  every  nature  addressed  to  them  relating 
to  affairs  of  the  post,  will  pass  through  the  post  com- 
mander. 

Officers  who  forward  communications  will  indorse  there- 
on their  approval  or  disapproval,  with  remarks.  No  com- 
munication will  be  forwarded  to  the  War  Department  by  a 
department  commander  or  other  superior  officer  for  the 
action  of  the  Secretary  of  War  without  some  recommenda- 
tions or  expression  of  opinion." 

It  may  often  be  necessary  to  enclose  other  letters,  cer- 
tain documents,  or  even  bulkier  material  with  a  letter. 
Such  addition  to  a  letter  is  called  an  Inclosure  and  is  sub- 
mitted as  part  of  the  letter.  Inclosures  to  the  original 
communication  will  be  noted  on  the  face  of  the  letter  at  the 
left-hand  margin  opposite  the  signature,  thus: 
2  Incls.  J.  L.  Douglas, 

Capt.  99th  Inf. 

The  inclosures  themselves  will  be  numbered  on  the  out- 
side. The  two  inclosures  of  the  above  example  would  be 
marked  1  and  2. 


172  English  of  Military  Communications 

If  others  are  added  when  an  indorsement  is  made,  their 
number  will  be  noted  at  the  foot  of  the  indorsement  and 
upon  themselves,  as  just  described  for  the  original  com- 
munication. 

If  few  in  number  or  not  bulky,  inclosures  may  be  kept 
inside  the  original  paper;  otherwise  they  should  be  folded 
together  in  a  wrapper  marked  "Inclosures."  If  kept  with- 
in the  paper  they  lie  between  folds  a  and  b  below. 

Now  that  we  have  discussed  in  order  the  different 
parts  of  an  official  letter  to  a  person  in  the  military  service, 
let  us  see  how  the  various  parts  appear  when  assembled. 


English  of  Military  Communications  173 


2039                                         Company  B,  40th  Infantry, 

Fort  William  H.  Seward,  Alaska,  July  19,  1912. 

0' 

From:      The  Commanding  OflScer,  Co.  B,  40th  Inf. 

To:           The  Adjutant  General  of  the  Army. 

(Through  military  channels.) 

Subject:  Philippine  campaign  badges. 

Inclosed  are  lists  in  duplicate  of  enlisted  men  of  Com- 

pany B,  40th  Infantry,  entitled  to  the  Philippine  campaign 
badge. 

John  A.  Brown, 

2  Incls.                                                                Capt.,  40th  Inf. 

b' 

824                                          1st  Ind. 

Hq.  Ft.  William  H.  Seward,  Alaska,  July  19,  1912— To  the 

Comdg.  Gen.  Dept.,  of  the  Columbia. 

S.  F.  Thomas, 

2  Incls.                                                      Col.,  40th  Inf.,  Comdg. 

(Stamp)  Rec'd  Western  Dept.,  July  30,  1912. 

8048                                        2d  Ind. 

Hq.  Western  Dept.,  San  Francisco,  Cal.,  July  81,  1912— To 

C  ' 

Arthur  E.  Green, 

2  Incls.                                      CoL,  Gen.  Staff,  in  absence 

of  the  Department  Commander. 

(Stamp)   Rec'd  A.  G.  0.,  Aug.  5,  1912. 

174  English  of  Military  Communications 


1942286  3d  Ind. 

War  Dept.,  A.  G.  O.,  Aug.  8,  1912— To  the  C.  O.,  Co.  I, 
60th  Inf.,  through  the  Comdg.  Gen.,  Philippine  Department. 

1.  Information  is  requested  as  to  whether  the  records  of 
the  company  show  that  Corporal  Doe,  Co.  I,  50th  Inf.,  served 
in  the  field  against  hostile  natives  on  the  Island  of  Panay 
during  July,  1907. 

2.  The  early  return  of  these  papers  is  desired. 
By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 

Thomas  H.  Smith, 
2  Incls.  Adjt.  Gen. 

(Stamp)  Rec'd  Phil.  Dept.,  Sept.  14,  1912. 


79935  4th  Ind. 

Hq.  Philippine  Department,  Manila,  P.  I.,  Sept.  15,  1912 — 
To  the  C.  O.,  Co.  I,  60th  Inf.,  through  the  Comdg.  Gen.,  Dist. 
of  Mindanao. 

2  Incls.  A.  M.  B. 

(Stamp)  Rec'd  Dist.  Mind.,  Sept.  24,  1912. 


3467  5th  Ind. 

Hq.  Dist.  of  Mindanao,  Zamboanga,  P.  I.,  Sept.  25,  1912 — 

To  the  C.  O.,  Co.  I,  50th  Inf.,  Camp  Keithley,  Mind.,  P.  I., 

through  the  Post  Commander. 

2  Incls.  S.  V.  B. 

1182  6th  Ind. 

Hq.  Camp  Keithley,  Mind.,  P.  I.,  Sept.  28,  1912— To  the 

C.  O.,  Co.  I,  60th  Inf. 

2  Incls.  E.  F.  H. 

(Stamp)  Rec'd  Co.  I,  50th  Inf.,  Sept.  29,  1912. 


English  of  Military  Communications  175 


512  7th  Ind. 

Co.  I,  60th  Inf.,  Camp  Keithley,  Mind.,  P.  I.,  Oct.  4,  1912— 
To  the  Comdg.  Gen.,  Dist.  of  Mindanao,  through  the  C.  O., 
Camp  Keithley,  P.  I. 

1.  Inclosed  are  extracts  from  the  post  orders  and  morning 
report  of  this  company,  which  contain  all  that  there  is  of 
record  regarding  the  service  of  Corporal  Doe  referred  to 
herein.  Inclosed  also  is  affidavit  of  Corporal  Jones  as  to 
Corporal  Doe's  service. 

2.  It  is  believed  that  the  records  of  the  headquarters, 
District  of  Mindanao,  may  contain  the  information  desired. 

(8  incls.  added.)  Edward  French, 

5  Incls.  Capt.,  50th  Inf.,  Comdg. 

(Stamp)  Rec'd  back.  Camp  Keithley,  Oct.  6,  1912. 

8th  Ind. 

Hq.  Camp  Keithley,  Mind.,  P.  I.,  Oct.  6,  1912— To  the 
Comdg.  Gen.,  District  of  Mind. 

6  Incls.  A.  C.  Douglas, 

Maj.,  50th  Inf.,  Comdg. 

(Stamp)  Rec'd  back,  Dist.  Mind.,  Oct.  6,  1912. 


3467  9th  Ind. 

Hq.  Dept.  of  Mindanao,  Zamboanga,  P.  I.,  Oct.  12,  1912— 
To  the  Comdg.  Gen.,  Pliilippine  Department. 

There  is  nothing  on  file  at  these  headquarters  bearing  on 
the  service  of  Corporal  Doe  referred  to  herein. 

William  Jones, 
6  Incls.  Brig.  Gen.,  Comdg. 

(Stamp)   Rec'd  back,  Phil.  Dept.,  Oct.  28,  1912. 


176  English  of  Military  Communications 


79935  •  10th  Ind. 

Hq.  Philippines  Department,  Manila,  P.  I.,  Oct.  24,  1912— 
To  the  Comdg.  Gen.,  Dist.  of  Mindanao,  with  directions  to 
withdraw  affidavit  of  Corporal  Jones,  it  being  proposed  to 
inclose  an  affidavit  from  Sergeant  Blank,  who  is  on  duty 
at  these  headquarters  and  who  is  prepared  to  furnish  a 
more  complete  affidavit  than  that  furnished  by  Corporal 
Jones.    By  command  of  Major  General  White: 

Andrew  Brown, 
5  Incls.  Adjt.  Gen. 

(Stamp)  Rec'd  back,  Dist.  Mind.,  Nov.  3,  1912. 

3467  11th  Ind. 

Hq.  Dist.  of  Mindanao,  Zamboanga,  P.  I.,  Nov.  4,  1912 — 
To  the  Comdg.  Gen.,  Philippine  Department,  the  foregoing 
directions  have  been  complied  with. 
(Incl.  5  withdrawn.)  William  Jones, 

4  Incls.  Brig.  Gen.,  Comdg. 
(Stamp)  Rec'd  back,  Phil.  Dept.,  Nov.  16,  1912. 

79935  12th  Ind. 

Hq.  Philippine  Department,  Manila,  P.  I.,  Nov.  16,  1912 — 

To  the  Adjutant  General  of  the  Army,  inviting  attention 

to   the  preceding  indorsements   and   to   the  accompanying 

inclosures. 

(1  Incl.  added.) 

5  Incls.  Maj.  Gen.,  Comdg. 
(Stamp)  Rec'd  back,  A.  G.  O.,  Dec.  23,  1912. 


Englith  of  Military  Communicationt  177 

The  dotted  lines  on  page  1  of  the  model  represent  the 
creases  between  the  folds  a,  h,  and  c.  a  contains  the  Briej 
in  the  relative  position  shown  and  is  folded  away  from  h, 
the  crease  between  the  two  being  toward  the  reader,  h 
begins  the  Body  and  may  contain  it  or  only  a  part  of  it 
according  to  its  length,  c  contains  the  continuation  of  the 
Body  or  the  whole  or  parts  of  indorsements,  as  the  case 
may  be.  h  and  c  are  folded  toward  each  other,  the  crease 
between  the  two  being  away  from  the  reader. 

Page  2  contains  the  body  or  indorsements  of  the  letter. 
All  pages  are  folded  as  page  1  in  three  equal  folds. 

When  foolscap  is  used  instead  of  the  ordinary  sized 
letter  paper  as  above,  the  only  difference  is  that  there  is 
an  extra  fold.  Imagine  this  fold  to  be  tacked  on  to  the 
bottom  of  page  1  in  the  example  and  to  be  marked  d.  d 
and  c  would  be  folded  just  as  h  and  c.  The  page  would 
contain  a  third  crease  and  be  a  fold  longer.  Otherwise  the 
letter  would  be  the  same  as  the  first  one  described. 

The  number  at  the  upper  left-hand  comer  is  the  filing 
number  of  the  office. 

It  will  be  noticed  in  the  seventh  indorsement  that  three 
inclosures  have  been  added.  The  whole  transaction  is 
noted  in  the  proper  place.  The  eleventh  and  twelfth  in- 
dorsements should  be  noticed  in  the  same  regard. 

Where  "stamp"  appears  in  parenthesis,  the  word  does 
not  actually  occur  in  letters.  It  indicates  that  the  office 
which  received  the  letter  noted  by  means  of  a  rubber  stamp 
at  that  particular  place  on  the  letter  the  date  on  which 
the  communication  was  received  or  received  back.  In  other 
words,  what  follows  "(Stamp)"  was  placed  there  by  some 
one  of  the  office  force  as  soon  as  the  letter  was  received 
in  that  office. 

The  writing  on  all  pages  should  begin  one  inch  from  the 
top.    The  pages,  beginning  with  the  first  will  be  numbered 


178  English  of  Military  Communications 

serially.  The  number  will  be  placed  half  way  between  the 
edges  and  one  inch  above  the  bottom  of  the  page.  In  refer- 
ring to  an  indorsement  by  number,  the  number  of  the  page 
will  also  be  given,  thus :  "5th  Ind.,  page  3." 

All  ceremonial  forms  at  the  beginning  and  end  of  let- 
ters such  as  "Sir,"  "I  have  the  honor,"  "I  would  respect- 
fully," "Very  respectfully"  and  the  like  will  be  omitted- 
In  referring,  transmitting,  forwarding,  and  returning 
papers,  the  expressions  "Respectfully  referred,"  "Re- 
spectfully transmitted,"  "Respectfully  forwarded,"  and 
"Respectfully  returned,"  will  also  be  omitted. 

"An  officer  will  not  be  designated  in  orders  nor  addressed 
in  official  communications  by  any  other  title  than  that  of 
his  actual  rank."*  Wherever  appropriate  the  name  should 
be  supplanted  by  the  title,  such  as  "Commanding  Officer, 
Co.  A,  99th  Infantry"  in  place  of  "Captain  James  L. 
Douglas.** 

**A11  letters  and  indorsements  which  are  typewritten, 
excepting  letters  of  transmittal,  reports  of  taking  leave 
of  absence,  periodical  reports,  and  communications  of  a 
similar  nature,  will  be  made  with  two  carbon  copies.  One 
copy  will  be  retained  for  the  records  of  the  office  in  which 
the  letter  was  written,  and  the  other  will  be  forwarded 
with  the  communication  for  the  files  of  the  first  office  in 
which  a  complete  copy  is  required  for  the  records,  but  such 
copy  will  not  be  regarded  as  an  enclosure.  It  will  be  ini- 
tialed by  the  person  responsible  for  the  communication." 

**Tn  official  correspondence  between  officers  or  between 
officers  and  officials  of  other  branches  of  the  public  service, 
and  especially  in  matters  involving  questions  of  jurisdic- 
tion,  conflict  of  authority,  or  dispute,  officers  of  the  Army 
are  reminded  that  their  correspondence  should  be  courte- 

•Par  780,  A.  R. 


English  of  Militartf  Communications  170 

ous  in  tone  and  free  from  any  expression  partaking  of  a 
personal  nature  or  calculated  to  give  offense.  Whenever 
questions  of  such  character  shall  arise  between  officers  and 
officials  of  other  branches  of  the  public  service,  and  it  is 
found  that  they  cannot  be  reconciled  by  an  interchange  of 
courteous  correspondence,  the  officer  of  the  Army,  as  the 
representative  of  the  interests  of  the  War  Department  in 
the  matter  involved,  will  make  a  full  presentation  of  the 
case  to  the  Secretary  of  War  through  the  proper  military 
channels,  in  order  that  the  same  may  be  properly  con- 
sidered. 

In  order  to  reduce  the  possibility  of  confidential  com- 
munications falling  into  the  hands  of  persons  other  than 
those  for  whom  they  are  intended,  the  sender  will  enclose 
them  in  an  inner  and  outer  cover;  the  inner  cover  to  be  a 
sealed  envelope  or  wrapper  addressed  in  the  usual  way, 
but  marked  plainly  "Confidential"  in  such  a  manner  that 
the  notation  may  be  most  readily  seen  when  the  outer  cover 
is  removed.  The  package  thus  prepared  will  then  be  en- 
closed in  another  sealed  envelope  or  wrapper  addressed  in 
the  ordinary  manner  with  no  notation  to  indicate  the  con- 
fidential nature  of  the  contents. 

The  foregoing  applies  not  only  to  confidential  commu- 
nications entrusted  to  the  mails  or  to  telegraph  companies, 
but  also  to  such  communications  entrusted  to  messengers 
passing  between  different  offices  of  the  same  headquarters, 
including  the  bureaus  and  offices  of  the  War  Department." 

We  have  so  far  discussed  in  this  chapter  official  letters 
to  persons  in  the  military  service.  We  now  come  to  con- 
sider the  second  form  of  official  letter — the  one  to  persons 
outside  the  military  service.  Often  an  adjutant  or  quar- 
termaster is  called  upon  to  write  to  individuals  or  firms  not 
conversant  with  the  military  forms.  For  a  variety  of  rea- 
sons, the  business  form  in  that  case  is  best. 


180  English  of  Military  Communications 

In  general  the  two  forms  present  the  following  differ- 
ences and  likenesses.  The  headings  are  the  same.  The 
business  form  substitutes  the  Address  of  the  Recipient  and 
the  Salutation  for  the  From  Whom  Sent,  To  Whom  Sent, 
and  Subject  of  the  military  form.  The  Body  in  each  case 
follows  the  principles  of  paragraphing,  and  unity  and  co- 
herence of  the  whole,  as  set  down  for  the  military  form.  In 
the  business  form  the  paragraphs  need  not  be  numbered. 
The  business  form  has  a  complimentary  close  before  the 
signature,  rank,  and  organization  of  the  writer.  Letters 
are  retained  by  the  recipient  and  answered  by  him  with  a 
new  letter,  the  sender  retaining  a  carbon  copy.  Indorse- 
ments are  not  used  in  the  business  form. 

An  example  of  a  good  business  form  appears  below. 
Office  of  the  Quartermaster, 

West  Point,  N.  Y., 
August  7,  1930. 
Messrs.  D.  C.  Johnson  and  Company, 
312  High  Street, 

Boston,  Massachusetts. 
Gentlemen : 

In  reference  to  your  letter  of  the  5th  inst.,  I  desire  to 
inform  you  that  there  is  no  need  here  at  present  for  the 
roofing  mentioned. 

I  regret  that  we  cannot  at  this  time  become  customers 
of  your  firm,  but  we  shall  hold  you  in  mind  when  the  neces- 
sity for  roofing  arises. 

Yours  very  truly, 

J.  H.  Smith, 
Major,  Q.  M.  Corps,  U.  S.  A. 

Quartermaster. 

The  entire  address  of  the  recipient  had  best  be  written 
before  the  salutation. 


English  of  Military  Communications  181 

Other  proper  salutation's  are : 
My  dear  Sir: 
My  dear  Madam: 
Ladies : 
Other  proper  Complimentary  Closings  are: 
Yours  truly, 
Your  respectfully, 
Stick  close  to  the  forms  of  the  model  above.     A  very 
slight  departure  will  make  you  appear  crude.     For  in- 
stance, to  say 

D.  C.  Johnson, 
Boston,  Mass. 
Messrs. — 
would  be  entirely  wrong. 

As  to  the  Body  of  the  letter,  however,  write  it  your  own 
way  so  long  as  you  use  words,  phrases,  clauses,  sentences, 
and  paragraphs,  of  a  kind  we  have  striven  to  attain 
throughout  this  work.  Do  not  make  your  letter  tele- 
graphic ;  complete  your  sentences. 

The  instructions  given  for  the  attainment  of  the  proper 
forms  in  ordinary  business  communications  are  in  no  sense 
as  rigid  as  those  given  for  the  military  communication. 
Many  officers  now  use  the  military  forms  for  their  corre- 
spondence with  business  firms,  and,  indeed,  many  of  these 
firms  have  themselves  adopted  the  military  form. 

The  third  type  of  official  letter  is  that  of  the  official 
telegram.  It  does  not  differ  in  principle  from  the  ordinary 
telegram,  and  therefore  does  not  require  separate  practice. 
Those  who  have  conquered  the  field  message  should  have  no 
trouble  in  its  composition. 

It  is  written  on  an  official  telegraph  blank  which  may 
be  obtained  from  the  Quartermaster.  The  blank  is  for 
the  purpose  of  having  the  message  go  at  Government  ex- 
pense.    Army  Regulations  state  that  "telegrams  will  be 


182  English  of  Military  Communications 

followed  by  official  copies  sent  by  the  first  mail  in  cases 
of  financial  transactions  of  more  than  trifling  importance, 
and  in  cases  in  which  chiefs  of  bureaus  of  the  War  Depart- 
ment may  deem  it  necessary  themselves  to  send,  or  to 
require  officers  serving  under  their  immediate  control  to 
send  them,  such  copies."  It  is  a  good  thing  in  any  case 
to  mail  a  copy  of  a  telegram. 

The  other  kinds  of  official  correspondence  which  need  no 
letters  to  accompany  them  are  Rolls,  Returns,  Estimates, 
Requisitions,  and  Routine  Reports.  A  study  of  these  forms 
of  communication  belongs  properly  to  the  subject  of  ad- 
ministration.   They  are,  therefore,  simply  mentioned  here. 

The  principal  Rolls  with  which  the  novice  in  the  mili- 
tary service  is  confronted  are  the  Muster  and  Pay  Rolls. 
The  former  is  rendered  every  two  months  and  the  latter 
every  month.*  Full  instructions  as  to  what  is  required 
in  each  set  of  rolls  are  found  on  the  last  page  of  each  form. 
On  application  to  the  Adjutant  General  of  the  Army,  a 
list  of  model  remarks  for  the  rolls  will  be  furnished. 

The  principal  Returns  with  which  the  novice  should  be- 
come familiar  are  the  Ration,  Clothing,  Ordjumce,  Com- 
pany (monthly),  and  Field  Returns. 

Estimates  and  Requisitions .  are  used  most  frequently 
by  the  Supply  Departments.  But  organizations  must  pre- 
pare Estimates  of  what  they  will  need,  and  must  prepare 
Requisitions  for  the  desired  articles  when  needed.  The 
Clothing  Estimate  and  Clothing  Requisition  are  two  com- 
mon and  important  forms. 

Among  the  Routine  Reports  in  the  military  service 
should  be  mentioned  the  Morning,  Inventory  and  Inspec- 
tion, Sick,  and  certain  Reports  in  official  letter  form. 

The  form  of  Routine  Report  which  is  most  common  is 
the  Morning  Report. 

See  A.  R.,  Par.  807. 


English  of  Military  Communication*  188 

EXPLANATIONS 

As  we  took  up  in  each  case  after  written  work  pertaining 
to  combat  the  similar  verbal  task,  so  now  after  we  have 
discussed  written  correspondence  we  are  going  to  dwell 
upon  the  ordinary  verbal  labor  incumbent  upon  officers  and 
non-commissioned  officers  in  the  military  service. 

In  war  or  peace  a  military  leader  is  useless  without  an 
eflFective  tongue.  We  have  demonstrated  his  uselessness  in 
combat;  we  shall  see  that  he  is  just  as  unsatisfactory  in 
training  men  for  combat. 

The  work  of  any  military  individual  in  command  of  men 
is  not  only  that  of  doing  but  also  that  of  telling  others 
how  to  do.  The  Explanation  of  the  efficient  leader  is  a 
continuous  process  from  morning  until  night.  He  is  con- 
stantly called  upon  to  make  his  words  count.  If  he  halts, 
he  loses  tim^.  If  he  hesitates,  he  makes  his  men  restless. 
He  must  speak  straight  through  to  the  end  in  a  clear-cut 
way,  never  hedging  or  repeating ;  and  when  he  has  finished, 
the  listeners  should  feel  that  the  subject  has  been  com- 
pletely covered. 

If  he  does  not  form  the  habit  of  so  talking,  he  forfeits 
his  power  of  leadership.  For  what  good  is  an  intelligent 
or  inventive  officer,  if  he  cannot  put  his  intelligence  or  in- 
vention out  through  his  lips.''  The  military  profession  is 
one  which  depends  upon  quick  instruction  by  word  of 
mouth.  The  officer  who  does  his  own  work  and  the  work 
of  his  sergeants  too,  is  plainly  inefficient.  He  has  avoided 
the  harder  task — that  of  teaching  others  how  to  carry  on 
the  work.  He  has  done  worse.  He  has  lessened  the  value 
of  his  organization  as  an  automatic  machine.  When  he 
leaves  it,  it  will  either  fall  to  pieces  or  place  a  weighty 
burden  on  the  officer  relieving  him.* 

*  Compare  "Winning  and  Wearing  of  Shoulder  Straps" — a  con- 
vincing treatment  of  this  subject  by  Lt.-Col.  Cbas.  F.  Martin, 
Cavalry. 


184  English  of  Military  Communications 

There  is  one  caution  which  a  military  man  should  ob- 
serve in  his  speech  on  the  drill  ground,  in  barracks,  or  in 
the  field.  He  should  not  repeat  unnecessarily.  He  should 
not  allow  his  men  to  gain  the  idea  that  if  they  do  not  listen 
at  once  he  will  tell  them  later.  It  should  be  an  understood 
fact  that  his  Explanation,  once  stated,  stands.  Of  course 
he  may  reiterate  during  his  talk  for  the  sake  of  emphasis. 
But  he  should  by  practice  be  so  capable  of  telling  every- 
thing so  unmistakably  the  first  time  over  that  no  reason- 
able question  can  be  asked. 

Good  explanations  make  for  attention  on  the  part  of 
his  men,  and  attention  makes  for  an  increase  of  good  work. 
Sooner  or  later  the  achievements  of  his  organization  con- 
trast it  favorably  with  other  organizations  and  his  brother 
officers  say,  "He  has  made  a  success."  Much  of  that  suc- 
cess has  come  to  him  because  he  has  set  for  himself,  and 
followed  these  simple  rules: 

(1)  "I  will  try  today  not  to  say  anything  which  is 
not  exactly  expressive  of  what  I  mean." 

(2)  "I  will  try  whenever  I  write  to  make  myself  un- 
mistakable." 

(3)  "I  will  try  whenever  I  speak  to  make  every  word 
distinct  from  every  other  word." 

(4)  "I  will  try  whenever  I  read  to  see  how  others  ex- 
press themselves  so  that  I  may  at  the  next  opportunity 
imitate  that  part  of  their  style  which  says  most  in  the 
simplest  way." 

(5)  "I  will  make  every  good  new  word  my  own,  be- 
cause the  vocabulary  of  my  present  life  is  limited." 

(6)  "I  will  do  all  this  because  by  so  doing  I  shall 
develop  myself  in  my  profession,  and  because  I  may  some 
day  fail  that  profession  if  I  neglect  that  development  now." 


English  of  Military  Communications  185 

LECTURES 

Lectures  are  but  extended  Explanations.  Officers  are 
more  and  more  being  called  upon  to  appear  before  large 
audiences  of  educated  people  in  order  to  give  to  the  coun- 
try military  knowledge.  Training  Camps  and  war  are  in- 
creasing the  necessity  for  the  delivery  of  lectures. 

Because  the  Lecture  takes  more  time,  it  should  be  more 
carefuUy  developed  than  the  Explanation.  The  subject 
should  be  divided  into  its  various  parts  in  a  logical  way. 
It  should  be  bound  together  coherently.  And  each  part 
should  have  in  it  only  what  belongs  there.  This  process 
is  simply  that  of  following  the  rules  of  English  with  which 
we  are  already  acquainted.  The  purpose  is  speed  and 
clearness. 

There  are  other  elements  which  enter  into  the  better- 
ment of  a  long  talk.  Since  an  audience  is  human,  there  is 
reason  in  helping  it  through  a  dry  subject.  The  treatment 
of  the  Lecture  may  in  this  way,  besides  aiding  the  interest, 
make  the  points  stick  longer.  Two  qualities  which  help  to 
attain  this  treatment  are  Humor  and  Presence. 

Ordinarily  the  American  does  not  need  to  be  told  to 
cultivate  humor.  He  reeks  with  it.  But  there  are  some  in- 
structors whose  minds  work  along  so  impassively  that  it  is 
difficult  for  them  to  be  wakened  from  their  gravity.  To 
them  the  conscious  development  of  the  short  anecdote, 
homely  illustration,  and  incongruous  phrase  is  a  splendid 
aid.  The  great  majority,  however,  must  be  guarded  in  the 
use  of  humor.  The  quality  itself  may  be  overworked  so 
that  the  proportion  of  matter  in  the  Lecture  is  small  in 
comparison  to  the  witticisms.  Humor  is  but  a  means  to  an 
end.  Its  sole  object  should  be  to  lighten  the  talk  in  order 
to  help  the  subject  into  the  auditor's  mind  more  easily. 
Fun  should  be  incidental  and  made  without  effort. 


186  English  of  Military  Communications 

As  to  Presence  more  can  be  said  in  its  favor.  It  is  an 
indispensable  quality  in  a  speaker.  If  his  diaphragm  is 
in  his  mouth  during  his  delivery,  or  if  his  heart  action  is 
violent,  the  audience  cannot  be  fooled.  It  will  be  made 
uncomfortable.  A  speaker  should  have  such  ordinary 
fluency  of  accurate  expression  through  practice  that  he 
entertains  no  fears  of  obscure  or  halting  language.  He 
should  be  so  familiar  with  the  sensations  of  looking  into 
H.  number  of  faces  that  he  will  feel  at  ease.  He  should  im- 
press his  audience  that  he  enjoys  standing  before  them  for 
the  purpose  of  imparting  interesting  knowledge.  Such 
Presence  can  be  attained  only  by  taking  advantage  of 
every  opportunity  for  correct  public  and  private  speech. 
The  military  novice  should  enter  every  impersonal  dis- 
cussion he  can  find,  and  should  urge  himself  to  speak  when- 
ever possible  to  more  than  a  dozen  people  at  a  time. 

He  must  be  more  than  an  ordinary  talker,  for  he  must 
have  speed  and  interest  as  ready  agents  of  his  ideas.  To 
gain  those  qualities  is  a  matter  of  constant  attention  to 
speaking  and  to  writing  exactly  what  he  wishes  to  say. 

We  have  now  covered  the  territory  of  military  <;ommuni- 
cations.  We  have  seen  the  necessity  for  correct  expres- 
sion, and  the  difficulty  of  its  attainment.  What  we  have 
done  should  be  but  a  beginning.  It  may  be  a  long  strug- 
gle to  gain  brevity  and  clarity — the  terse  and  the  unmis- 
takable. But  achievement  will  come  with  practice  and  will 
repay  us  fully  in  future  satisfaction,  and  increased  worth 
in  our  profession. 


APPENDICES^ 


APPENDIX 

Forms  of  Complete  Field  Obdees 
While  the  following  forms  are  given  for  the  convenience  of  oflScers 
in  the  field,  and  with  a  view  of  securing  uniformity  in  the  service, 
it  must  be  remembered  that  no  two  military  situations  are  the  same. 
The  sequence  in  paragraph  8  is  not  obligatory,  the  commander 
arranging  the  details  according  to  his  best  judgment. 


For  an  advance. 


Field  Orders 
No.  — 
[Reference  to  map  used] 
Troops 


[TiUe] 
[Place] 

[Date  and  hour] 


(a)  Independent  Cav- 
alry: 

[Commander] 

[Troops] 

Advance  Guard: 

[Commander] 

[Troops] 


(b) 


1.  [Information  of  enemy  and  of  our  sup- 
porting troops] 

2.  [Plan  of  commander] 

3.  (a)  [Instructions  for  independent  cav- 
alry— place  and  time  of  departure,  roads  or 
country  to  be  covered,  special  mission] 

(b)  [Instructions  for  advance  guard — 
place  and  time  of  departure,  or  distance  at 
which  it  is  to  precede  the  main  body,  route, 
special  mission] 

(c)  [Instructions  for  main  body— distance 
at  which  it  is  to  follow  the  advance  guard, 
or  place  and  time  of  departure] 

(d)  [Instructions  for  flank  guard — place 
and  time  of  departure,  route,  special  mission] 

(e)  [Instructions  for  signal  troops — lines 
of  information  to  be  established,  special 
mission] 

(x)  [Instructions  for  outpost — ^when  re- 
lieved, subsequent  duties] 

4.  [Instructions  for  field  train — escort,  dis- 
tance in  rear  of  column,  or  destination  when 
different  from  that  of  main  body,  if  disposi- 
tion not  previously  covered  in  "Orders"] 

[Instructions  for  sanitary,  ammimition,  supply  and  engineer  trains, 
when  necessary] 

6.  [Place  of  commander  or  where  messages  may  be  sent] 

[  Authentication  ] 
[How  and  to  whom  issued] 


(c)  Main     Body  —  in 

order  of  march: 
[Commander]* 

(d)  Right  [left]  Flank 

Guard: 
[Commander] 
[Troops] 

(e)  Signal  Troops: 

[Commander] 
[Troops] 


•F.  S.  Regs. 

*  If  a  commander  is  designated  for  the  main  body,  his  name  is 
inserted  here. 


188  English  of  Military  Communications 

For  advance  guards. 
Field  Orders  [Title] 

No.  —  [Place] 

[Reference  to  map  used]  [Date  and  hour] 

Troops  1.  [Information  of  enemy  and  of  our  sup- 

porting troops] 

(a)  Advance  Cavalry:         2.  [Plan  of  commander] 

[Commander]  3.   (a)      [Instructions     for     advance     cav- 

[ Troops]  airy — place  and  time  of  departure,  roads  or 

(b)  Support:  country  to  be  covered,  special  mission] 

[Commander]  (b)    [Instructions  for  support — place  and 

[Troops]  time  of  departure,  route,  special  mission] 

(c)  Reserve — in  order         (c)    [Instructions  for  reserve — distance  at 

of  march:  which  it  is  to  follow  support] 

[Troops]  (d)    [Instructions    for    flank    guard — place 

(d)  Right  [left]  Flank     and  time  of  departure,  route,  special  mission] 

Guard:  4.  [Instructions   for   field   train — generally 

[Commander]       to   join   train   of   column   if   not   previously 
[Troops]  covered  in  orders] 

6.  [Place  of  commander  or  where  messages 
may  be  sent,  location  of  lines  of  information] 
[  Authentication] 
[How  and  to  whom  issued] 

A  halt  for  the  night — Camp  mith  outpost. 

Field  Orders  [Title] 

No.  —  [Place] 

[Reference  to  map  used]  [Date  and  hour] 

1.  [Information  of  enemy  and  of  our  supporting  troops,  including 
independent  cavalry] 

2.  [Plan  of  commander — to  encamp  or  bivouac] 

3.  (a)  [Designation  of  commander  and  troops  of  outpost,*  general 
line  to  be  held,  special  reconnaissance,  connection  with  other  outposts, 
if  any] 

(b)  [Instructions  for  troops  not  detailed  for  outpost  duty — loca- 
tion of  camp,  designation  of  camp  commander,^  observation  of  flanks 
and  rear  when  necessary,  lines  of  information,  conduct  in  case  of 
attack] 

4.  [Instructions  for  field  train — generally  to  join  troops,  though 
if  near  enemy,  field  train  of  outpost  troops  may  be  held  in  rear]* 

*  Where  the  advance  guard  is  large  the  order  may  direct  the  ad- 
vance guard  commander  to  establish  the  outpost. 

*  Omitted  when  the  chief  exercises  immediate  command  of  the 
camp. 

•May  be  provided  for  in  "order"  issued  subsequently. 


English  of  Military  Communications  189 

[Instructions  for  sanitary,  ammunition,  supply,  and  engineer 
trains,  wlien  necessary] 

6.  [Place  of  commander  or  where  messages  may  be  sent] 

[  Authentication] 
[How  and  to  whom  issued] 

For  outposts. 
Field  Orders  [Title] 

No.  —  [Place] 

[Reference  to  map  used]  [Date  and  hour] 

Troops  1.  [Information  of  enemy  and  of  our  sup- 

porting troops] 

(a)  Advance  Cavalry:        2.  [Plan  of  commander — to  establish  out- 

[  Commander]  post,  approximate  line  of  resistance] 

[Troops]  3.  (a)    [Instructions  for  advanced  cavalry 

(b)  Supports:*  contact  with  enemy,  roads  or  country  to  be 
No.  1  [Commander]  specially  watched,  special  mission] 

[Troops]  (b)    [Instructions    for    supports — ^positions 

No.2  [Commander]  they  are  to  occupy,  and  sections  of  line  of 

[Troops]  resistance  which  they  are  to  hold,  intrench- 

No.3  [Commander]  ing,  etc.] 

[Troops]  (c)    [Instructions  for  detached  post — ^posi- 

(c)  Detached  Post:  tion  to  be  occupied,  duties,  amount  of  resis- 

[  Commander]       tance] 

[Troops]  (d)    [Instructions     for    reserves — location, 

(d)  Reserve:  observation    of    flanks,    conduct    in    case    of 

[Commander]       attack,  duties  of  special  troops] 

[Troops]  4.  [Instruction  for  field  train  if  necessary] 

6.  [Place  of  commander  or  where  messages 
may  be  sent,  location  of  lines  of  information] 
[  Authentication] 
[How  and  to  whom  issued]* 

It  is  sometimes  necessary  to  issue  two  outpost  orders;  the  first 
as  above,  containing  general  instruction;  the  second,  issued  after  an 
inspection  of  the  line,  and  containing  more  definite  instructions  or 
involving  changes. 

For  positions  in  readiness. 

Field  Orders  [Title] 

No.  —  [Place] 

[Reference  to  map  used]  [Date  and  hour] 

1.  [Information  of  enemy  and  of  our  supporting  troops] 


*  Numbered  from  the  right. 

"  For  small  outposts  it  may  be  more  convenient  to  write  this  order 
without  a  marginal  distribution  of  troops. 


IPO  English  of  Military  Communications 

2.  [Plan  of  commander — to  take  up  a  position  in  readiness  at  or 
near  — ] 

3.  (a)  [Instructions  for  cavalry — to  reconnoiter  in  direction  of 
enemy,  special  mission] 

(b)  [Instructions  for  artillery — position  or  place  of  assembly] 

(c)  [Instructions  for  infantry — position  or  place  of  assembly, 
points  to  be  especially  held,  reconnaissance] 

(d)  [Instructions  for  engineers — position  or  place  of  assembly] 

(e)  [Instructions  for  signal  troops — alines  of  information] 

4.  [Instructions  for  field  trains,  sanitary,  ammunition,  supply  and 
engineer  trains  if  not  previously  covered  in  orders — generally  to  halt 
at  designated  localities  in  rear,  ready  to  move  in  any  direction] 

5.  [Place  of  commander  or  where  messages  may  be  sent] 

[  Authentication] 
[How  and  to  whom  issued] 

For  defense  positions. 
Field  Orders  [Title] 

No.  —  [Place] 

[Reference  to  map  used]  [Date  and  hour] 

1.  [Information  of  enemy  and  of  our  supporting  troops] 

2.  [Plan  of  commander — to  take  up  a  defensive  position  at  or 
along ,  for  the  purpose  of ] 

3.  (a)  [Instructions  for  artillery — position,  target,  intrenching, 
etc.] 

(b)  Instructions  for  fighting  line — division  of  front  into  sections 
and  assignment  of  troops  thereto,  intrenching,  etc.] 

(c)  [Instructions  for  reserve — troops  and  position] 

(d)  [Instructions  for  cavalry — usually  to  cover  with  its  main 
force  the  more  exposed  flank,  a  detachment  being  sent  to  patrol  the 
other;    reconnaissance] 

(e)  Instructions  for  engineer — defensive  work,  clearing  field  of 
fire,  preparation  of  obstacles,  opening  roads,  etc.] 

(f)  [Instructions  for  signal  troops — to  establish  lines  of  informs^ 
tion] 

4.  [Instructions  for  sanitary  train — location  of  dressing  stations 
and  station  for  slightly  wounded] 

[Instructions  for  ammunition  train — ^location  of  ammunition  dis- 
tributing stations] 

[Instructions  for  field  and  supply  trains,  if  not  previously  covered 
in  orders] 

5.  [Place  of  commander  of  where  messages  may  be  sent] 
[How  and  to  whom  issued]  [Authentication] 


English  of  Military  Communications  191 

For  an  attack. 
Field  Orders  [Titie] 

No.  —  [Place] 

[Reference  to  map  used]  [Date  and  hour] 

1.  [Information  of  enemy  and  of  our  supporting  troops] 

2.  [Plan  of  commander — indicating  the  general  plan  of  attadc, 
usually  to  envelop  a  flank] 

3.  (a)  [Information  for  artillery — position,  first  target,  generally 
hostile  artillery] 

(b)  [Instructions  for  holding  attack' — commander,  troops,  direc- 
tion and  objective] 

(c)  [Instructions  for  main  attack — commander,  troops,  direction 
and  objective] 

(d)  [Instructions  for  reserve — commander,  troops,  position] 

(e)  Instructions  for  cavalry — generally  to  operate  on  one  or  both 
flanks,  or  to  execute  some  special  mission] 

(f)  [Instructions   for  engineers — any   special   mission] 

(g)  [Instructions  for  signal  troops — to  establish  lines  of  informa- 
tion between  the  commander  and  the  main  and  secondary  attacks, 
artillery,  reserves,  etc.] 

4.  [Instructions  for  sanitary  train — location  of  dressing  stations 
and  stations  for  slightly  wounded  when  practicable] 

[Instructions  for  ammunition  train — location  of  ammunition  dis- 
trihiitinc  stations] 

[Instructions  for  field  and  supply  trains,  if  not  previously  cov- 
ered in  orders] 

5.  [Place  of  commander  or  where  messages  may  be  sent] 
[How  and  to  whom  issued]  [Authentication] 
Note. — In  war  it  is  not  always  possible  to  issue  a  complete  attack 

order  like  the  above,  disposing  of  an  entire  command.  In  unexpected 
encounters,  for  instance,  orders  must  be  given  as  the  situation  de- 
v*»lnns. 

For  a  retreat. 
Field  Orders  [Title] 

No.  —  [Place] 

[Reference  to  map  used]  [Date  and  hour] 

Troops  1.  [Information  of  enemy  and  of  our  sup- 

(a)  Leading  Troops:      porting  troops] 

[Commander]          2.  [Plan  of  commander — to  retire  in  direc- 
[ Troops]  tion  of ] 


*  The  term  "holding  attack"  as  used  in  this  form  is  for  convenience 
only;  it  is  never  used  in  actual  orders,  as  the  vigor  of  an  attack 
might  be  lessened  if  the  troops  knew  it  was  "holding"  only. 


192 


English  of  Military  Communications 


(b)  Main    Body  —  in 

order  of  march: 
[Troops] 

(c)  Rear  Guard: 

[Commander] 
[Troops] 

(d)  Right  [left]  Flank 

Guard: 

[Commander] 
[Troops] 

(e)  Signal  Troops: 

[Commander] 
[Troops] 


[How  and  to  whom  issued] 


3.  (a)  [Instructions  for  leading  troops — 
place  and  time  of  departure,  route,  special 
mission] 

(b)  [Instructions  for  main  body — place 
and  time  of  departure,  route] 

(c)  [Instructions  for  rear  guard — distance 
from  the  main  body  or  place  and  time  of  de- 
parture, special  mission] 

(d)  [Instructions  for  flank  guard — place 
and  time  of  departure,  special  mission] 

(e)  [Instructions  for  signal  troops — lines 
of  information] 

(x)  [Instructions  for  outposts — when  re- 
lieved, subsequent  duties — usually  forming 
the  rear  guard] 

4.  [Instructions  for  field  and  divisional 
trains — place  and  time  of  departure,  route, 
escort;  these  trains  are  generally  some  dis- 
tance ahead  of  the  column] 

5.  [Place  of  commander  or  where  messages 
may  be  sent] 

[  Authentication  ] 


For  rear  guards. 


Field  Orders 
No.  — 
[Reference  to  map  used] 


[Title] 
[Place] 

[Date  and  hour] 


Troops 

(a)  Reserve — in  or- 

der of  march: 
[Troops] 

(b)  Support: 

[Commander] 
[Troops] 

(c)  Rear  Cavalry: 

[Commander] 
[Troops] 


1.  [Information  of  enemy  and  of  our  sup- 
porting troops] 

2.  [Plan  of  commander — mission  of  rear 
guard] 

3.  (a)  [Instructions  for  reserve — place  and 
time  of  departure,  or  approximate  distance 
from  main  body,  reconnaissance] 

(b)  [Instructions  for  support — place  and 
time  of  departure  or  distance  from  reserve, 
any  special  reconnaissance] 

(c)  [Instructions   for   rear   cavalry — place 


(d)  Right  [left]  Flank   and  time  of  departure,  road  or  country  to  be 
Guard:  covered,  special  mission] 

[Commander]  (d)    [Instructions    for   flank    guard — place 

[Troops]  and  time  of  departure,  route,  special  mission] 

4.  [Instructions  for  field  train  when  neces- 
sary— usually  to  join  the  train  of  main  body] 


English  of  Military  Communications 


198 


5.  [Place  of  commander  or  where  messages  may  be  sent — ^location 
of  lines  of  information] 

[  Authentication  ] 
[How  and  to  whom  issued] 

Mabch  Table 
In  movements  of  large  forces  on  several  roads,  it  is  sometimes 
desirable  to  prescribe  the  daily  marches  of  the  various  columns  for 
two  or  more  days.  In  such  cases  the  order  may  often  be  simplified 
by  appending  or  incorporating  a  march  table  usually  in  the  following 
form,  each  coliunn  providing  its  own  security. 


Army,  from 


March  Table. 
[date],  to 


[Reference  to  map  used.] 


[date]. 


Date 


Division 


Location  of  main 
body  or  of  advance 
guard  at  end  of 
each  day's  march, 
and  line  of  march, 
if  necessary. 


Division 


Location  of  main 
body  or  of  advance 
guard  at  end  of 
each  day's  march, 
and  line  of  match, 
if  necessary. 


Army  Hq. 


Location 
of  each 
march. 


at    end 
day's 


APPENDIX  2 

Abbreviations 

Field  Maps  and  Sketches 

The  following  abbreviations  and  signs  are  authorized  for  use  on 

field  maps  and  sketches.    For  more  elaborate  map  work  the  authorized 

conventional  signs  as  given  in  the  manual  of  "Conventional  Signs, 

United  States  Army  Maps,"  are  used. 

Abbreviations  other  than  those  given  should  not  be  used. 


Abbreviations. 

A. 

Arroyo. 

L.  S.  S. 

Life-Saving  Station- 

abut 

Abutment 

L.H. 

Lighthouse. 

Ar. 

Arch. 

Long. 

Longitude. 

b. 

Brick. 

Mt 

Mountain. 

B.  S 

Blacksmith  Shop. 

Mts. 

Mountains. 

hot 

Bottom. 

N. 

North. 

Br. 

Branch. 

n.f. 

Not  fordable. 

bro 

Bridge. 

P. 

Pier. 

C. 

Cape. 

pk. 

Plank. 

cem. 

Cemetery. 

P.O. 

Post  Office. 

con. 

Concrete. 

Pt 

Point. 

cov. 

Covered, 

q.p. 

Queen-post. 

Cr. 

Creek. 

R. 

River. 

cul. 

Culvert. 

R.  H. 

Roundhouse. 

d. 

Deep. 

R.  R. 

Railroad. 

D.  S. 

Drug  Store. 

S. 

South. 

E. 

East. 

s. 

Steel. 

Est 

Estuary. 

S.  H. 

Schoolhouse. 

f. 

Fordable. 

S.  M. 

Sawmill. 

Ft. 

Fort. 

Sta. 

Station. 

G.  S. 

General  Store. 

St. 

Stone. 

gir. 

Girder. 

str. 

Stream. 

G.  M. 

GristmilL 

T.  G. 

ToUgate. 

1. 

Iron. 

Tres. 

Trestle 

I. 

Island. 

tr. 

Truss. 

Jc 

Junction. 

W.  T. 

Water  Tank. 

k.p. 

King-post 

W.W. 

Water  Works. 

L. 

Lake. 

W. 

West. 

Lat. 

Latitude. 

w. 

Wood. 

Ldg. 

Landing. 

wd. 

Wide. 

English  of  Military  Communicationt  IQS 

Tactical  organizations: 

8d  Div Third  Infantry  Division. 

1st  Cav.  Div First  Cavalry  Division. 

1st  Sep.  Brig First  Separate  Brigade, 

8th  Brig,  8d  Div Eighth  Infantry  Brigade  of  Third  In- 
fantry Division. 

2d  Brig.  1st  Cav.  Div.  .  .Second  Cavalry  Brigade  of  First  Cavalry 
Division. 

4th  Brig.  F.  A Fourth  Brigade  of  Field  Artillery. 

6th  Hv.  A Fifth  Regiment  of  Heavy  Artillery. 

4th  M.  A Fourth  Regiment  of  Mountain  Artillery. 

1st  Pon.  Bn First  Ponton  Battalion. 

1st  Aero  Sq First  Aero  Squadron. 

3d  Inf Third  Regiment  of  Infantry. 

2d  Cav Second  Regiment  of  Cavalry. 

3d  L.  A Third  Regiment  of  Light  Artillery. 

6th  H.  A Sixth  Regiment  of  Horse  Artillery. 

1st  Bn.  Engrs First  Pioneer  Battalion  of  Engineers. 

1st  Bn.  mtd.  Engrs First    Pioneer    Battalion    of    Engineers, 

Mounted. 

1st  Bn.  Sig First  Field  Battalion  Signal  Troops. 

1st  Bn.  Sig.  cav First  Field  Battalion  Signal  Troops,  Cav- 
alry, ., 

1st  Tel.  Bn First  Telegraph  Battalion. 

Trains: 

C.  Tn Combat  train. 

F.  Tn Field  train. 

B.  Sec.  F.  Tn Baggage  section  field  train. 

R.  Sec.  F.  Tn Ration  section  field  train. 

Am.  Tn Ammunition  train. 

Sp.  Tn Supply  train. 

Sn.  Tn Sanitary  train. 

1st  Arab.  Co First  Ambulance  Company. 

2d  F.  Hosp.  Co Second  Field  Hospital  Company. 

1st  Med.  Res.  Co First  Medical  Reserve  Company. 

Engr.  Tn Engineer  train. 

Columns  (1  of  c): 

Am.  Col Ammunition  column. 

Sp.  Col Supply  column. 

Sn.  Col Sanitary  column. 

Engr.  Col Engineer  column. 


196  English  of  Military  Communications 

Fractional  Organization. 
Infantry: 

3d  Div.  (less  cav.  and  1  bn.  F.  A.) 

2d  Brig,  (less  1  regt.) 

1st  Inf.  (less  6  cos.  and  M.  G.  Co.) 

1  bn.  6th  Inf. 

1st  Bn.  6th  Inf.  (less  1  co.) 

Co.  A  1st  Inf.  (less  1  plat.) 

Cavalry: 

1st  Cav.  Div.  (less  1  brig.) 

2d  Brig,  (less  1  regt.) 

3d  Cav.  (less  1  sq.  and  M.  G.  detch.) 

1  Sq.  4th  Cav. 

1st  Sq.  4th  Cav.  (less  1  tr.) 

Tr.  C  4th  Cav.  (less  2  plats.) 

Artillery: 

4th  Brig.  F.  A.   (les  1  bn.) 

3d  L.  (less  1  bn.) 

1  bn.  1st  L.  A.  (less  1  btry.) 

1st  L.  A.  (less  2  btries.) 

Btry  A  6th  H.  A. 

6th  Hv.  A.  (less  1  bn.  6"  How.) 

1  Bn.  4.7"  How.,  5th  Hv.  A. 

1  Btry.  4.7"  gun,  6th  Hv.  A. 

Engineers: 

1st  Bn.  Engrs.  (less  1  co.) 
Co.  A  Engrs.  (less  1  sec.) 

2  Sees.  Engrs. 

1st  Pon.  Bn.  (less  1  co.  heavy  equip.) 
1  pon.  CO.  light  equip,  (less  2  bridge  div.) 

Signal: 

1st  Bn.  Sig.  (less  1  wire  plat.) 

1  rad.  Co.  Sig. 

1  wire  Co.  Sig. 

1  rad.  sec.  pack,  Sig. 

1  rad.  plat,  wagon,  Sig. 

1  wire  Sec.  Sig. 

1  wire  plat.  Sig. 

Miscellaneous : 

Adj adjutant. 

Adm.  Sec.  G.  S administrative  section,  general  staff. 

A.  u.  of  Ry.     assistant  director  of  railways. 


English  of  Military  Communications  197 

Am ammunition. 

Adv.  Gd advance  guard. 

Adv.  Sec.  L.  of  C advance  section,  line  of  communications. 

Asst.  C.  of  S assistant  chief  of  staff. 

Base  Sec.  L.  of  C base  section,  line  of  communications. 

Brig.  Gen brigadier  general. 

Capt captain, 

C  G commanding  generaL 

C.  G.  L.  of  C commanding  genertd,  line  of  communica- 
tions. 

CO commanding  officer. 

Col colonel. 

C.  of  S chief  of  staflf. 

Comdg commanding. 

Comb.  Sec.  G.  S combat  section,  general  staff. 

Detch detachment. 

D.  of  Ry director  of  railways. 

E.  O engineer  officer. 

F.  O field  order. 

F.  S.  R field  service  regulations. 

Gd.    guard. 

Gen general. 

G.  O general  order. 

Insp inspector. 

Int.  Sec.  G.  S intelligence  section,  general  staff. 

Inter.  Sec.  L.  of  C intermediate  section,  line  of  communica- 
tions. 

J.  A judge  advocate. 

L.  of  C  line  of  communications. 

Lt.   lieutenant. 

Lt.  CoL   lieutenant  coloneL 

Lt.  Gen.  lieutenant  general. 

Maj major. 

Maj.  Gen major  general. 

M.  P military  police. 

N.  C.  O noncommissioned  officer. 

O.  O ordnance  officer. 

Q.  M quartermaster. 

S.  A.  Am small  arms  ammtinition. 

Sig.  O signal  officer. 

S.  O special  order. 

Surg surgeon. 


Edited  by 
COLONEL  JAMES  A.  MOSS 


Published   Quarterly   and  dated  Jan.   1,  April  1, 
July  1,  and  Oct.  1. 

Every  number  gives  ALL  changes  in  the  Army 
Regulations,  Manual  of  Interior  Guard  Duty,  Drill 
Regulations  of  all  arms.  Field  Service  Regulations, 
Small-arms  Firing  Manual,  and  various  other  War 
Department  publications,  from  the  dates  of  their 
issue  to  the  date  of  the  last  number  of  Army 
Changes.  In  other  words,  each  number  of  Army 
Changes  is  complete  in  itself,  and  upon  receipt  of 
the  last  number  the  previous  one  may  be  discarded. 
And  it  is  issued  promptly,  while  the  changes  are  still 
new. 

The  changes  are  printed  on  one  side  of  the  page 
only,  so  that  "posting"  can  be  done  the  same  as  with 
Changes  as  issued  by  the  War  Department. 

Completeness  and  Accuracy  Guaranteed 

Subscription:  $1.50  a  Year 
Single  Copies,  50  Cents 


Published  by 

George  Banta  Publishing  Co. 


Menasha,  Wisconsin 


NEW  BOOKS 


Notes  from  the  Front  (Major  C.  R.  Yates, 
British  Army) 75 

Studies  in  Troop  Leading  (General  Morrison 
and  Lt.-Col.  E.  L.  Munson) 1.40 

Troops  on  Riot  Duty  (Stockton  and  Dickin- 
son)   75 

Squad  Leaders'  Notebook 75 

Extra  (pads,  10c) 

French-English    Dictionary    of    Machine 
Gun  Terms  (Major  Maloney) 50 


Complete  Catalog  on  request. 

George  Banta  Publishing  Co. 

Menasha,  Wisconsin 


Government 
Publications 

Banta's  Special 
Editions 

of 

Field  Service  Regulations  (with  questions) $  .75 

Infantry  Drill  Regulations  (with  questions) 50 

Manual  of  Military  Court  Martial   (improved 

index)   1.10 

Army  Regulations  (List  of  paragraphs  applicable 
to  line  officers  in  particular,  especially  those  just 

entering   service) 1.00 

Manual  of  Interior  Guard  Duty  (with  questions)     .50 
(paper  bound  with  questions)     .25 
Manual  foe  Noncommissioned  Officers  and  Pri- 
vates   50 

Manual  for  Army  Cooks 75 

Drill  Regulations  for  Machine  Gun  Companies.  .     .30 

Small  Arms  Firing  Manual  (with  questions) 75 

All  other  Government  publications. 


Write  for  our  complete  catalog  of  military  booTcs. 

George  Banta  Publishing  Co. 

Menasha,  Wisconsin 


^1                           DATE  DUE 

>' 

V 

■ 

■ 

m 

■' 

.flH 

■ 

■ 

■1 

^ 

m 

^ 

m 

^^^H             CAYLORD 

PRINTED  IN  U.S.A. 

S      i?     L     f 
SEE  SPINE  FOR  BARCODE  NUMBER 


